Comparative Grammar of German Dutch and Afrikaans Learn N Compare 3 Languages Simultaneously - Unknown
Comparative Grammar of German Dutch and Afrikaans Learn N Compare 3 Languages Simultaneously - Unknown
MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
ISBN: 9798884904316
ii

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
DEDICATION
For all those who have been so patiently waiting for this book…
i

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
ii

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
CONTENTS
Acknowledgements xxii
Symbols xxiii
Introduction: Alphabet 1
Consonants 2
Consonant Sound Rules 5
Vowels 13
Vowel Sound Rules 14
Digraphs 20
Diphthongs 21
Chapter 1: Nouns 23
Gender of Nouns 23
iii

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Nouns which are Singular in English but Plural in German, Dutch and Afrikaans 66
Nouns which are Plural in English but Singular in German, Dutch and Afrikaans 67
Nouns which are usually Singular 69
Diminutives in German, Dutch and Afrikaans 72
Compound Nouns 91
Overview 112
The Four German Cases 113
The Nominative Case (Der Nominativ/Der Werfall) 113
The Genitive Case (Der Genitiv/Der Wesfall) 115
The Dative Case (Der Dativ/Der Wemfall) 121
The Accusative Case (Der Akkusativ/Der Wenfall) 125
Case Forms of Nouns in German 130
iv

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Overview 133
The Nominative Case 133
The Genitive Case 134
The Dative and Accusative Cases 135
Declension of Proper Nouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans 136
v

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Overview 243
vi

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Overview 263
Use of Direct Object (Accusative) Pronouns 265
Peculiarities of Direct Object Pronouns Use in Dutch 265
Word Order of Direct Object Pronouns 268
Use of Accusative Case with Certain Prepositions in German 271
Common Verbs Used with Accusative Case in German 271
Indirect Object (Dative) Pronouns 272
vii

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Possession with “s” in German and Dutch and “se” in Afrikaans 310
Possession with “d’r”, “z’n” and “hun” in Dutch 311
Possession with “s’n” in Afrikaans 312
Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns 313
viii

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Overview 399
ix

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Overview 439
Formation of Past Participle of Regular (Weak) Verbs 441
Common Regular Verbs in The Past Participle 442
Verb Spelling Changes of Regular Verbs in The Past Participle in German and Dutch 443
Formation of Past Participle of Irregular (Strong) Verbs 453
List of (Strong) Irregular Verbs in the Past Participle 455
Mixed Verbs in the Past Participle in German 465
Use of Past Participle 466
The Present Perfect 467
Overview 481
Formation of the Preterite of Regular (Weak) Verbs 482
Common Regular Verbs in The Preterite Tense 483
Verb Spelling and Vowel Changes of Regular Verbs in the Preterite 484
The Preterite Tense of (Strong) Irregular Verbs 487
Vowel Changes in the Stem of Irregular Verbs in the Preterite Tense and Past Participle 490
Spelling Changes in an Irregular Verb Conjugation in the Preterite Tense in German 495
List of (Strong) Irregular Verbs in the Preterite 495
List of Irregular Verbs in the Preterite in Afrikaans 504
Mixed Verbs in the Preterite in German 506
Use of the Preterite 507
Special Use of the Preterite in German 511
Difference between the Preterite and the Present Perfect in the West Germanic 513
languages
x

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Overview 537
Formation of the Present Conditional 537
Use of the Conditional Tense 538
The Conditional Perfect Tense 541
Overview 541
Formation of the Conditional Perfect 541
Use of the Conditional Perfect Tense 542
Conditional Clauses 544
Overview 547
Basic Rules for Indicative and Subjunctive 548
xi

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Overview 552
Formation of the Past Subjunctive (Subjunctive II) in German 553
Formation of the Subjunctive II of Regular Verbs in German 553
Common Verbs in The Subjunctive II 554
Spelling Changes of Regular Verbs in the Past Subjunctive (Subjunctive II) in German 554
The Subjunctive II of Irregular Verbs in German 556
The Subjunctive II Verb Forms that are still Used in German 558
Could/Should Have Done in German 560
The Passive Voice 561
Overview 561
Formation of the Passive Voice 561
Passive Voice with Ger. Sein/Werden, Dut. Zijn/Worden, Afr. Wees/Word 563
Modal Verbs in the Passive Voice 564
Use of the Introductory Ger. es, Dut. er, Afr. daar with Passives 565
The Statal Passive 566
Alternatives to Passive Voice in the West Germanic Languages 567
When to Use the Passive Voice 569
The Continuous Tenses 570
Overview 578
Rules for the use of Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. om te with Infinitives 578
Omission of Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. om te 579
Use of Ger. um…zu, Dut. om…te, Afr. om…te before Infinitives 580
xii

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Let and Verbs of Perception + the Infinitive in West Germanic languages 585
Overview 586
Formation of the Present Participle (Gerund) 586
Use of Present Participle 587
No Use of Present Participle (Gerund) 588
The Imperative Mood 588
Irregular Imperative of Ger Sein, Dut. Zijn, Afr. Wees - “to Be” 591
Other Irregular Verbs in the Imperative in German 592
The Negative Imperative 592
Softened Commands in West Germanic Languages 594
Particles Used with Commands in Dutch 595
Reflexive Verbs 596
Overview 596
Separable Verbal Prefixes in German and Dutch 596
Other Characteristics of Separable Verbal Prefixes 597
Examples of Separable Verbal Prefixes 600
Inseparable Verbal Prefixes 622
Other Characteristics of Inseparable Verbal Prefixes 624
Examples of Inseparable Verbal Prefixes 626
Distinction between Separable and Inseparable Verbs in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans 637
Numbers 638
Overview 638
Cardinal Numbers 638
Peculiarities of Spelling Rules of Cardinal Numbers in the West Germanic Languages 642
Phrases of Approximation Used with Cardinal Numbers 646
xiii

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Peculiarities of Spelling Rules of Ordinal Numbers in the West Germanic Languages 653
Use of Ordinal Numbers 655
Adverbial Ordinals in the West Germanic Languages 657
Fractions 657
Decimals 659
Arithmetical Operations 660
Collective Numbers 661
Days 662
Months 663
Ways to Ask the Date in the West Germanic Languages 667
Seasons 667
Time 668
Overview 676
xiv

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Overview 753
Overview 779
Index 787
xv

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
Many of my readers who purchased and used in their studies the Comparative Grammar of
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian and French, that I publish in 2018, and who liked it, asked me to release the
Comparative Grammar of German, Dutch and Afrikaans as well. So I decided to write and publish the
Comparative Grammar of German, Dutch and Afrikaans for my loyal and patient readers, as well as for all
of the fans and learners of West Germanic languages who would be happy to have such a book.
Comparative Grammar of German, Dutch and Afrikaans is a complete reference guide to all the
aspects of these three West Germanic languages. It is the ideal reference book for those who would like to
learn and compare German, Dutch and Afrikaans simultaneously or one by one.
It is designed not only for beginners who do not have an extensive knowledge of grammar, yet
need a guide through the grammatical concepts of all mentioned above languages, but also intermediate
and advanced students who would like to have a reference book of several West Germanic languages at
once.
Comparative Grammar of German, Dutch and Afrikaans can also be used for either independent
study or for learners in classes of all types.
It presents a clear and easy-to-read description of the German, Dutch and Afrikaans grammar
with chapters divided into nouns, pronouns, verbs, prepositions, articles, etc. detailing how each of the
three West Germanic languages operate. The book is well-organized, neatly tabulated, with separate
subheadings for topics that require a little more language-specific discussion.
• Sections on the geographical, historical and cultural facts of the German, Dutch and Afrikaans-speaking
world.
This book is written for learners who are particularly fond of or would like to concentrate on
learning German, Dutch and Afrikaans or just to get an all-round knowledge of these three West
Germanic languages.
xvi

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
Furthermore, I have aimed to create a useful and must-have book for all those interested in the
three main and most wide-spread West Germanic languages - German, Dutch and Afrikaans with concise
and clear explanations of all grammatical areas and numerous practical examples taken from current
German, Dutch and Afrikaans usage.
Below I will briefly discuss characteristics and lexical similarities of German, Dutch and
Afrikaans. Also, I will give eight tips on how to effectively study these four languages and avoid confusion
while learning them simultaneously or one by one, as well as why you should ever learn German, Dutch
and Afrikaans.
We know that all the Germanic languages are divided into three groups: West, East and North
Germanic. Many scholars claim that all Germanic languages remained mutually intelligible until the late
20th century.
In fact, thanks to the significant scientific progress in the study of Proto-West Germanic
languages in the 21st century, there is a growing consensus that specifically East and West Germanic
languages would have been mutually unintelligible at that time.
Therefore, the significant grammatical and lexical convergence will allow the simultaneously
study of several West Germanic languages.
Below are some examples that demonstrate apparent lexical similarities between German, Dutch,
and Afrikaans.
xvii

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
The answer is no. In order to avoid mess and confusion in learning, I suggest 8 tips on how to
effectively study these four languages:
1. To make the process of learning better structured and more effective, learn the grammatical rules and
phrases of these four languages in a fixed and strict sequence. These languages have already been put
in a strict order for you to learn. The sequence is this: at first you read a rule or phrase in German =>
then in Dutch => and finally in Afrikaans. You should get used to this particular sequence in order to
avoid confusion.
2. As Leonardo da Vinci once said, “Study without desire spoils the memory, and it retains nothing that it
takes in.” Motivate yourself and develop an overwhelming and strong desire to learn and master
German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Motivation and understanding of how important the knowledge of
these languages is to you is the key to success. Constantly remind yourself why you need to learn
several or all of these languages and where you are going to use them.
xviii

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
3. Try to read and memorize the rules of each chapter at least twice before starting with the next one. If
you genuinely wish to improve your German, Dutch or Afrikaans, return and revise each chapter over
again. Practice makes perfect. Remember that.
4. While reading new rules, phrases and constructions, try to make up your own sentences and examples
using the rules that you just learned.
5. Use this book with a pencil to underline rules or constructions that you feel are important and which
you may use later on in conversation.
6. Revise comparative grammar of German, Dutch and Afrikaans from time to time. Because our brain
tends to forget all the grammar rules we’ve learned so rapidly, we constantly need to refresh our
memory by reviewing and repeating them at times.
7. Practice your German, Dutch and/or Afrikaans in real conversations with native speakers no matter
how good or bad you know those languages. Use these language every day and at every opportunity
both in the streets and on the internet, on social networks or different online chats. Learning is an
active process. You will never learn a language until you practice it with people.
8. Your final goal is to speak German, Dutch and/or Afrikaans. Therefore, use your notebook or any
device to record all the new words and phrases you hear while practicing your languages with people
or watching TV or listening radio in German, Dutch or Afrikaans.
The West Germanic languages represent the largest of the two existing branches of the Germanic
family of languages (the other being the North Germanic).
Nowadays over 500 million people speak the West Germanic languages in Europe, South and
North America, Africa and Asia. The West Germanic languages include the four most widely spoken
Germanic languages: English, German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
English is the most-spoken West Germanic language with around 400 million native speakers.
German has over 100 million native speakers. Dutch comprises around 25 million native speakers; and
Afrikaans, which is an offshoot or a daughter language of Dutch originating from the Afrikaners of South
Africa, with over 7.2 million native speakers.
Besides these four most widely spoken West Germanic languages, there are also Low German,
Luxembourgish, Yiddish, Scots, Limburgish and and the Frisian languages. Additionally, creoles, patois,
and pidgins are based on Dutch, English, or German.
It is quite difficult to determine the exact number of languages belonging to the West Germanic
group as there are no accurate methods of division between a “language” and a “dialect”.
Low German is considered a separate set of unstandardized dialects, with around 7 million native
speakers and probably 6-10 million people who can understand it. Yiddish is used by approximately 1.5
million native speakers; Scots has about 1.5 million native speakers; Limburgish varieties with roughly 1.5
million speakers along the Dutch–Belgian–German border; and the Frisian languages has over 500,000
native speakers on the southern fringes of the North Sea in the Netherlands and Germany.
German is mainly spoken in Western and Central Europe. It is the official or co-official language
in Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Liechtenstein, Luxembourg, Belgium, the Italian province of South
Tyrol, as well as a recognized national language in Namibia. It is also spoken by German communities in
France, Czech Republic, Poland, Slovakia, and Hungary.
xix

MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
In Europe, Dutch is the official or one of the official languages in the Netherlands and Belgium (as
one of three official languages). Outside Europe, Dutch holds an official status and is the native language
of the South American country of Suriname, the Caribbean island countries of Aruba, Curaçao and Sint
Maarten, which are constituent countries of the Kingdom of the Netherlands. It is also spoken by Dutch
communities in the United States, Canada and Australia (half a million native speakers combined).
Afrikaans is spoken, as the native and second language by over 17 million people, in South Africa,
Namibia and, to a lesser extent, Botswana, Zambia and Zimbabwe.
There is a large number of television programs and radio programs broadcasting, many books,
newspapers, magazines and journals are published worldwide in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
Furthermore, German, Dutch and/or Afrikaans are official languages of the European Union, as
well as many other international organizations, communities, congresses and conferences. Also, Afrikaans
and/or Dutch are official languages of such international institutions as Benelux Union, African Union,
Caribbean Community.
Thus, the West Germanic languages play a significant role in the world, arouse genuine interest
and have obvious practical benefit for learners.
In conclusion, I would like to sincerely thank you for purchasing the book and your interest in it. I
hope it will help you improve your languages. If I can help you in any way, please do not hesitate to
contact me. I would be glad to answer any questions and share ideas related to multilingualism and
learning multiple languages simultaneously.
I also welcome any remarks from readers. I have created a list of errata for the book in Google
Docs. So I welcome you to make remarks and corrections to improve it. Here are the QR code and the
link: https://rb.gy/8ufoov
Mikhail Petrunin
Email: [email protected]
Website: quadrilingual.com
xx
COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
xxi
MIKHAIL PETRUNIN
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I would like to thank the following people for the hours of their precious time they devoted to
supporting, encouraging and motivating me, as well as proofreading this book: Dr. Martens - a PhD in
Linguistics, polyglot, experienced language educator and expert in phonology of Germanic languages;
Hope - a McGill alumnus, editor, my girlfriend and my biggest supporter; Asya - my former student,
linguist who helped me writing this book; Kai - one of the nicest friends I met in Montreal; Michel David -
my mentor and competent reviewer.
Despite the care and attention that has been involved into producing this book, there are,
undoubtedly, errors, oversights and inaccuracies for which I take full responsibility.
xxii

COMPARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GERMAN, DUTCH, AND AFRIKAANS
SYMBOLS
> – becomes, changes to
Ger. – German
Dut. – Dutch
Afr. – Afrikaans
Masc. or m. - Masculine
Fem. or f. - Feminine
Neut. - Neuter
Pl. - Plural
Cons. - Consonant
Pronun. - Pronunciation
N. - Nominative
A. - Accusative
D. - Dative
G. - Genitive
ex. - Example
xxiii

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Letter Names and Pronunciations
The alphabet of West Germanic languages is based on the Latin alphabet with a variety of
additional accent marks and extra letters. The German, Dutch and Afrikaans alphabet consists of 26
letters.
Like any other languages, German, Dutch and Afrikaans pronunciation of some of the letters
differ between particular regions and areas. For instance, German is spoken over a large area and in
several countries, therefore, there are a lot of regional variants of pronunciation. Some of these variations
are considered standard, while others are considered dialects. In this book we dealt with standard
variants. Standard Dutch officially has two main pronunciation standards: Northern and Belgian.
The only way to pronounce and understand various accents of German, Dutch and Afrikaans
correctly is to listen and try to copy native speakers.
Below is the table that shows letters and their names in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
1

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
NOTE:
German also has letter-diacritic combinations using the umlaut, such as Ää,
Öö, Üü and one ligature ẞß. It is called eszett (sz) or scharfes S (sharp s).
However, these letters are not part of the German alphabet.
Consonants
In the West Germanic languages, many consonants are pronounced in the similar or very close
way as their English equivalents, such as: b, d, f, g, k, l, m, n, s, t etc. However, there are German, Dutch
and Afrikaans sounds that are not used in standard English.
The following table demonstrates all the consonants, their respective pronunciation and
examples in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
Consonant b b b
Consonant c c __
2
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Consonant d d d
Consonant f f f
Consonant g g g
Consonant h h h
Consonant j j j
Consonant k k k
Consonant l l l
Consonant m m m
Consonant n n n
3

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Consonant p p p
Consonant r r r
Consonant s s s
Consonant t t t
Consonant v v v
Consonant w w w
Consonant x x x
Consonant y y __
Consonant z z __
4

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
To help you with pronunciation even more, we will explain the rules for consonant sounds in
more detail below including more examples of these consonant sounds and their English approximations,
as many consonants have complex rules that require more attention. Pay attention to the consonants in
bold, these are the ones that we are talking about in each example.
• The consonant b is pronounced as [b] elsewhere (similar to the fully voiced English [b] as in about or
bar), for example:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the consonant b is voiceless at the end of a
word and is pronounced as [p] (same as the English [p] in pit), for example:
C
• In Dutch, the consonant c is pronounced as [k] (similar to the English consonants c or k as in can or
king) before consonants or the vowels a, o, u. In German and Dutch, the consonant k is used in this
case (See Consonant Kk p. 9). To illustrate:
– client.
5
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
• The consonant c is also pronounced as [s] (as in sit) before vowels e, i in Dutch and as [ts] (as in cats)
in German. In Afrikaans, the consonant s is used in this case (See Consonant S p. 10). Study the
following:
– cent.
D
• The consonant d is pronounced as [d] (same as the English [d]). For instance:
– to think.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the consonant d is voiceless at the end of a word
and is pronounced as [t] (same as the English [t] in top), for example:
F
• The consonant f is pronounced as [f] (similar to the English consonant f as in foot). For instance:
6
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Gg
• The consonant g is pronounced as [g] in German and as [x] in Dutch and Afrikaans. The German [g] is
pronounced similar to the English consonant g as in gap. The Dutch and Afrikaans [x] is pronounced
like ch in Scottish loch) Study the following:
– gold.
NOTE:
In German, the consonant g is voiceless at the end of a word and is pronounced
as [k], for example:
• In Dutch, the consonant g can also be pronounced as [ʒ] in words borrowed from French. It is
pronounced similar to the English sound of the “s” as in “measure”. Observe the following:
– lodging.
H
• In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the consonant h at the beginning of a words is pronounced as in
English. For instance:
– house.
7
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
NOTE:
In German, the consonant h is not pronounced after a vowel but simply shows
that the vowel is long, for example:
J
• The consonant j is pronounced as [j] (like y in English yes). Study the following:
- year.
• In German and Dutch, the consonant j is also pronounced as [ʒ] in words borrowed from French. It is
pronounced like the English “s” in “leisure”. Observe the following:
- journalist.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, the consonant j is pronounced as [j] (like y in English
yes) in this case, for instance:
K
• The consonant k is pronounced similar to certain instances of English k or c in scan without the puff of
air that accompanies English [k] at the beginning of a word (as in English cat). Observe the following:
– cat.
8
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
L
• The consonants l is pronounced as [l] everywhere, which is similar to the typical English l (as in letter).
For instance:
– light.
M
• The consonant m is pronounced as [m] everywhere (same as the typical English m in mother), for
example:
– moon.
N
• The consonant n is pronounced as [n] everywhere (same as the typical English n in nickel), for
example:
– name.
• The consonant n is also pronounced as [ŋ] (as in English sink or sing) before a velar consonant (a
consonant that is pronounced with the back part of the tongue against the back part of the roof of the
mouth), e.g. -ng, which occurs medially or finally in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Observe the
following:
– singer.
9

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
• The consonant p is pronounced as [p] everywhere in West Germanic languages. It is pronounced the
same as certain instances of English p, e.g. span or spot but without the puff of air that accompanies
English [p] sound at the beginning of words as in piano or pine. For instance:
• In German and Dutch (heard in the north of the Netherlands, especially in the cities), the consonant r is
pronounced as [ʁ] (a voiced, uvular sound produced in the back of the throat) everywhere. This sound is
close to the as in French “Paris” or “restaurant”.
However, in Afrikaans and in Dutch (in much of the Netherlands and through Flanders), the
consonant r is pronounced as [r] (the tongue tip trill is heard as the “Spanish “r”). Study the following:
– rat.
S
• In German (mainly at the end of a word), in Dutch and Afrikaans, the consonant s is always pronounced
as unvoiced [s] (as in English sit), for instance:
– glass.
• In German, however, at the beginning and in the middle of a word the consonant s is also pronounced
as voiced [z] (as in zebra) between vowels. To illustrate:
10
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
– son.
NOTE:
In German, the combination ss is pronounced as [s] too, for example:
T
• In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the consonant t is pronounced similar to the English [t] as in “stand”,
but less aspirated (without the puff of air that accompanies English [t] at the beginning of a word as in
tape). To illustrate:
• The consonant v is pronounced as [v] (same as the English consonant as in vision) in Dutch. However,
in German and Afrikaans, the consonant v is always pronounced as [f]. Study the following:
– father.
NOTE:
In German and Afrikaans, at the beginning of loanwords the consonant v is
pronounced as [v] like in English and Dutch, for example:
11
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
• Unlike in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans the consonant w is pronounced as [v]. Study the
following:
NOTE:
In Dutch (especially in Flanders) the consonant v is usually pronounced similar to
the English [w].
• The consonant x is rare in German, Dutch and Afrikaans and appears in many foreign words and
loanwords. It is pronounced as [ks] (same as the English [x] in taxi, or six). For example:
– xylophone.
• The consonant y is pronounced as [y] (as long ü) in German and as [i] in Dutch. For example:
– typical.
12
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
• The consonant z is pronounced as [ts] (as in cats) in German and as [z] (as in zebra) in Dutch. For
example:
– zone.
Vowels
All vowels in West Germanic languages are generally shorter, clearer, and purer which means that
they do not have rounded endings, unlike in English. There are five vowel letters in Spanish, Portuguese,
Italian and French.
The following table demonstrates all the vowels, their respective pronunciation and examples
in West Germanic languages.
Consonant a a, aa a, aa
Consonant ä __ __
Consonant e e, ee e, ee, ê
Consonant i i i
Consonant ie ie ie
13

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Consonant o o, oo o, oo
Consonant ö eu eu
Consonant u u, uu u, uu
Consonant __ oe oe
Consonant ü __ __
You will notice there are multiple sounds, as some vowels are open, closed or even muted,
depending on the word being enunciated in some West Germanic languages. Pay attention to the vowels
in bold, these are the ones that we are talking about in our examples, and try practising them out loud.
• The vowel a makes a similar sound to a in the English art or car. Study the following:
14

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
– hand.
NOTE:
The German vowel a is also pronounced as long [aː] (similar to the English father),
e.g.:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, aa is used to indicate that the vowel is long [aː]. To
compare:
German Ä
• In German, the vowel ä is pronounced as short [ɛ] (as in bed). Study the following:
– men.
• The German vowel ä can also be pronounced as long [ɛː] (as in hair). Observe the following:
– fathers.
• The vowel e is pronounced as closed [ɛ] (a closed sound as in English make, or as in café, but shorter
and pure without the ending [ɪ]) in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. To illustrate:
– bed.
15
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
NOTE:
The German vowel e can also be pronounced as long [eː] (as in tray, but pure
without the ending [ɪ]). Observe the following:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, ee is used to show the vowel is long [eː]. Compare the same
example:
• The vowel i is pronounced as [ɪ] (a similar sound to the English ea as in speak, or ee as in meet but
shorter in length) in West Germanic languages. For instance:
NOTE:
In German, in a few words, the vowel i is also pronounced as long [iː], e.g.:
IE
• The vowel ie is always pronounced as long [iː] (a similar sound to the English ee as in fee) in German.
Observe the following:
– she.
16
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
• In Dutch and Afrikaans, however, this sound is pronounced as short [i] (roughly like in English seek but
shorter). Observe the following:
– sick.
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the vowel ie can also be pronounced as long [iː] when
stressed and followed by r, for example:
• The vowel o is pronounced as the close-mid back rounded vowel [ɔ] (similar to the English code or go
but shorter and pure, with no [ʊ] ending) in West Germanic languages. Observe the following:
– lock.
NOTE:
The German vowel o is also pronounced as long [oː] (similar to the English post but
pure, with no [ʊ] ending). Observe the following:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, oo is used to show that the vowel is long [oː]. Compare the
same example:
17
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
It should be mentioned that in German, in some words, the vowels a, e and o are also doubled to
show they are long, for example:
Otherwise a single consonant following the vowels a, e and o usually shows that those vowels are
long, for instance:
• The vowel Ger. ö (in German) and the vowel eu (in Dutch and Afrikaans) are pronounced as [œ] and
[øː] respectively (as in bird). Study the following:
– nose.
• The German vowel ö can also be pronounced as long [øː] (as in bird but with the rounded lips):
– flute.
• The vowel u is pronounced as [ʊ] (similar to the English put or roof, but shorter) in German. Note that,
in Dutch, this sound is pronounced as [ʏ] (roughly like in English few). In Afrikaans, however, this
vowel is pronounced as [œ]. Observe the following:
18
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
– point.
NOTE:
The German vowel u is also pronounced as long [uː] (similar to the English
food but with less rounded lips). Observe the following:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, uu is used to show that the vowel is long [yː]. Compare
the following example:
• In Dutch and Afrikaans, the vowel oe is pronounced as short [u] (similar to the English put or boot, but
shorter). For instance:
– book.
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the vowel oe can also be pronounced as long [uː] if stressed
and followed by r, for example:
Ü (German)
• In German, the vowel ü is pronounced as short [ʏ] (as in too but shorter with more rounded and
tightened lips, as if trying to whistle). Study the following:
– twelve.
19
INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
• The German vowel ü can also be pronounced as long [yː] (as in food but longer with more rounded lips,
as if trying to whistle):
– feet.
Digraphs
The West Germanic languages use digraphs. Digraphs are pairs of letters that symbolize a single
sound and are usually not included in the alphabet.
Study the following digraphs that exist in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
Grapheme ch ch ch
Pronun. [k] __ __
Grapheme __ __ gh
Pronun. __ __ [g]
Grapheme ng ng ng
Grapheme ph
Pronun. [f] __ __
Example Photograph __ __
[fotoˈɡʁaːf]
Grapheme ps ps ps
20

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Diphthongs
Diphthong is a combination of two different vowels sounds within the same syllable, for example:
ow [əu] -> low. Knowing diphthongs will help learners with pronunciation and spelling.
The table below demonstrates diphthongs used in the West Germanic languages:
21

INTRODUCTION: ALPHABET
Example Stein /ʃtaɪn/ trein /trɛin/; dijk /dɛik/ trein /trəin/; ly /ləi/
Diphthong __ ou ou
Diphthong __ ui ui
22

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
A noun is a word that names a living being, different things or ideas, for instance, man,
prosperity, shop.
Gender of Nouns
In German and standard Dutch nouns have retained the three specific grammatical genders:
masculine, feminine, neuter that, like Afrikaans or English, other less conservative Germanic languages
have lost in part or in whole.
It should be stressed that in many parts of the Netherlands the grammatical distinction between
masculine and feminine nouns has disappeared over the years, creating a common gender in the Dutch
language. Thus, there is only a distinction between common and neuter.
NOTE:
In Dutch, the distinction between masculine and feminine nouns is still
maintained in formal or written standard Dutch. However, in informal speech
many speakers use the common gender instead.
Masculine and feminine or common nouns should generally be accompanied with the definite
article de in Dutch. In German, masculine and feminine nouns are used with the definite articles der and
die respectively. German das and Dutch het are used as the definite article of a neuter noun (See
Articles p. 218).
NOTE:
Nouns in Afrikaans, however, like in English and unlike in modern German and
Dutch, do not have grammatical gender. All the nouns are accompanied with
the definite article die.
Nouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans referring to a man, such as brother, son, father, etc., are
normally masculine. Those that were associated with a woman, such as sister, daughter, mother, etc., are
generally feminine. For example:
Did you know? Ger. der Bruder (masc.); die Schwester (fem.)
German remains the language that Dut. de broer (masc.); de zus (fem.)
has the most native speakers in Afr. die broer (masc.); die suster (fem.)
Europe (around 95 million people).
- the brother; the sister
23
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
However, in German and Dutch, the diminutive forms that end in Ger. -chen or -lein; Dut. -je
are grammatically neuter (See Diminutives in German and Dutch p. 72). For example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the diminutive form -ie is used.
- the girl
NOTE:
In German, all nouns must be capitalized. In Dutch and Afrikaans, however,
only proper nouns are capitalized. For example:
It is worth remembering that gender is not clearly marked on nouns in German and Dutch. Thus,
to learn gender effectively one should memorize German and Dutch nouns along with their accompanying
definite article.
However, in German and Dutch, there is a general rule helping to identify the gender of nouns, as
they are classified into gender groups in accordance with their endings. This will allow one to recognize a
considerable portion of noun genders.
Below is the table demonstrating masculine, feminine and neuter noun endings in German
and Dutch. It is not exhaustive, and considers only cases that follow some recognizable pattern:
German Dutch
masc. -er, -ant, -ast, -ich, -ig, -ismus, -el, -en, -er, -ant, -aar, -aard, -erd, -eur, -el, -ling,
-ling, -or, -us -ing, -or, -us
24
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
German Dutch
fem. -a, -anz, -ei, -e, enz, -heit, -ie, -ik, -in, -a, -at, -e, -ie, -ege/-egge, -es, -in, -ster, -de,
-keit, -schaft, -sion, -tät, -tion, -ung, -ur -erij, -heid, -ij, -ing, -nis, -schap, -st, -te,
-tuur
neut. -chen, -lein, ge- (prefix), -ma, -ment, -sel, -je, ge- (prefix), ge- (prefix) -te (suffix), -isme,
-tel, -tum, -um, -eau -ma, -ment, -sel, -um, -eau
25

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
German
1. In German, several nouns ending in -us, -or, -ich, -ig, -är are neuter:
German English
Did you know? 2. Around 60% of nouns ending in -el and -er are
masculine, while the rest are either neuter or feminine
College education in Germany is
in German. For example:
free for everyone (even for
internationals). Tuition fees for bachelor’s
degrees in public universities was
abolished in 2014. Ger. die Schachtel - box is feminine.
3. Several German nouns that end in -e are neuter nouns and must be learnt by heart. Study the
following:
German English
26
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
4. It is worth mentioning that nouns formed from the stem of the verbs without their suffix are generally
masculine. Study the following:
German English
verb noun
5. It should be mentioned that about 80% of nouns ending in -en are masculine. However, nouns which
stem from verb infinitives in -en are neuter in German (See Infinitive p.). Observe the following:
German English
Dutch
2. It should be remembered that abstract deverbal nouns (nouns derived from verbs, but used
grammatically as nouns, not as verbs) are usually masculine in Dutch. Observe the following:
Dutch English
verb noun
27

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, even though new abstract nouns that are formed in this way are
normally masculine, existing ones may be feminine, especially if they are older
words.
German
1. A few nouns ending in -a, -ie, -ik, -ur may be masculine or neuter. Study the following:
A. Masculine nouns: der Atlantik - Atlantic, der Pazifik - Pacific, der Amateur - amateur, der Ingenieur
- engineer.
B. Neuter nouns: das Sofa - sofa, das Genie - genius, das Abitur - diploma from secondary school, das
Futur - future.
Did you know? 2.It should be remembered that chemical terms ending
in -in are neuter in German. For example:
The Netherlands is the sixth
happiest country in the world,
according to the 2020 World Happiness
Report. Ger. das Benzin - petrol, das Protein - protein.
3. Around 90% of nouns ending in -e are feminine. However, there are nouns that are masculine or
neuter. Study the following:
A. Masculine nouns: der Charme - charm, der Käse - cheese, der Friede - peace, der Funke - spark, der
Gedanke - thought, der Glaube - beliefe, der Haufe - heap, der Name - name, der Wille - will.
NOTE:
In German, the weak nouns that represent names of male persons and animals
are masculine. For example: der Löwe - lion, der Junge - boy.
B. Neuter nouns: das Auge - eye, das Ende - end, das Finale - final, das Image - image, das Interesse -
interest, das Prestige - prestige, das Regime - regime.
28
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch
1. In Dutch, there are a few nouns that end with the following suffixes may be masculine or neuter: -st,
-nis, -schap. For instance:
2. It should be mentioned that the following suffixes borrowed from Latin or Greek often keep their
feminine gender in Dutch: -ade, -age, -ica, -ide, -ie, -iek, -ine, -logie, -ode, -se, -sis, -suur, -teit,
-theek, -tis, -tuur, -ude, -xis.
Dutch English
logica logic
filosofie philosophy
muziek music
discipline discipline
periode period
crisis crisis
kwaliteit quality
bibliotheek library
syntaxis syntax
However, there are a few exceptions. The following nouns are masculine or neuter:
1. It is worth saying that nouns with the ending -chen, that are not diminutives, are usually masculine.
For instance:
Ger. der Kuchen - cake, der Knochen - bone, der Rochen - ray.
29

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Did you know? 2.In German, several nouns ending in -ma, -tum, -um
are masculine or feminine:
Switzerland, a mountainous
Central European country, has 4 A.Masculine nouns: der Irrtum - error, der Reichtum -
national languages, which are German wealth, der Konsum - consumption.
(62.8%), French (22.9%), Italian (8.2%), B.Feminine nouns: die Firma - company.
and Romansh (0.5%) REF.
3. In German, about 90% of the nouns with the prefix -ge are neuter. However, there is a large number of
nouns that are masculine or feminine. Observe the following:
A. Masculine nouns: der Gebrauch - use, der Gedanke - thought, der Gefallen - favor, der Gehalt -
content, der Gehorsam - obedience, der Genuss - enjoyment, der Geruch - smell, der Gesang -
singing, der Geschmack - taste, der Gewinn - profit.
NOTE:
In German, Gefallen and Gehalt are neuter if they mean pleasure and salary,
respectively.
B. Feminine nouns: die Gebärde - gesture, die Gebühr - fee, die Geburt - birth, die Geduld - patience,
die Gefahr - danger, die Gemeinde - community, die Geschichte - history, die Gestalt - shape, die
Gewähr - guarantee, die Gewalt - violence.
It should be remembered that nouns with the prefix -Ge that designate categories of humans may
be masculine or feminine. Study the following:
German English
masc. fem.
4. It should be mentioned that most nouns ending in -al, -an, -ar, -är, -at, -ent, -ett, -ier, -iv, -o and
-on, which are of foreign origin, are neuter, provided that they mean things in German. If they
designate persons, they are masculine. Nevertheless, there are still irregularities. Observe the following:
A. Masculine nouns: der Altar - altar, der Apparat - apparatus, der Automat - automat, der Kanal -
channel, der Kanton - canton, der Kommentar - comment, der Salat - salad, der Senat - senate, der
Skandal - scandal.
B. Feminine nouns: die Manier - manner, die Moral - moral, die Person - person.
5. In German, some nouns can be formed out of adjectives (See Adjectival Nouns p. 100). These
nouns are usually neuter. To form adjectival nouns, one should take the radical of the adjective and
simply add -e to the end of the word. For instance:
30
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
German English
6. In German, infinitives (the “to” form of verbs) that are used as nouns are neuter (See Infinitive p.
578). To illustrate:
Dutch
1. In Dutch, collective nouns prefixed with ge- and suffixed with -te are neuter. However, nouns prefixed
with ge- and suffixed with -te are feminine if they are abstract concepts, for example:
2. It is worth saying that the following suffixes that are borrowed from Latin or Greek are neuter: -isme,
-ma, -um. Observe the following:
Dutch English
3. Like in German, in Dutch infinitives that are used as nouns are neuter and take the article het. For
example:
31

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In German, some nouns can vary in gender depending on regional or individual choice. Here are
some examples:
In German, these nouns are spelled the same but have different genders and meanings and are
often considered to be unrelated words. For instance:
German
der Weise (masc.) - wise man die Weise (fem.) - way, manner
• Abbreviations
In German, abbreviations have the same gender as the base word. Take one example:
German English
32
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Below is a table showing all the suffixes to form feminine nouns in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans.
-in -in, -ster, -es, -se, -esse, -a, -e, -trice -in, -ster, -es, -esse, -e, trise
For example:
It is worth saying that all of the above-mentioned suffixes are also used to create nationalities and
feminine job titles (See Inhabitants of Countries p. 106, Masculine and Feminine Job Titles
for Some Common Professions p. 35).
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, suffixes -e, -es, -in are added to the consonant.
The suffix -er in masculine nouns changes into - ster in the feminine.
In Dutch, the suffix -a is used only in masculine nouns of Latin origin ending in
-us:
33
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the suffix -esse is only added to nouns whose
masculine form ends in -aris, for example:
Below are more examples demonstrating this rule in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the nouns Afr. die politikus and die vlieënier do not change in
the feminine
To give an example:
34
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, unlike all other suffixes discussed here, the suffix -in is
also used to denote the female of several common species of animals, for
example:
Dutch Afrikaans English
Let us have a look at some other common German, Dutch and Afrikaans professions and trades
list below, and learn these professions vocabulary in order to use it in your conversation in any of these
West Germanic languages.
In the table below, there are some other common must-know job titles and trades in West
Germanic languages:
35
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Did you know? Ger. Was ist dein Beruf? - Ich bin ein Anwalt.
The national animal of South Africa is Dut. Wat is uw beroep? - Ik ben een advocaat.
the Springbok. It is the only southern
African gazelle. The common name "springbok", Afr. - Wat is jou beroep? - Ek is 'n advokaat.
comes from the Afrikaans words spring (jump)
and bok (antelope or goat). - What is your profession? - I am a lawyer.
As you can see in the list above, even if German, Dutch and Afrikaans occupations normally
change depending on their genders (masculine or feminine), there are some names of professions that do
not change, especially in Afrikaans.
36
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, some adjectives can be used as feminine
nouns (See Adjectival Nouns p. 100).
In addition to the pairs of two different nouns designating male and female forms presented
above, there are also nouns with different meanings in masculine and feminine forms in German. Below
we will consider these nouns that German language has.
The plural noun is used to describe more than one object, person, animal, event, place or idea, for
instance, women, possibilities, cats, shops.
Although in English, plural forms are normally formed by adding -s, or -es to a noun (except for
irregular nouns), German, Dutch and Afrikaans have a quite limited number of nouns that form their
plural by using an -s suffix. Study the following:
37
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• modern words originally of foreign origin, often ending in -a, -i, -o, and -u. For instance:
die Firma - die Firmas de firma - de firma’s die firma - die firmas firma - firmas
das Taxi - die Taxis de taxi - de taxi’s die taxi - die taxi’s taxi -taxis
das Foto- die Fotos de foto - de foto’s die foto - die foto’s photo - photos
das Menü - die Menüs het menu - de menu’s die menu - die menu’s menu - menus
das Baby - die Babys de baby - de baby’s die baba - die babas baby - babies
das Hobby - die Hobbys de hobby -de hobby’s die stokperdjie - die hobby -hobbies
stokperdjies
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, when words ending in -a, -i, -o, -u or -y, one should
use -’s (with an apostrophe) in the plural.
However, in Afrikaans, if the ending -a is not stressed, the -s without an
apostrophe is added to form the plural (see p. 57).
Also, in Afrikaans, the nouns die baba - “baby” and die stokperdjie - “hobby”
do not end in -y but still take the ending -s in the plural.
das Restaurant - die het restaurant - de die restaurant - die restaurant - restaurants
Restaurants restaurants restaurants
das Hotel - die Hotels het hotel - de hotels die hotel - die hotelle* hotel - hotels
38
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
der Park - die Parks de park - de parken* die park - die parke* park - parks
der Scheck – die Schecks de cheque - de cheques die tjek - die tjeks cheque - cheques
der Club - die Clubs de club - de clubs die klub - die klubs club - clubs
NOTE:
In German, the noun Computer does not change its ending in the plural:
Computer.
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the noun park forms its plural by adding -en and -e:
parken and parke respectively. Also, in Afrikaans, the noun die hotel forms
its plural by adding -e: die hotelle.
die DVD - die DVDs de DVD - de DVD’s die DVD - die DVD’s DVD - DVDs
die CD - die CDs de CD -de CD’s die CD - die CD’s CD - CDs
NOTE:
In Dutch, the suffix -en may also be added to form the plural of abbreviations.
• Nouns ending in stressed -on (i.e. French loanwords) an take -e or -s to form the plural, but the former
is more usual:
NOTE:
In German, the noun “ceiling" can mean die Decke in the singular and die
Decken in the plural.
Also, the German noun “train platform” can be translated as der Bahnsteig in
the singular and die Bahnsteige in the plural.
39
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
As you can see from the last example, besides the rules presented above, German and Dutch also
have other ways of forming the plural.
In German, for example, plurals can be formed with an umlaut (ä,ö,ü), -n, -en, -s (other cases),
-e or an umlaut and an -e, -er or an umlaut and -er. There are also some plurals that remain the same as
their singular forms.
In Dutch, the plural of nouns is formed by adding an -en, -s, -’s (other cases), -eren and other
plural endings. Also, many short vowels in singular nouns become a long vowel in the plural in Dutch. In
Afrikaans, there are mainly two ways of forming the plural
of a noun: 1) by adding -s, 2) by adding -e.
Did you know?
As we can see, each of these considered
About 70% of the highways in Germanic languages has its special ways of forming the
Germany (Autobahn) have no plural, which require particular consideration, as this
speed limit. phenomenon significantly distinguishes one from the
other without leaving any possibility of simultaneous
comparison.
It must be noted that it is somewhat difficult to decide on which of the endings to use to pluralize
nouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, as there are many exceptions. However, some general rules will
be given below.
In most cases, the way we form the plural of a noun depends on its gender, which means that
certain gender takes certain plural endings in German. Study the following:
• Monosyllabic masculine nouns take an umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and an -e to form their plural. For example:
German English
NOTE:
In German, however, some masculine nouns add just -e to form the plural. For
example:
40
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Feminine nouns form the plural by adding -en. Observe the following:
German English
NOTE:
In German, some feminine nouns take an umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and an -e to form their
plural. For example:
• Monosyllabic neuter nouns take an umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and an -er in the plural. For instance:
German English
NOTE:
In German, although, some neuter nouns add the plural ending -e For example:
Broadly speaking, all German nouns can be divided into the following five groups of
transformation from the singular to the plural. Study the following:
GROUP 1
• No plural ending
Here is a list of noun endings that do not change in the plural in German:
1. Almost all masculine and neuter nouns that end in -er, -en, and -el:
41
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, the following masculine nouns ending in -el and -er take the
ending -n in the plural, e.g.
2. Neuter nouns ending in -chen, -lein (See Diminutives in German, Dutch and Afrikaans p. 72):
• Add an Umlaut
1. It should be noted that some masculine nouns ending in -er, -en, and -el take an Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) on the
radical in the plural.
Below is a list of some common masculine nouns that simply add an Umlaut in the plural in
German.
der Apfel - die Äpfel apple - apples der Laden - die Läden store - stores
der Bogen - die Bögen arc -arcs der Mantel - die Mäntel coat - coats
der Bruder - die Brüder brother - brothers der Nagel - die Nägel nail - nails
der Garten - die Gärten garden - gardens der Ofen - die Öfen oven - ovens
42
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
der Graben - die Gräben ditch - ditches der Vater - die Väter father - fathers
der Hafen - die Häfen port - ports der Vogel - die Vögel bird - birds
NOTE:
In German, the following neuter and feminine nouns also take an Umlaut
(ä,ö,ü) in the plural:
GROUP 2
Here is a list of rules, definitions of the nouns that form the plural with -e or an Umlaut (ä,ö,ü)
and -e, and common exceptions to the rule in German:
1. Around 90% of monosyllabic masculine nouns (and a few bisyllabic nouns) form the plural with an
Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and an -e. For example:
It is worth mentioning that German masculine nouns often form their plural by adding the
Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and -e, but not always. Some nouns do not add an Umlaut in the plural.
Below is a list of some common masculine nouns that add only -e ending to form the plural in
German.
der Besuch - die Besuche visit - visits der Punkt - die Punkte point - points
der Hund - die Hunde dog - dogs der Schuh - die Schuhe shoe - shoes
der Monat - die Monate month - months der Tag - die Tage nail - nails
43
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
der Mond - die Monde moon - moons der Triumph - die Triumphe triumph - triumphs
der Ort - die Orte place - places der Wal - die Wale whale - whales
2. German neuter nouns with more than one syllable form their plural by adding just -e ending. For
instance:
NOTE:
In German, the following neuter noun das Gesicht adds -er in the plural (See
Group 3 p. 46). For example:
It should be remembered that some monosyllabic neuter nouns also add only -e and rarely take
the Umlaut in the plural.
Below is a table showing some common monosyllabic neuter nouns that do not take an
Umlaut in German.
das Bein - die Beine leg - legs das Schiff - die Schiffe ship - ships
das Boot - die Boote boat - boats das Schwein - die Schweine pig - pigs
das Ding - die Dinge thing - things das Spiel - die Spiele game - games
das Haar - die Haare hair das Stück - die Stücke piece - pieces
das Jahr - die Jahre year - years das Tier - die Tiere animal - animals
das Pferd - die Pferde horse - horses das Tor - die Tore gate - gates
44
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, the monosyllabic neuter noun das Floß adds an Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) in
the plural:
3. Neuter nouns that begin with the prefix Ge- and end in a stressed syllable take the plural suffix -e.
Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, some neuter nouns beginning with -Ge and ending in a stressed
vowel add -er or an Umlaut and -er in the plural. To illustrate:
4. Masculine and neuter nouns with the endings -eur, -ich, -ig, -ier, -ling, -nis, -sal, -ör form their
plural by adding just -e ending:
NOTE:
In German, nouns ending in -nis take another -s before the -e suffix in the
plural:
5. Some monosyllabic feminine nouns (and a few bisyllabic nouns) take an Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and -e to form
the plural.
45
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Below is a list of the most common German monosyllabic feminine nouns that add -e in the
plural.
die Angst - die Ängste fear - fears die Kunst - die Künste art - arts
die Ankunft - die Ankünfte arrival - arrivals die Luft - die Lüfte air
die Axt - die Äxte axe - axes die Macht - die Mächte power - powers
die Bank - die Bänke bench - benches die Maus - die Mäuse mouse - mice
die Braut - die Bräute bride - brides die Nacht - die Nächte night - nights
die Brust - die Brüste breast - breasts die Naht - die Nähte seam - seams
die Faust - die Fäuste fist - fists die Not - die Nöte hardship - hardships
die Frucht - die Früchte fruit - fruits die Nuss - die Nüsse nut - nuts
die Gans - die Gänse goose - geese die Stadt - die Städte city - cities
die Hand - die Hände hand - hands die Sucht - die Süchte addiction - addictions
die Haut - die Häute skin - skins die Wand - die Wände wall - walls
die Kraft - die Kräfte force - forces die Werkstatt - die workshop - workshops
Werkstätte
die Kuh - die Kühe cow - cows die Wurst - die Würste sausage - sausages
GROUP 3
Here is a list of rules, definitions of the nouns forming the plural with -er or an Umlaut (ä,ö,ü)
and -er, as well as common exceptions to the rule in German:
1. There is a handful of masculine nouns that end in Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) + -er in the plural. They must be
learned by heart.
Below is a table showing some common masculine nouns ending in Umlaut + -er in German.
der Gott - die Götter god - gods der Strauch - die Sträucher shrub - shrubs
der Mann - die Männer man - men der Wald - die Wälder forest - forests
der Mund - die Münder mouth - mouths der Wurm - die Würmer worm - worms
46

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, if the vowel is not umlautable (e, i), masculine nouns add just -er to
form their plural in this case. For example:
2. Neuter nouns with one syllable (and a few bisyllabic nouns) often form their plural by adding the
Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and -er.
Below is a list of some common monosyllabic and bisyllabic neuter nouns that take Umlaut +
-er in the plural in German.
das Bad - die Bäder bath - baths das Kalb - die Kälber calf - calves
das Band - die Bänder tape - tapes das Lamm - die Lämmer lamb - lambs
das Buch - die Bücher book - books das Land - die Länder country - countries
das Dach - die Dächer roof - roofs das Loch - die Löcher hole - holes
das Dorf - die Dörfer village - villages das Rad - die Räder wheel - wheels
das Gehalt - die Gehälter salary - salaries das Schloss - die Schlösser lock - locks
das Glas - die Gläser jar - jars das Tal - die Täler valley - valleys
das Grab - die Gräber grave - graves das Volk - die Völker people
das Haus - die Häuser house - houses das Wort - die Wörter word - words
das Huhn - die Hühner chicken - chickens das Kalb - die Kälber calf - calves
It is worth mentioning that in German, if the vowels are not umlautable (e, i), monosyllabic and
bisyllabic neuter nouns take just -er ending to form the plural.
Below is a table demonstrating some common monosyllabic and bisyllabic neuter nouns that
add just -er in the plural.
das Bild - die Bilder image - images das Glied - die Glieder limb - limbs
das Ei - die Eier egg - eggs das Kind - die Kinder child - children
47
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
das Feld - die Felder field - fields das Licht - die Lichter light - lights
das Geld - die Gelder money das Lied - die Lieder song - songs
das Gesicht - die Gesichter face - faces das Nest - die Nester nest - nest
3. Masculine and neuter nouns with the ending -tum form their plural by adding the Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) and
-er. Observe the following:
GROUP 4
• Add -n or -en
Here is a list of rules, definitions of the nouns that form the plural by adding -n or -en, and
common exceptions to the rule in German:
1. All feminine nouns that end in -ei, -heit, -keit, -schaft, and -ung or a consonant form the plural with
-en. Observe the following:
NOTE:
In German, feminine nouns ending in -in (professions, nationalities, feminine
animals) take -nen to form the plural. For example:
48
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
2. Feminine nouns with the endings -er or -el form the plural by adding only -n:
NOTE:
In German, however, the feminine nouns die Mutter and die Tochter add an
Umlaut (ä,ö,ü) in the plural:
4. Weak masculine nouns belonging to the so-called n-nouns (all those ending in -e) just add -n in the
plural. Observe the following:
NOTE:
In German, the masculine noun der Käse does not change in the plural:
It should be pointed out that weak masculine nouns usually end in -e, but not always. If weak
nouns do not end in -e, they add -en to form the plural.
49
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Below is a list of some common weak masculine nouns that do not end in -e and add -en in
the plural in German.
der Bär - die Bären bear - bears der Polizist - die Polizisten police officer - police
officers
der Elefant - die elephant - elephants der Präsident - die president -
Elefanten Präsidenten presidents
der Fink - die Finken finch - finches der Soldat - die Soldaten soldier - soldiers
der Fürst - die Fürsten prince - princes der Spatz - die Spatzen sparrow - sparrows
der Held - die Helden hero - heroes der Student - die Studenten student - students
der Herr - die Herren gentleman - gentlemen der Vorfahr - die Vorfahren ancestor - ancestors
der Mensch - die human - humans der Polizist - die Polizisten police officer - police
Menschen officers
NOTE:
In German, although the following weak masculine nouns do not end in -e, they
still take -n in the plural:
5. A handful of neuter nouns form the plural by adding -en or -n (if the noun ends in -e).
Below is a table illustrating some neuter nouns that add -en or -n in the plural.
das Auge - die Augen eye - eyes das Herz - die Herzen heart - hearts
das Bett - die Betten bed - beds das Insekt - die Insekten insect - insects
das Ende - die Enden end - ends das Interesse - die Interessen interest - interests
das Hemd - die Hemden shirt - shirts das Ohr - die Ohren ear - ears
6. Most nouns ending in the Latin suffix -um or -us change to -en in the plural in German. Study the
following:
50
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, however, other Latin-derived nouns maintain the Latin suffix
changing -um or -us to -a or -i in the plural:
GROUP 5
• Add -s
Unlike in Dutch, in German, it is not typical to form the plural with -s. (See Plural Forms of
Nouns p. 37)
Dutch
The Dutch language also has a number of ways of forming the plural of nouns. In Dutch, the
plural of nouns can be divided into the following three groups:
GROUP 1
• Add -en
Here is a list of rules, definitions of the nouns that form the plural by adding -en in Dutch:
1. Most nouns with one syllable add -en at the ending to form the plural:
51
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
However, the following spelling rules must be considered when forming the plural nouns with -en
in Dutch:
• If the single-syllable nouns end in consonants such as -k, -d or -s, they must be doubled in the plural.
For example:
• The double vowel from the last syllable disappears in order to keep the single vowel in open syllable
while forming the plural with -en:
• If a noun ends in -s or -f, these endings change to -z or -v in the plural. For instance:
Below is a list of some frequently used nouns in which a short vowel in the singular becomes
a long a vowel while forming the plural in Dutch.
het dak - de daken roof - roofs het bedrag - de bedragen amount - amounts
het gebed - de gebeden prayer - prayers het verdrag - de verdragen treaty - treaties
het glas - de glazen glass - glasses het lot - de loten fate - fates
52

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• In a few cases, a vowel can be replaced when forming the plural by adding -en. The vowel change occurs
from short vowel in the singular to long vowel in the plural. For instance:
• Most nouns that end in -or add -en in the plural and shift the stress. For instance:
NOTE:
In Dutch, many nouns ending in -or may also form the plural with -s (e.g. de
professor - de professors)
GROUP 2
• Add -eren
Here is another group that forms the plural with -eren in Dutch:
1. Some neuter nouns always add -eren at the ending to form the plural.
Below is a list of the most commonly used nouns which form their plural with -eren in Dutch.
het blad - de bladeren leaf - leaves het lied - de liederen song - songs
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun het kind may also form the plural with -s (e.g. het kind - de
kinders)
53
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
GROUP 3
• Add -s
In Dutch, it is a common way to form the plural by adding -s. It is used with a large number of
nouns and noun endings: (See Plural Forms of Nouns p. 37)
1. Most nouns that end in unstressed -el, -em, -en, -er, -aar, -erd, and -e form the plural with -s.
Below is a list of some common nouns of this group that form the plural with -s in Dutch.
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun de leraar can also add -en in the plural:
2. All diminutives (nouns ending in -je) also form the plural with -s (See Diminutives p. 72). For
instance:
NOTE:
In German, diminutives (nouns ending in -chen, -lein) do not change in the
plural:
3. Many Dutch nouns of foreign origin that end in a long vowel add -s in the plural. It should be
remembered that if the vowel is -a, -i, -o, -u or -y, an apostrophe must be added -’s when forming the
plural. Observe the following:
54
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, however, three common native nouns also add -s to form the plural:
Dutch English
* The plural suffix -en can also be used to form the plural of the noun zoon (e.g.
zoon - zonen - son - sons). However, zonen is an older form and is still used
for company names (e.g. Kipp & Zonen BV)
It should be recalled that last names of people, acronyms and English and French loanwords also
form their plural by adding -s in Dutch (See Plural Forms of Nouns p. 37).
The Dutch language also has other forms while forming noun plurals. It is necessary to consider
them as it prevents the learners from spelling and grammatical mistakes.
• Add -a or -i
1. Nouns ending in the Latin suffix -um or -us change to -a or -i respectively to form their plural in
Dutch. Study the following:
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun het museum can also add -s in the plural. To illustrate:
55
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Add -heid
2. Nouns ending in -heid in the single add -heden in the plural. Below are the examples demonstrating
this rule:
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, the plural of nouns can be divided into the following two groups:
GROUP 1
• Add -s
Here is a list of rules, definitions of the nouns that form the plural by adding -s in Afrikaans:
1. All nouns ending in -a, -aar, -aard, -e, -eeu, -el, -em, -en, -er, -erd, -ie, -ier, -lm and -rm, add -s to
form the plural:
Below is a list of some common nouns of this group that form the plural with -s in Afrikaans.
die kamera - die kameras camera - cameras die elektrisiën - die electrician -
elektrisiëns electricians
die padda - die paddas frog - frogs die laken - die lakens sheet - sheets
die eienaar - die eienaars owner - owners die leuen - die leuens lie - lies
die leraar - die leraars minister (of religion) - die dogter - die dogters daughter - daughters
ministers (of religion)
die rekenaar - die computer - computers die eier - die eiers egg - eggs
rekenaars
die lafaard - die lafaards coward - cowards die hoender - die hoenders chicken - chickens
die bydrae - die bydraes contribution - die leër - die leërs army - armies
contributions
die dame - die dames lady - ladies die luiperd - die luiperds leopard - leopards
die metode - die metodes method - methods die emosie - die emosies emotion - emotions
die perske - die perskes peach - peaches die familie - die families family - families
56

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
die siekte - die siektes disease - diseases die storie - die stories story - stories
die tipe - die tipes type - types die juwelier - die juweliers jeweller - jewellers
die leeu - die leeus lion - lions die passasier - die passenger -
passasiers passengers
die bottel - die bottels bottle - bottles die dwelm - die dwelms drug - drugs
die nael - die naels nail nails die film - die films film - films
die reël - die reëls rule - rules die helm - die helms helmet - helmets
die tafel - die tafels table - tables die arm - die arms arm - arms
die voël - die voëls bird - birds die skerm - die skerms screen - screens
die besem - die besems broom - brooms die storm - die storms storm - storms
die Moslem - die Moslems Muslim - Muslims die wurm - die wurms worm - worms
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, nouns ending in stressed -a, take apostrophe -s in the plural, for
example:
Afrikaans English
However, in Afrikaans, the rule does not apply to nouns where the above-mentioned endings
form part of the root. Such nouns form the plural with -e instead as they are monosyllabic, for example:
die haar - die hare hair - hairs die boer - die boere farmer - farmers
die baard - die baarde beard - beards die perd - die perde horse - horses
die eeu - die eeue century - centuries die wingerd - die wingerde vineyard - vineyards
die engel - die engele angel - angels die leer - die lere ladder - ladders
57
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
die wiel - die wiele wheel - wheels die dier - die diere animal - animals
die kiem - die kieme germ - germs die offisier - die offisiere officer - officers
die Christen - die Christene Christian - die rivier - die riviere river - rivers
Christians
die skoen - die skoene shoe - shoes
2. Nouns that designate certain people also add -s to form the plural:
Below are some common nouns referring to people take -s in the plural:
die broer - die broers brother - brothers die oom - die ooms uncle - uncles
die maat - die maats mate - mates die seun - die seuns son - sons
die enjin - die enjins engine - engines die generaal - die generaals general - generals
die film - die films film - films die sjef - die sjefs chef - chefs
die kostuum - die kostuums costume - costumes die trem - die trems tram - trams
GROUP 2
• Add -e
Here is a list of rules, definitions of the nouns that form the plural by adding -e in Afrikaans:
1. All nouns that are not covered by all of the above-mentioned rules are presented in this larger group
that add -e to form the plural:
58

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Below is a list of some common nouns of this group that form the plural with -e in Afrikaans:
die battery - die batterye battery - batteries die huis - die huise house - houses
die berg - die berge mountain - mountains die koei - die koeie cow - cows
die boek - die boeke book - books die kursus - die kursusse course - courses
die hand - die hande hand - hands die laai - die laaie drawer - drawers
This group also contains many loanwords which are stressed on the final syllable:
die biblioteek - die library - libraries die permit - die permitte permit - permits
biblioteke
die diamant - die diamante diamond - diamonds die program - die programme -
programme programmes
die fakulteit - die fakulteite faculty - faculties die restaurant - die restaurant -
restaurante restaurants
die gordyn - die gordyne curtain - curtains die sigaret - die sigarette cigarette - cigarettes
die kasset - die kassette cassette - cassettes die student - die studente student -students
die kitaar - die kitare guitar - guitars die telefoon - die telefone telephone - telephones
2. Nouns that contain a short vowel and end in a single consonant b, k, l, m, n, p, r, s, t, double the
consonant to preserve a short vowel in a closed syllable and add -e to form the plural:
die rob - die robbe seal - seals die pop - die poppe doll - dolls
die slak - die slakke snail - snails die kar - die karre car - cars
die kol - die kolle spot - spots die mes - die messe knife - knifes
die rem - die remme brake - brakes die rot - die rotte rat - rats
NOTE:
Nouns that contain a short vowel and end in the voiced f, change it to w, double
it and add -e according to the above rule:
59
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
It is worth mentioning that the consonant is only doubled if the the preceding syllable is stressed
in Afrikaans. Compare the following:
3. Nouns that contain the long vowels aa, ee, oo and uu in a closed syllable, drop one vowel letter and
add -e in the plural according to the rules for the spelling of long vowels in open syllables (See p. ):
die haar - die hare hair - hairs die boom - die bome tree - trees
die peer - die pere pear - pears die muur - die mure wall - walls
4. Nouns containing a long vowel or diphthong and ending in -f, change the -f to -w and add -e to form
the plural:
die brief- die briewe letter - letters die skyf - die skywe disk - disks
die duif - die duiwe pigeon - pigeons die wolf - die wolwe wolf - wolves
NOTE:
If the nouns contain the long vowels mentioned above, both spelling changes
apply:
Afrikaans English
60
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
die industrie - die industrieë industry - industries die melodie - die melodieë melody - melodies
die knie - die knieë knee - knees die teorie - die teorieë theory - theories
NOTE:
Noun ending in stressed -ie take -s in the plural (See p. 56).
6. Loanwords that end in ee + a consonant drop one e, add a diaeresis to the remaining e (ë) and add the
plural suffix -e:
Afrikaans English
7. Nouns containing a long vowel or diphthong plus the consonants d or rg, drop these consonants and
add -e to form the plural:
die tyd - die tye time - times die vlieg - die vlieë fly - flies
die vraag - die vrae question - questions die voertuig - die voertuie vehicle - vehicles
However, there are some exceptions in which one does not drop the consonant d when forming
the plural. Study the following:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
It should be noted that unlike the consonant d, one must always drop the
consonant g in the plural:
Afrikaans English
61
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
8. The following nouns contain a short vowel in the singular but a long vowel in the plural, mainly because
the plural suffix -e is added:
die bedrag - die bedrae amount - amounts die oorlog - die oorloë war - wars
die dag - die dae day - days die pad - die paaie road - roads
die gat - die gate hole - holes die skilpad - die skilpaaie turtle - turtles
die gebed - die gebede prayer - prayers die spel -die spele game - games
die glas - die glase glass - glasses die vat - die vate barrel - barrels
die god - die gode god - gods die vlag - die vlae flag - flags
die hof - die howe court - courts die weg - die weë way - ways
9. The following nouns contain a short vowel in the singular and a long vowel in the plural that becomes a
different vowel:
die lid - die lede member - members die smid - die smede smith - smiths
die skip - die skepe ship - ships die stad - die stede city - cities
NOTE:
There are also some nouns that are formed with the suffix -heid “-ness”. These
nouns change -heid to -hede in the plural:
Afrikaans English
10. Nouns that contain a short vowel in the singular and end in -g, lengthen the vowel, drop the -g and
add the suffix -e in the plural. Note that the new long vowels must take a circumflex (See p. ):
die brug - die brûe bridge - bridges die rug - die rûe back - backs
62
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In Afrikaans, nouns that end in stressed -on (i. e. French loanwords) can take the suffix -e or -s in the
plural, but the former is more usual:
Afrikaans English
Nouns ending in stressed -ee become -eë in the plural. If nouns end in unstressed -ee, they add -s (-ees)
to form the plural:
die idee - die ideë (also idees) idea - ideas die senuwee - die senuwees nerve - nerves
die see - die seë sea - seas die skaduwee - die skaduwees shadow - shadows
NOTE:
The exception is kafee - kafees - “café” even though the ending is stressed.
Afrikaans English
63
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
The Afrikaans language also has other forms while forming noun plurals. It is necessary to
consider them as it prevents the learners from spelling and grammatical mistakes.
1. In Afrikaans, this group of nouns is an important subdivision of nouns that form their plural in -e.
Historically, if the final [t] (pronounced as t or d) was preceded by a voiceless consonant, it was
dropped. However, it returns in derivatives, where it no longer stands in final position. This
phenomenon occurs in various grammatical situations, including the plural formation of nouns in
Afrikaans.
Below are some common nouns that take -de/-te in the plural:
die voog - die voogde guardian - guardians die insek - die insekte insect - insects
die smarag - die smaragde emerald - emeralds die konflik - die konflikte conflict - conflicts
die tydskrif - die tydskrifte magazine - magazines die kontak - die kontakte contact - contacts
die aanklag - die aanklagte charge - charges die kontrak - die kontrakte contract - contracts
die gedig - die gedigte poem - poems die produk - die produkte product - products
die gerug - die gerugte rumour - rumours die projek - die projekte project - projects
die gesig - die gesigte face - faces die konsep - die konsepte concept - concepts
die geveg - die gevegte fight - fights die resep - die resepte recipe - recipes
die gewig - die gewigte weight - weights die diens - die dienste service - services
die jag - die jagte hunt - hunts die fees - die feeste party - parties
die krag - die kragte power - powers die gas - die gaste guest - guests
die lig - die ligte light - lights die guns - die gunste favor - favors
die nag - die nagte night - nights die kas - die kaste cupboard - cupboards
die plig - die pligte duty - duties die kontras - die kontraste contrast - contrasts
die vlug - die vlugte flight - flights die kuns - die kunste art - arts
64

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
die vrag - die vragte load - loads die kus - die kuste coast - coasts
die vrug - die vrugte fruit - fruits die lys - die lyste list - lists
die argitek - die argitekte architect - architects die orkes - die orkeste orchestra - orchestras
die aspek - die aspekte aspect - aspects die teks - die tekste text - texts
NOTE:
All the nouns with the stress on -is(te) belong to this group too. For example:
Afrikaans English
• Add -ens
Below are some common nouns that take -ens in the plural:
die bad - die baddens bath - baths die wa - die waens wagon - wagons
die bed - die beddens bed - beds die vermoë - die vermoëns ability - abilities
die gevoel - die gevoelens feeling - feelings die wese - die wesens being - beings
die jong - die jongens boy - boys die hawe - die hawens harbour - harbours
Below are some nouns that take -ers or -ere in the plural:
Afrikaans English
65
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
The noun liedere - “songs” is usually replaced by the diminutive plural,
liedjies, in everyday language.
The noun volkere - “peoples” (i.e. peoples of the world) is a formal variant of
the more common volke.
• Add -a or -i
Just like in Dutch, nouns ending in the Latin suffix -um or -us change to -a or -i respectively to
form their plural in Afrikaans:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the noun die museum can also add -s in the plural. To illustrate:
die museum - die museums.
Nouns which are Singular in English but Plural in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans
Despite the fact that German, Dutch and Afrikaans have a number of divergent ways of forming
the plural of nouns, they still combine convergent ways of using nouns.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, there are some nouns that are used in the plural, whereas in
English those same nouns are used in the singular form. Below are some examples:
NOTE:
In Dutch, the nouns de huwelijksreizen and de haren can also be used in the
singular de huwelijksreis and de haar respectively. Also, the Dutch noun
het lot is only used in the singular.
In Afrikaans, the noun die wittebrood is used in the plural.
66
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dut. Hij heeft grijs haar (or Hij heeft grijze haren).
Also, in English, some animals have the same form in the singular and plural, while in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans both forms are used. Compare the following:
Singular Plural
German Dieser Elch ist groß. Gibt es viele Elche in diesem Wald.
English - This moose is big. - There are a lot of moose in this forest.
das Schaf - die Schafe het schaap - de schapen die skape - die skape* sheep - sheep
der Fisch - die Fische de vis - de vissen die vis - die visse fish - fish
die Antilope - die Antilopen de antilope - de antilopen die bok - die bokke antelope - antelope
der Hirsch - die Hirsche het hert - de herten die hert - die herten deer - deer
der Bison - die Bisons de bizon - de bizons die bison - die bisons bison - bison
NOTE:
Just like in English, in Afrikaans, the noun die skape - “sheep" has the same
form in the singular and in the plural.
Nouns which are Plural in English but Singular in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans
However, it is worth saying that there are some nouns that are plural in English, but singular in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Study the following:
67
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, the word die Niederlande is used in the plural.
Furthermore, nouns ending in Ger. -ik, Dut. -iek/ica, Afr. -ika which designate English plurals
in -ics are used in the singular in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Observer the following:
68
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, even though the noun natuurkunde has a different ending, it is also
used in the singular.
There is also a range of nouns that are normally used in the singular in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans. Observe the following:
B. Corners of the earth and things that are the only ones in their way:
69
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the nouns “bread” and “coal” are also used in
the plural:
German Dutch Afrikaans
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the noun “joy” can be used in the plural:
70
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In Dutch, the noun “warmth” can also be used in the plural: de warmte - de
warmtes
E. Collective nouns:
NOTE:
In German, the word das Geld is die Gelder in plural, which means “funds” in
English.
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the nouns “vegetables” and “fruits"can also be used in
the plural.
Dutch Afrikaans
F. Some nouns that usually have the suffix Ger. -ismus, Dut. -isme, Afr. -isme meaning
scientific, political, social, literary concepts, names of sciences and religions:
71
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
A diminutive is a noun that is derived from another word (usually a noun). It has a special ending
and is usually used to convey the smallness of the object named, or to designate a sense of love, intimacy
or endearment. The diminutive is usually an informal way of expression.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the diminutives consist of adding Ger. -chen or -lein; Dut. -je;
and Afr. -jie/ie to a noun. The gender of diminutives is always neuter in German and Dutch. Many words
just add these endings without any change.
das Kind - das Kindchen het kind - het kindje die kind - die kindjie child - little child
das Haus - das Häuslein het huis - het huisje die huis - die huisie house - little house
NOTE:
In German, the ending -lein is considered to be archaic these days. In practice
-chen is more commonly used instead.
Also, the vowels a, o, or u are changed into an Umlaut (ä, ö, ü) in the
diminutive in German, for example:
German English
In Dutch, if -s and -j are adjacent, they form a sh-like sound (like in ship), for
example:
72
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, diminutives are an essential expressive element of the language
and are frequently used by native German, Dutch and Afrikaans speakers. The diminutives are generally
used:
The Münster astronomical clock in St.- Dut. Hij heeft een schattig hondje.
Paulus-Dom in Münster, Germany, is
one of the most important monumental clocks Afr. Hy het 'n oulike hondjie.
in the German-speaking world. It was built - He has a cute puppy dog.
between 1540 and 1542.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, it is advised to use diminutives that already
exist, even though it is possible to make diminutive any noun.
It should be mentioned that when using a diminutive, it is also possible to use an adjective like
Ger. klein, Dut. klein, Afr. klein - “small” with the noun if one wants to emphasize how little or
compact something is. For example:
• Diminutive forms are also used in titles of fairytales in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. For instance:
Ger. Rotkäppchen
Dut. Roodkapje
Afr. Rooikappie
Ger. Schneewittchen
73
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dut. Sneeuwwitje
Afr. Sneeuwitjie
- Snow White
• It is also worth saying that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the names of several plants, particularly
flowers, are used in the diminutive form:
Besides the rules presented above, German, Dutch and Afrikaans also have various peculiarities
and exceptions while forming the diminutive. It is important to consider them to prevent the learners
from making spelling and grammatical mistakes.
German
• Even though a diminutized noun, in most of the cases, is used to express a smaller, cuter or younger
example of a word, there is a number of diminutive forms that represents a new meaning of a noun. For
example:
Mädchen is the usual word for girl, the diminutive of archaic die Maid - maiden.
It is worth mentioning that male and female of animals are conveyed by the words Männchen
and Weibchen, which can also mean little man and little woman.
The one thing that should be borne in mind is that the diminutive Weibchen can have different
meanings as well. It can mean either the little woman (the wife) or a dumb broad.
It is a good example of the added semantic connotation that can happen when a noun is in its
diminutive form and why one should be careful while forming diminutives.
NOTE:
In southern German the endings -l, -el, -erl and -ele are used to form the
74
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch
It should be remembered that diminutives do not always add the suffix -je but rather -tje, -etje,
-pje, or -kje depending on the phonetics of the noun in Dutch. Study the following:
• Add -tje
1. Nouns ending in a vowel (-a, -e, -i, -o, -u, -y, -ij) or w add -tje:
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, if -t and -j are adjacent, they form a ch-like sound (like in cheer), for
example:
• Nouns that end in a single a, i, o, or or u double the vowel and add -tje in the diminutive to keep the
vowel long in Dutch:
Dutch English
• Nouns that end in a single -y (usually English loanwords) take an apostrophe before -tje in order to
keep the vowel long. For instance:
75
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun tiramisu also takes an apostrophe + -tje in the diminutive:
2. Nouns ending in a long vowel or diphthong followed by -l, -n, or -r get -tje:
Dutch English
3. Nouns that end in unstressed -el, -en, -er or -or also add -tje:
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun jongen is an exception. It looses its ending when forming
the diminutive:
jongen - jongetje
- boy - little boy
76
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Add -etje
1. Nouns ending a short vowel followed by a single -l, -r, -m, -n, or -ng add -etje:
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, the final consonant of the noun must be doubled to keep the vowel
short, except for nouns ending in -ng as the vowel remains short after taking
-etje.
• Add -pje
Dutch English
77
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch English
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun bloem - “flower” is bloempje in the diminutive. However,
many Dutch speakers say bloemmetje instead.
• Add -kje
1. Nouns ending in unstressed -ing get -kje. It should be mentioned that the last consonant of the noun
-g is dropped. Study the following:
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, the diminutive suffixes -ke(n) (from which the Standard Dutch form
-tje has derived), -eke(n), -ske(n), -kie, and -pie are still used in different
dialects, for example:
Dutch English
78
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch English
It is worth noting that the suffix -ke(n) is still present in many women's names,
e.g. Anneke, Marieke, Janneke Tineke.
• Irregular diminutives
1. Nouns with a short vowel in the singular and a long vowel in the plural usually take the long vowel
(double the vowel) when forming the diminutive with -je. For example:
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, the noun handvat is regular and does not get the long vowel in the
diminutive. For example:
Additionally, not all nouns which contain a short vowel in the singular and a long vowel in the
plural take a long vowel in the diminutive in Dutch, for example:
Dutch English
79
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
2. Nouns that end in -cht, -ft or -st add -je and drop the t in the pronunciation:
3. In Dutch, the meaning of nouns sometimes changes when they are used in the diminutive. Observe the
following:
Dutch
noun diminutive
NOTE:
In Dutch, however, a few nouns are only used in the diminutive. Study the
following:
Dutch English
80
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch English
In Dutch, the word het meisje also has an interchangeable non diminutive
form, which is de meid.
Afrikaans
Just like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, diminutives do not always add the suffix -jie or -ie but rather
-tjie, -jie, -etjie, -kie, or -pie, depending on the final sound in the noun. Study the following:
• Add -tjie
1. Nouns ending in a long vowel or diphthong followed by -l, -n, or -r get -tjie:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the noun poel is an exception. It adds -e when forming the
diminutive:
poel - poeletjie
- pool - small pool, puddle
2. Nouns that end in unstressed -el, -en, -er or -or also add -tjie:
Afrikaans English
81
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
3. Nouns ending in a vowel (-a, -e, -i, -o, -u, -y) add -tjie:
Afrikaans English
• Nouns ending in a vowel that take -s in the plural (usually English or French loanwords) take an
apostrophe before -tjie in the diminutive:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the following nouns which, although historically already
diminutives, are no longer considered as such and can thus add -tjie to the
existing -ie ending:
Afrikaans English
82
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
• Add -etjie
1. Monosyllabic nouns ending a short vowel followed by a single -b, -l, -r, -m, -n, or -ng add -etjie:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the final consonant of the noun must be doubled to keep the vowel
short, except for nouns ending in -ng as the vowel remains short after taking
-etjie.
• Add -pie
Afrikaans English
83
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
Afrikaans English
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the noun oom - "uncle, man" has two forms in the diminutive:
oompie and omie.
• Add -kie
1. Nouns ending in unstressed -ing drop the -g and add -kie. Study the following:
Afrikaans English
84
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the noun piesang - "banana" is piesankie in the diminutive.
• Add -ie
1. All nouns that are not covered by the above add -ie, for instance:
Afrikaans English
• Irregular diminutives
1. Nouns with a short vowel in the singular and a long vowel in the plural usually take the long vowel
(double the vowel) also when forming the diminutive with -jie, -ie or -etjie. For example:
Afrikaans English
die blad die blaaie die blaadjie page pages little page
die gat die gate die gaatjie hole holes little hole
die pad die paaie die paadjie path paths little path
die spel die spele die speletje game games little game
die vat die vate die vaatjie barrel barrels little barrel
die skip die skepe die skepie or skippie ship ships little ship
However, in Afrikaans, not all nouns which contain a short vowel in the singular and a long vowel
in the plural take a long vowel in the diminutive, for example:
85
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
die brug die brûe die bruggie bridge bridges little bridge
die dag die dae die daggie day days little day
die oorlog die oorloë die oorloggie war wars little war
die rug die rûe die ruggie back backs little back
die vlag die vlae die vlaggie flag flags little flag
die weg die weë die weggie way ways little way
2. It is worth mentioning that monosyllabic nouns ending in -t and -d (both pronounced [t]) add -jie
(pronounced [ci] like in english chin) and drop the -t/-d in the pronunciation, for example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, in those nouns ending in -nd or -nt when -jie is added the n is
pronounced as [ɲ] (like in English canyon), for example:
3. Nouns that add the diminutive suffix -ie, undergo the same spelling changes that apply when nouns are
pluralized (See p. 62):
• Nouns that contain a short vowel double the consonant when the diminutive suffix -ie is added:
Afrikaans English
86
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
• Nouns containing the long vowels aa, ee, or oo are written with one vowel letter if it stands in an open
syllable, for example:
Afrikaans English
• Nouns ending in f that change it to ww (after short vowels) or w (after long vowels) in the plural,
preserve the f in the diminutive (See also p. 59-60). Study the following:
Afrikaans English
die rif die riwwe die riffie reef reefs little reef
die stof die stowwe die stoffie material materials little material
die brief die briewe die briefie letter letters little letter
die duif die duiwe die duifie pigeon pigeons little pigeon
die skyf die skywe die skyfie disk disks little disk
die wolf die wolwe die wolfie wolf wolves little wolf
• Nouns that contain a short vowel and end in -g, drop the -g in the plural, but preserve the g in the
diminutive (See also p. 62):
Afrikaans English
die brug die brûe die bruggie bridge bridges little bridge
die rug die rûe die ruggie back backs little back
87

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Nouns ending in d or g containing a long vowel or diphthong where these consonants d or g are
omitted in the plural, are preserved in the diminutive (See also p. 61):
Afrikaans English
die tyd die tye die tydjie time times little time
die vraag die vrae die vragie question questions little question
die vlieg die vlieë die vliegie fly flies little fly
NOTE:
The rule mentioned above also includes nouns like pad - paaie - paadjie -
“road - roads - little road” in Afrikaans (See p. 62)
4. In Afrikaans, the meaning of nouns sometimes changes when they are used in the diminutive. Observe
the following:
Afrikaans
noun diminutive
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, some words are only used in the diminutive. Study the
following:
Afrikaans English
88
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Afrikaans English
In German, the plural of diminutives do not have any ending, while in Dutch and Afrikaans, the
plural diminutive is formed by adding an -s. Study the following examples:
das Kindchen - die het kindje - de kindjes die kindjie - die kindjies little child - little
Kindchen children
das Häuslein - die het huisje - de huisjes die huisie - die huisies little house - little houses
Häuslein
In the English language, the most common augmentatives are created by adding the prefixes such
as -mega, -ultra, -super, -over and -grand: “megastore”, “supersize”, “grandparents”,
“overqualified”.
The use of augmentatives in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is quite similar to that in English and
in some cases they even have similar prefixes.
The augmentative prefixes in German and Dutch are: Ger. Über-, Groß-, Super-, Mega-;
Dut. over-, groot-, super-, mega-, Afr. oor-, groot-, super-, mega-.
The table shows the ways of forming the augmentatives in these West Germanic languages:
89

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
- weight - overweight
Its high density of wild animals includes Ger. der Markt - Der Megamarkt
lions, leopards, rhinos, elephants and
buffalos. Dut. de markt - de megamarkt
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, adjectives also use augmentatives. The table
below shows some prefixes of forming the augmentatives of adjectives (See
also Adjectives p. 140):
German Dutch Afrikaans
90
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Compound Nouns
A compound noun is a noun that consists of two or more words connected into a single word, e.g.
motor + cycle = motorcycle.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, compound nouns always carry the gender of their last word. It
should be mentioned that the combined words are not only nouns, but also adjectives, adverbs, verb
stems, and prepositions. However, the last word of the compound must be a noun:
• Two nouns
• Adjective + noun
91

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Verb + noun
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, some compound nouns require connecting elements to bridge a
gap between the words and make them sound more natural. This connection can have various forms:
Below is a table showing all the linking elements to form compound nouns in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans.
92

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
It must be noted that it is somewhat difficult to decide on which of the connecting elements to use
to create compound nouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, as there are many exceptions that distinguish
one West Germanic language from another.
Thus, we will discuss these exceptions as well as special cases of forming the compounds in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans separately below.
German
In German, there is no general rule concerning when these linking sounds are inserted in such
compound words so one should try to memorize those combinations. Nevertheless, some general rules
will be given below.
• Connecting -n-
1. If the first word of the compound noun ends in -e, it will add the linking -n- when the second word is
joined to it. For example:
- kitchen table
• Connecting -en-
1. The linking -en- is inserted if the first word of the compound noun adds -en as a plural suffix. Since a
lot of German nouns end in -en in the plural, the linking -en- is one of the most frequent connectors:
93

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
- student life
• Connecting -s-
1. If a noun ends in -heit, -keit or -ung, the linking -s- must be added. For instance:
Ger. Gelegenheitsarbeit
- casual work
NOTE:
In German, the linking -es- can also be inserted between the combined words.
For example:
Ger. Jahreszeit
- season
• Connecting -er-
1. The linking -er- is used for nouns that end in -er in the plural. For instance:
- picture frame
• Connecting -e-
- mousetrap
- horse stable
• Connecting -ens-
94
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
- goodness of heart
• No connection
1. In German, if the first word of the compound ends in a vowel, no connectors are used. For instance:
- police agent
Dutch
Like in German, in Dutch, the parts of a compound also need a connecting element. Study the
following:
• Connecting -e-
1. The linking -e- is added if the first word of the compound noun is a person or an object of which there
is clearly only one:
- Queen’s Day
Dut. de maneschijn
- moonshine
2. If the first word is not a noun, the linking -e- is also connected:
Dut. de rodekool
- red cabbage
• Connecting -en-
1. The linking -en- is inserted if the first word of the compound noun adds -en as a plural suffix. Since the
majority of Dutch nouns end in -en in the plural, the linking -en- is the most frequent connector:
95

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
- student life
- recipe book
• Connecting -s-
1. If verb-based nouns end in unstressed -ing, -er or -teit, the linking -s- must be inserted. To illustrate:
- budget deficit
Dut. de ondernemerszin
- entrepreneurial spirit
Dut. de universiteitsbibliotheek
- university library
2. The linking -s- is added if the first word of the compound noun is diminutive. For instance:
Dut. de meisjeskleding
- girls clothes
• Connecting -er-
1. The linking -er- is used for nouns that end in -eren in the plural. For instance:
Dut. de kinderbibliotheek
- children's library
96
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, however, the linking -er- is quite uncommon. Even words that get
-eren as a plural suffix, usually add the linking -e-, -en-, -s-.
• No connection
1. Just like in German, in Dutch, if the first word of the compound ends in a vowel, no connectors are
used. For instance:
Dut. de politieagent
- police agent
NOTE:
In Dutch, if the first word of the compound is diminutive, the linking -s- must be
added in this case.
2. If the first word of the compound ends in unstressed -en, -el, or -em. For example:
Dut. de kussensloop
- pillow case
3. If the first word of the compound is not a noun. The first part of the compound could be an adjective, an
adverb, a verb or a preposition. Study the following:
Afrikaans
Like in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, the parts of a compound also require a linking element.
And like in other West Germanic languages, in Afrikaans, there is no general rule concerning when these
linking sounds are required in such compound words so one should simply memorize those combinations.
97
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Connecting -s-
1. The only more or less firm rule that can be given for the use of the linking -s- is that it is always used
when the first word of a compound ends in -heid, -ing, -skap or -teit, To illustrate:
- budget deficit
- university library
- leadership role
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, in all other cases use of a linking -s- has to be learnt by
heart, e.g.:
Afrikaans English
• Connecting -e-
1. The linking -e- is inserted if the first word of the compound noun adds -e as a plural suffix. Since the
majority of Afrikaans nouns end in -e in the plural, the linking -e- is the most common connector:
- recipe book
98
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
2. Like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, the linking -e- is added if the first word of the compound noun is a person:
- Queen’s Day
• Connecting -en-
1. Unlike in Dutch, in Afrikaans, in just a few words the linking -en- is inserted, for example:
- coach-house
- foot-end
• Connecting -er-
1. The linking -er- is used for nouns that end in -ers or -ns in the plural. For instance:
Afr. de kinderbibliotheek
- children's library
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, the linking -er- is quite uncommon. Even words that get
-ers or -ns as a plural suffix, usually add the linking -e-, -s-, or no connection
at all, for example:
• No connection
1. Just like in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, if the first word of the compound ends in a vowel, no
connectors are used. For instance:
- police agent
99
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, if the first word of the compound is diminutive, the linking -s-
must be added in this case.
2. If the first word of the compound is not a noun. The first part of the compound could be an adjective, an
adverb, a verb or a preposition. Study the following:
Adjectival Nouns
An adjectival noun is a noun that is formed from an adjective, e.g. old (adj.) —> the old (noun).
In German, Dutch, adjectival nouns function like adjectives, which means that the endings of
adjectival nouns change according to gender, the article used with it, and case (in German) (Adjectives
p. 140). Remember that in Afrikaans, there is no gender, article and case distinction and, therefore,
adjectival nouns do not change.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, all adjectives take the ending-e and are used with articles,
demonstratives and possessives when forming an adjectival noun (See also Demonstratives p. 313
and Possessives p. 288)
noun (m.) der Reiche de rijke die ryke the rich man
noun (f.) die Reiche de rijke die ryke the rich lady
NOTE:
In German, adjectival nouns are capitalized.
100
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
It should be mentioned that even though it is possible to create any adjectival nouns
spontaneously, adjectival nouns are generally formed from adjectives referring to male and female beings.
To illustrate:
noun (m./f.) der/die Alte de oude die ou* the old man/lady
noun (m./f.) der/die Arme de arme die arme the poor man/lady
noun (m./f.) der/die Kranke de zieke die sieke the sick man/lady
(patient)
adjective schuldig schuldig skuldig guilty
noun (m./f.) der/die Schuldige de schuldige die skuldige the guilty man/lady
noun (m./f.) der/die Verwandte de verwante die verwante the male/female relative
For example:
In German and Dutch, if you are describing a concept or something more abstract, the neuter
definite article Ger. das and Dut. het are used.
However, since nouns in Afrikaans have no grammatical gender, the only definite article Afr. die
is used in this case (See Articles p. 218).
101

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
noun (neut.) das Beste het beste die beste the best
noun (neut.) das ganze het geheel die geheel the whole (thing)
adjective wichtig belangrijk belangrik important
noun (neut.) das Wichtige het belangrijke die belangrike the important (thing)
noun (neut.) das gute het goede/goeie die goeie the good (thing)
noun (neut.) das Schlechte het slechte die slegte the bad (thing)
noun (neut.) das Richtige het juiste die juiste the right (thing)
For example:
It is worth noting that such neuter adjectival nouns can be used with the following impersonal
pronouns (See Indefinite Adjectives and Pronouns p. 352):
102

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In German, if neutral adjectival nouns follow such impersonal pronouns as Ger. etwas, nichts,
viel and wenig, they take the strong adjective endings. (See Declension of Adjectival Endings p.
142).
In Dutch and Afrikaans, if the adjectival nouns are used mainly after Dut. iets, niets, veel,
iemand and Afr.. iets, niks, baie, iemand they add the ending -s.
However, in Afrikaans, the ending -s is these days commonly omitted, especially in speech, but
omission of this ending is considered non-standard by many. Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, if the adjectival nouns follow the declinable pronoun alles, they
must take weak adjective endings, e.g.:
It is worth mentioning that this adjective declension in German and this -s ending added to
adjectival nouns in Dutch and Afrikaans when used with the impersonal pronouns mentioned above
applies to comparatives too (See Comparative Adjectives p. 198):
used with impersonal etwas kleineres iets kleiners iets kleiners something smaller
pronoun
adjective schön leuk lekker nice
used with impersonal nichts Schöneres niets leukers niks lekkerder(s) nothing nicer
pronoun
103
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
For example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, even after iets and niks the -s ending is now often omitted from
comparatives.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the plural form of adjectival nouns is formed by adding -n (in
German and Dutch) or -s (in Afrikaans) to the end of the word.
Also, in German, when forming the plural one must change the definite article to Ger. die (See
Articles p. 218).
NOTE:
Unlike in other West Germanic languages, in English, adjectival nouns are only
used in the plural and usually denote a collective group of people, i.e. the ugly,
the living.
noun (plural) die Armen de armen die armes the poor (people)
For example:
104
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Nouns in Apposition
Apposition is when one noun phrase modifies another and they both refer to the same person or
thing. The second noun phrase gives us an additional information about the first noun phrase. The
reversion of the elements is also possible.
Noun phrases are normally separated by commas. It happens when the second noun phrase gives
extra information, which is not necessary to identify the person or thing. Study the following sentence:
Ger. Mein Bruder, der Lehrer dieser Schule, hat eine Auszeichnung erhalten.
Dut. Mijn broer, de leraar van deze school, heeft een onderscheiding ontvangen.
Afr. My broer, die onderwyser van hierdie skool, het 'n toekenning ontvang.
The expressions Ger. “der Lehrer dieser Schule”, Dut. “de leraar van deze school”, Afr. “die
onderwyser van hierdie skool” stand in apposition to Ger. “Mein Bruder”, Dut. “Mijn broer”, Afr. “My
broer”, which means that they offer, between commas, additional information about the noun that
precede them.
NOTE:
In German, remember that a noun standing in apposition to another must be in
the same case as the noun to which it refers (See Case in German p. 112):
Nominative
Ger. Mein Bruder, der Lehrer, arbeitet hier.
- My brother, the teacher, works here.
Genitive
Ger. Das ist die Auszeichnung meines Bruders, des Lehrers.
- This is the award of my brother, the teacher.
Accusative
Ger. Sie kennt meinen Bruder, den Lehrer.
- She knows my brother, the teacher.
Dative
Ger. Er war mit meinem Bruder, dem Lehrer.
- He was with my brother, the teacher.
105
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
It is worth mentioning that in measurements, the object that is measured is usually in apposition
to the noun denoting the measure in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Observe the following:
There are over 100 nature parks in Dut. een glas water.
Germany, the largest of which is the
Southern Black Forest Nature Park (Ger.: Afr. ’n glas water
Naturpark Südschwarzwald) covering an area
of 394,000 hectares. - a glass of water.
- a cup of tea.
NOTE:
The English word "of" is not translated in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
Inhabitants of Countries
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, nouns of nationalities are derived from the
names of countries, for example: South Africa - the South African, Austria - the Austrian.
In general, all German, Dutch and Afrikaans nationality nouns are formed by adding the endings
-er to the name of a country. Remember that nationality nouns are used with the articles as normal nouns
(See Articles p. 218). Study the following:
However, there is no firm rule of forming nouns nationalities in English, German, Dutch and
Afrikaans. So one should simply memorize these words. Observe the following:
106
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, apart from nationality nouns, there are also
nationality adjectives. Nationality adjectives are used to name things that have
origin from a particular country or nation. (See Adjectives p. 140 and
Nationality Adjectives p. 179).
One more thing to bare in mind is that nationality nouns and adjectives can
differ from each other: the Briton (noun) - British (adj.). Such cases should be
memorized. To compare:
German Dutch Afrikaans
German
Note that in German, nationality nouns ending in -er that refer to a male do not change the
ending in plural form. Nationality nouns that refer to a female add -in in singular and have -innen in
plural form. Study the following:
German English
German English
107
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
German English
Nationality nouns ending in -e that refer to a male add -n in the plural. Nationality nouns that
refer to a female drop -e and add -in in singular and -innen in plural form. Observe the following:
German English
German English
NOTE:
It is worth reminding that nationality nouns should be capitalized due to the
fact that these words are derived from country names i.e proper nouns.
Dutch
In Dutch, many nationality nouns with one syllable add -en at the ending to form the plural:
German English
108
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
However, the following spelling rules must be considered when forming the plural nationality
nouns with -en in Dutch:
• If the single-syllable nationality nouns end in consonants such as -n, -k, -t, -d or -s, they must be
doubled in the plural. For example:
German English
• Nationality nouns that have the double vowel drop the last vowel in order to keep the single vowel in
open syllable while forming the plural with -en:
German English
Dutch English
• If a noun ends in -s or -f, these endings change to -z or -v in the plural. For instance:
German English
In Dutch, it is also a common way to form the plural of nationality nouns by adding -s:
• Most nationality nouns that end in unstressed -er form the plural with -s. For example:
Dutch English
109

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Dutch English
Note that like in German, in Dutch, nationality nouns that refer to a female add -in in singular
and have -innen in plural form. Study the following:
Dutch English
Furthermore, the ending -e is also used to create feminine nationality nouns in the singular and
the ending -n is added in the plural in Dutch. Study the following:
Dutch English
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, many nationality nouns with one syllable add -e at the ending to form the plural:
Afrikaans English
However, the following spelling rules must be considered when forming the plural nationality
nouns with -e in Afrikaans:
110

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• If the single-syllable nationality nouns end in consonants such as -n, -k, -t, -d or -s, they must be
doubled in the plural. For example:
Afrikaans English
• Like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, nationality nouns that have the double vowel drop the last vowel in order to
keep the single vowel in open syllable while forming the plural with -e:
Afrikaans English
Afrikaans English
In Afrikaans, it is also a common way to form the plural of nationality nouns by adding -s:
• Most nationality nouns that end in unstressed -er form the plural with -s. For example:
Afrikaans English
Afrikaans English
111

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Case in German
Overview
German is an inflectional language. Inflections are grammatical endings or suffixes. For example,
the plural endings of nouns (houses, children) are examples of inflectional endings that English, German,
Dutch and Afrikaans share.
Case, however, is another form of inflection. The case of a particular noun tells us
what grammatical function or simply role the noun plays in the context of a particular clause or sentence.
In other words, the case is the contrast between the subject (the nominative case), the direct object (the
accusative case) and the indirect object (the dative case) in the sentence. Study the following example:
Ger. Der Mann (nom.) hat seiner Frau (dat.) den Schlüssel (acc.) gegeben.
Dut. De man (nom.) heeft de sleutel (acc.) aan zijn vrouw (dat.) gegeven.
Afr. Die man (nom.) het die sleutel (acc.) vir sy vrou (dat.) gegee.
- The husband (nom.) gave the key (acc.) to his wife (dat.).
So, in German, in the above example, the sentence shows case that is applied to nouns, the
definite article der, the possessive determiner seiner and the definite article den that are the indicators
not only of the gender of their respective nouns, but also of their case.
NOTE:
In English, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, case is mainly indicated by
prepositions or a noun's position in a sentence (word order), not by word
endings, like in German (See Cases in Dutch and Afrikaans p. 133). Study
one more example:
Ger. Seiner Frau (dat.) hat der Mann (nom.) den Schlüssel (acc.) gegeben.
Did you know? This phrase designates the same thing as the
former although the meaning is a bit different: “It was
South Africa is home to six record- his wife he gave the key to” and not anyone else.
breaking animals: the largest land
mammal (elephant), the largest bird Note that the forms seiner and der and den
(ostrich), the tallest animal (giraffe), the clearly show who is giving (the subject or nominative)
largest fish (whale shark), the fastest land and who the key is being given to (the indirect object
mammal (cheetah) and the largest or dative) and what is being given to his wife (the
antelope (eland). direct object or accusative).
Furthermore, unlike English, Dutch and Afrikaans, which have lost almost all forms of declension
of nouns and adjectives, German inflects nouns (See Declension of Proper Nouns p. 136), adjectives
112
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
(See Adjectives p. 140), articles (See Articles p. 218) and possessive determiners (See Pronouns p.
241) into four grammatical cases.
The German cases are the nominative (Nominativ), accusative (Akkusativ), dative (Dativ) and
genitive (Genitiv).
Basically, case divides the functions of nouns in a sentence: the subject (the nominative case), the
direct object (the accusative case), the indirect object (the dative case, i.e. “to”, “with”) and to indicate
possession (the genitive case, i.e. “of”). Observe the Following:
Nominative
Did you know? Ger. Mein Bruder arbeitet hier.
The world’s largest gem-quality - My brother works here.
rough diamond was found in the
Premier Mine in Pretoria, South Africa
on 25 January 1905.
Accusative
It weighted 3,106 carats (621.20 grams/
1.33 pounds) and was called the Cullinan Ger. Sie kennt meinen Bruder.
after the owner of the mine.
- She knows my brother.
Dative
Genitive
In German, as you can see from above examples, verbs and prepositions can require that the
determiners (articles and possessives) and nouns that follow them take either the accusative, dative or
genitive case. Below we will discuss the German cases in greater detail:
The term nominative comes from Latin and designates “to name”. The term der Werfall
translates literally as "the who case”, which means that the question word in the nominative is wer? -
who? and/or was? - what?. A noun or pronoun that is in the nominative case performs the following
functions in a sentence:
113
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
1) Subject
• The nominative case - in German, as well as in English, Dutch and Afrikaans - is the subject of a
sentence (the person, thing or idea that performs the action or carrying out the meaning of the verb).
For example:
In the first sentence, “the architect” is doing the action of designing the building and is therefore
the subject of the sentence.
In the second sentence, “the car” is doing the action of being beautiful the building and is
therefore the subject.
2) Predicate noun
• A predicate noun or predicate nominative is a noun that restates the subject in German. A predicate
noun can only be used with the following verbs:
Note that the nominative case is used both before and after these verbs:
- My friend is an engineer.
114

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
As seen from the first sentence, “my friend” and “engineer” refer to the same person. “My friend”
is the subject and “engineer” is the predicate noun. In the third sentence, the subject “my uncle” and the
predicate nominative “Mark” are the same person.
To identify a predicate noun, one can try to replace the verb in the sentence with an equal sign
(=). If the equation remains true - that is to say, if the subject and the verbal complement are both
referring to the same person or thing - then one have found a predicate noun.
• If a noun is used in isolation (not as part of a sentence), it is normally used in the nominative case, for
example:
NOTE:
In German, if an isolated noun is the object of an unexpressed sentence, for
example in abbreviated answers to questions, the accusative or dative case may
be used (See The Dative Case p. 121 and The Accusative Case p. 125). For
example:
• Note that people are addressed in the nominative case, for instance:
115
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
1) Possession
• The genitive case shows belonging or possession and is usually expressed by the possessive “of” or an
apostrophe with an “s" (’s) in English. Thus, the question word in the genitive is wessen? - whose?:
In the first sentence, the genitive specifies that a quality - the color - “of my friend’s phone" is
being discussed.
In the second sentence, the genitive “my mother’s" indicates whose cat is being discussed.
NOTE:
In German, the genitive is often used in formal language. In spoken, everyday
German, von + the dative usually replaces the genitive (See Informal
Possession with Von in German p. 308):
• One can tell that a noun is used in the genitive case by the articles (the/a), which change to des/eines
(for masculine and neuter) or der/einer (for feminine and plural) (See Articles p. 218). As the
genitive case only has two forms (des or der), one only needs to learn those two.
The table shows the declension of the German definite and indefinite articles in the
nominative and in the genitive case:
116
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, in the masculine and neuter, there is an additional noun ending
-e(s).
However, feminine and plural nouns do not add the ending -(e)s in the genitive
(See also Case Forms of Nouns in German p. 130).
Like the articles, the possessive pronouns can also tell us that a noun is used in the genitive case.
The possessive pronoun, for example Ger. mein - “my” change to meines (for masculine and neuter) or
meiner (for feminine and plural) (For all the Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns See p. 288)
The table shows the declension of the German possessive pronoun mein - “my” in the
nominative and in the genitive case:
Declension of mein
• Like in English, in German, the -s ending occurs too as a sign of possession. However, in German, it is
limited to personal names and no apostrophe is used with it (See also Declension of Proper Nouns
in German p. 136). For example:
117
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, if the name already ends in -s, just an apostrophe must be added,
for instance:
• There are some prepositions that take the genitive case in German (See Prepositions with Genitive
p. 748 ).
In this first sentence,"the village" is the object of the genitive preposition außerhalb.
NOTE:
In spoken German, some of these prepositions (e.g. wegen, während, trotz,
laut) are often used with the dative. Remember, however, that the genitive and
dative forms of feminine nouns are identical (See the Dative Case p. 121).
Below are some common verbs and expression that are used with the genitive case:
118
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
sich etw. (gen) bedienen to make use of sth. gedenken jds./etw.(gen) to think of sb./sth.
bedürfen etw. (gen) to be in need of sich etw. (gen) rühmen to boast of sth.
sich etw. (gen) to take control of sth. sich etw. (gen) to make certain of sth.
bemächtigen vergewissern
sich etw. (gen) enthalten to refrain/to abstain
from sth.
- I am thinking of my hometown.
NOTE:
In German, verbs in the genitive are normally used in more formal writing
(literature) or informal expressions.
• Furthermore, there is a number of adjectives and other phrases that are used with genitive objects in
German.
Here are some common adjectives and phrases that are used the genitive case in German:
In this sentence, “(of) the crime” is the genitive object of the adjective “guilty”.
119
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, the genitive objects that accompany these adjectives are often
translated in English with an accompanying “of".
One does not need to add any additional prepositions to the German phrase, as
these meanings are implied when the noun is declined in the genitive case.
• The following adverbial expressions of indefinite time take the genitive case (See also Adverbs of
Time p. 184):
Below are some expressions of time that take the genitive case in German:
NOTE:
In German, since many of these adverbial expressions of time mentioned above
have been derived from genitive forms, they are no longer seen as such.
120
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
1) Indirect Object
• The dative case is the indirect object (it is the noun that receives something from the direct object - the
accusative case). The dative case answers the question wem? - to or for whom?.
Ger. Der Lehrer (nom.) gibt dem Schüler (dat.) das Lehrbuch (acc.)
Ger. Der Reiseführer (nom.) zeigt den Touristen (dat.) den Tempel (acc.)
In the first sentence, “the student” answers to whom the subject “the teacher” is giving the
textbook.
In the second sentence, “the tourists” answers to whom the subject “the tourist guide” is showing
the temple.
NOTE:
In German, the dative case, when it designates an indirect object in the sentence,
can often be identified by adding the preposition “to” or “for” in the English
translation, such as “the teacher gives the textbook to the student.”
It is worth mentioning that a sentence cannot have an indirect object unless it first has a direct
object in German. The indirect object is by definition to or for whom the subject does something to a
direct object:
Ger. Der Reiseführer (nominative or subject) zeigt den Touristen (dative or indirect object) den
Tempel (accusative or direct object)
- The tourist guide (nominative or subject) shows the temple (accusative or direct object) to the
tourists (dative or indirect object).
• Note that the term, der Wemfall, which is the German word for the dative case, reflects the der-to-
dem change.
121
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Thus, we can tell that a noun is used in the dative by the articles (the/a), which change to dem/
einem (for masculine and neuter), der/einer (for feminine) or den (for plural) respectively (See
Articles p. 218).
The table shows the declension of the German definite and indefinite articles in the
nominative and in the dative case:
NOTE:
In German, unlike the accusative, which only changes with the masculine
gender, the dative changes in all genders and in the plural. In particular, the
nouns of all three genders add an -n in the dative plural (See Declension of
Proper Nouns in German p. 136).
• A certain number of dative verbs take an indirect object - dative object in German. In English, however,
the same verbs take a direct object.
Below are some other common verbs that take a dative object in German:
ähneln jdm. (dat) to resemble sb. glauben jdm. (dat) to believe sb.
antworten jdm. (dat) to answer sb. gleichen jdm./etw. (dat) to resemble sb./sth.
befehlen jdm./etw. (dat) to command sb./sth. gratulieren jdm. (dat) to congratulate sb.
begegnen jdm./etw. (dat) to come across sb./ helfen jdm./etw. (dat) to help sb./sth.
sth.
122
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
beiwohnen etw. (dat) to attend sth. nachlaufen jdm./etw. to run after sb./sth.
(dat)
danken jdm. (dat) to thank sb. schaden jdm./etw. (dat) to damage sb./sth.
dienen jdm. (dat) to serve sb. schmeicheln jdm. (dat) to flatter sb.
drohen jdm. (dat) to threaten sb. vertrauen jdm./etw. (dat) to trust in sb./sth.
fehlen etw. (dat) to lack sth. verzeihen jdm. (dat) to forgive sb.
folgen jdm./etw. (dat) to follow sb./sth. weh tun jdm. (dat) to hurt sb.
gehorchen jdm. (dat) to obey sb. zuhören jdm./etw. (dat) to listen to sb./sth.
gehören jdm./etw. (dat) to belong to sb./sth. zustimmen jdm./etw. to agree with sb./sth.
(dat)
In the first sentence, “you” is the object of the dative verb danken. In the second sentence, “the
student” is the object of the dative verb helfen.
• Furthermore, there is a number of adjectives and other phrases that are normally used with dative
objects in German.
Here are some common adjectives and phrases that are used the dative case in German:
123

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In this sentence, “(for) me” is the dative object of the adjective “expensive”.
NOTE:
In German, the dative objects that accompany these adjectives are often
translated in English with an accompanying “to” or “of”.
One does not need to add any additional prepositions to the German phrase, as
these meanings are implied when the noun is declined in the dative case.
• In German, the object of dative prepositions must be in the dative case. These are the prepositions
whose noun objects are always used in the dative case (See also Prepositions with Dative p. 739):
Below are the prepositions whose noun objects must be in the dative case in German:
aus out of, from seit since, for (with time period)
bei at, with zu to, towards, by, in, on, at, for
For instance:
124
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Ger. Ich fahre mit dem Zug in die Stadt. (Der Zug)
In the first sentence, “the train” is the object of the dative preposition mit. In the second
sentence, “the concert” is the object of the dative preposition nach.
• Verbs with Accusative Prepositions and Nouns (See Common Verbs Used with Dative Case p.
743 and Common Verbs Used with Accusative/Dative Case p. 747).
Ger. Sie träumt von der Reise (dative). (die Reise nominative)
1) Direct Object
• The accusative case is known as the direct object (the direct object functions as the receiver of the
action). In other words, it is the person, thing, or idea that is acted upon by the subject. The accusative
case answers the question wen? - who/whom?.
In the first sentence, “the owner” is the direct object. It is what the subject “the cat” is meeting. In
there words, “the owner” is acted upon by “the cat”, so he receives the action of the subject (the cat).
In the second sentence, “the film” is the direct object. It is what the subject “she” is watching.
125

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
Remember that the order of the words can be different, as long as you have the
proper accusative articles, the meaning remains clear in German. Compare the
following:
• Note that, in German, the masculine singular articles der and ein change to den and einen in the
accusative case. The feminine, neuter and plural articles do not change.
The table shows the declension of the German definite and indefinite articles in the
nominative and in the accusative case:
• A certain number of accusative verbs take a direct object - accusative object (a noun or pronoun) in
German.
126
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Below are some common verbs that take an accusative object in German:
abschließen etw. (acc) to lock sth. holen etw. (acc) to fetch sth.
anhalten etw. (acc) to stop sth. hören jdn./etw. (acc) to hear sb./sth.
anrufen jdn. (acc) to call sb. kennen jdn./etw. (acc) to know sb./sth.
anschauen etw. (acc) to look at/watch sth. legen etw. (acc) to put sth.
aufmachen etw. (acc) to open sth. lernen etw. (acc) to learn sth.
backen etw. (acc) to bake etw. (acc.) liegen lassen to leave sth.
bekommen etw. (acc) to receive sth. machen etw. (acc) to do/to make sth.
beneiden jdn. (acc.) to envy sb. mögen jdn./etw. (acc) to like sb./sth.
beraten jdn./etw. (acc) to advise sb. sth nehmen etw. (acc) to take sth.
besuchen jdn./etw. (acc.) to visit sb./sth. schätzen jdn./etw. (acc) to appreciate sb./sth.
beschränken etw. (acc.) to restrict sth. sehen jdn./etw. (acc) to see sb./sth.
bezahlen jdn./etw. (acc.) to pay sb./sth. sprechen etw. (acc) to speak sth.
brauchen etw. (acc) to need sth. suchen jdn./etw. (acc) to to search/look for sth.
diskutieren etw. (acc.) to discuss sth. trinken etw. (acc) to drink sth.
einladen jdn. (acc) to invite sb. öffnen etw. (acc) to open sth.
erfinden etw. (acc) to invent sth. unterrichten jdn. (acc) to teach sb./sth.
fragen jdn./etw. (acc) to ask sb./sth. verhandeln etw. (acc.) to negotiate sth.
127

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Furthermore, the object of an accusative preposition must be in the accusative case. There are several
prepositions that require noun objects that follow them to be used in the accusative case in German
(See Prepositions with Accusative p. 735).
Ger. Das ist das Geschenk für den Lehrer. (Der Lehrer)
In the first sentence, “the teacher” is the object of the accusative preposition für. In the second
sentence, “my dog” is the object of the accusative preposition ohne.
• Verbs with Accusative Prepositions and Nouns (See Common Verbs Used with Accusative Case
p. 738 and Common Verbs Used with Accusative/Dative Case p. 747).
• The accusative case is used in some definite time expressions that are not governed by a preposition
(See also Adverbs of Time p. 184).
Below are some speci c time expressions that take the accusative case in German:
128

fi
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
nächsten Montag till next Monday seit letztem Jahr since last year
am Donnerstag on Thursday
In the first sentence, “all day” is an expression of definite time that does not use a preposition. In
the second sentence, “every Saturday” is also an expression of definite time that is not used with a
preposition.
The table below sums up the declension of the de nite and inde nite articles in the
nominative, genitive, dative and accusative:
Note that the underlined articles indicate a change in form from the nominative (See also
Articles p. 218).
The table sums up the declension of the German possessive pronoun mein - my in the
nominative, genitive, dative and accusative
Declension of mein
129

fi
fi
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
Declension of mein
Note that the underlined endings indicate a change in form from the nominative (See also
Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns p. 288).
All of the case forms of nouns in the nominative, genitive, dative and accusative will be mentioned
below.
Remember that the basic sentence that could be formed consists of a subject and a verb, for
example: Ich spreche - I speak; or Das Kind spielt - The child is playing.
Since every sentence has a subject, every sentence will contain at least one noun (or pronoun)
used in the nominative case. Note that in the nominative case, the nouns do not add any endings in
German.
German
der Vater - the father die Mutter - the mother das Kind - the child die Bücher - the books
• Most masculine and all neuter nouns add an -(e)s ending in the genitive case in the singular. Note that
monosyllabic nouns can take -es ending rather than -s in more formal language. However, it would be
still correct you if you simply add -s.
130

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
NOTE:
In German, if nouns end in -s, -sch, -ss, -ß, -st, -tz, -x, -z, the ending -es must
be added:
• It is worth mentioning that unlike masculine and neuter, feminine and plural nouns do not add the
ending -(e)s in the genitive, for example:
German
Note that the underlined words and endings indicate a change in form from the nominative.
131
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
German English
zu Hause at home
NOTE:
In German, if the nouns already end in -n in the plural, no ending is added in
the dative plural:
The table below shows the declension of nouns in the dative case in German:
German
Note that the underlined words and endings indicate a change in form from the nominative.
132
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
The table shows the declension of nouns in the accusative case in German:
German
Note that the underlined words and endings indicate a change in form from the nominative.
The table below sums up the declension of nouns in the nominative, genitive, dative and
accusative:
German
The former Dutch and Afrikaans case system was similar to that of modern German, and had four
cases: nominative (subject), genitive (possession), dative (indirect object, object of preposition) and
accusative (direct object, object of preposition).
The nominative case is still used - in German, as well as in English, Dutch and Afrikaans - and
presents the subject of a sentence (the person, thing or idea that performs the action or carrying out the
meaning of the verb). For instance:
133

CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In the first sentence, “the architect” is doing the action of designing the building and is therefore
the subject of the sentence. In the second sentence, “the car” is doing the action of being beautiful the
building and is therefore the subject.
Like the nominative, the genitive is also still in use in Dutch and Afrikaans. However, unlike in
German, in Dutch, the genitive is rarely used and only surviving in several in fixed expressions.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the genitive case is not used at all. It is completely replaced with
the preposition van - “of” instead.
The table below shows two examples of the genitive case in fixed expressions:
Genitive Case
Het Koninkrijk der Nederlanden Die Koninkryk van die Nederlande The Kingdom of the Netherlands
Just like in Afrikaans, in modern Dutch, the genitive case is substituted with the preposition van
- “of” to demonstrate possession. In German, however, the genitive case is used. Observe the following:
134
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
- My brother’s car.
NOTE:
In every day German, the preposition von - “of” + the dative case also
replaces the genitive:
Furthermore, in modern Dutch and Afrikaans, the cases are determined by prepositions and word
order, not by noun and determiner endings, like in German. For instance, the distinction between direct
and indirect object is now made by putting the indirect object (dative) before the direct object (accusative)
in Dutch and Afrikaans. Study the following example:
Ger. Der Lehrer (nom.) gibt dem Schüler (dat.) das Buch (acc.).
Afr. Die onderwyser (nom.) gee die student (dat.) die boek (acc).
The distinction between direct and indirect object can also be made by using the preposition met
- “with”, aan - “to” with the indirect object in Dutch and Afrikaans. For example:
Ger. Der Lehrer (nom.) gibt dem Schüler (dat.) das Buch (acc.).
Dut. De leraar (nom.) geeft het boek (acc.) aan de student. (dat.).
Afr. Die onderwyser (nom.) gee die boek (acc.) aan die student (dat.).
The use of cases with prepositions has also disappeared in Dutch and Afrikaans.
It is worth reminding that in German, however, the nouns and their determiners (articles,
possessives etc.) can be used in the accusative case if they are the object of an accusative preposition, or in
the dative case if they are the object of dative prepositions.
135
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
In the sentence above, in German, the noun with its article dem Konzert - “the concert” is used
in the dative case (the neuter singular article das changes to dem in the dative: das Konzert -> dem
Konzert), since it is the object of the dative preposition nach - “after” (See also Case in German p.
112).
In Dutch and Afrikaans, however, the noun with its article Dut. het concert and Afr. die
konsert - “the concert” do not change after the preposition na - “after” because, as we mentioned before,
the cases with prepositions have fallen out of use. Study one more example:
In this sentence, the noun with its article den Lehrer - “the teacher” is used in the accusative
case (the masculine singular article der changes to den in the accusative: der Lehrer -> den Lehrer),
because it is the object of the accusative preposition für - “for” in German.
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the noun with its article Dut. de leraar and Afr. die
onderwyser - “the teacher” do not change after the preposition Dut. voor, Afr. vir - “after” since the
cases with prepositions are no longer in use.
Proper nouns, such as Anna, Kate, Paul, Germany, are not usually used with an article. Therefore,
they are generally indeclinable. Study the following:
Nominative Paul ist hier Paul is hier Paul is hier Paul is here
Genitive Das Haus von Paul Het huis van Paul is Die huis van Paul is Paul’s house is big
ist groß groot groot
Dative Ich gebe Paul den Ik geef de pen aan Ek gee die pen aan I give the pen to Paul
Stift Paul Paul
Accusative Ich sehe Paul Ik zie Paul Ek sien Paul I see Paul
136
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
As seen from the table above, the declension of the proper nouns can be done without an article
or any ending in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
NOTE:
However, it is very common in the South of Germany, and less so in the North,
to use the definite article before a given name. It is used as a colloquial way of
referring to someone, for example:
In German and Dutch, the genitive case (possession) can be expressed with the ending -s added
to the proper noun. In Afrikaans, the particle se is used and is put after the proper noun. In English, it is
usually expressed with ’s, e.g. “Paul’s bicycle”.
Below is the formula to show the genitive (possession) with proper nouns in West Germanic
languages:
-s se 's
- Paul’s pen.
It is worth reminding that genitive case (possession) can also be replaced with the following
preposition in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
137
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
von van of
NOTE:
In colloquial German and Dutch, in order to show ownership a possessive
pronoun is also used after the possessor's name.
It is only used with the third person singular and plural (See Possessive
Pronouns p. 241).
Below are the possessive pronouns used to show possession in Dutch:
German Dutch English
For example:
In Afrikaans, the particle s'n may also be used to express possession, for
example:
138
CHAPTER 1: NOUNS
• Like in English, in German and Dutch, an apostrophe is used instead of the -s ending if the proper noun
already ends in -s, -z, -x (or -ß in German):
NOTE:
In Dutch, if the proper noun ends in a long vowel, in order to keep the vowel
long, we add an apostrophe before adding -s, for example:
139
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
An adjective is a word that describes a person or thing, such as their size, shape, appearance,
colour and other qualities, for instance, big, round, beautiful, red.
Inflection of Adjectives
For example, “His house is beautiful” (beautiful is a predicate adjective in this sentence), but “his
beautiful house” (in this phrase beautiful is an attributive adjective).
It should be remembered that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, predicative adjectives are invariable,
which means they do not take endings, for instance:
NOTE:
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when predicative adjectives
follow the noun, this means they are also put after the verb “to be”.
Below is the formula of adjectives that are used predicatively in West Germanic languages:
Study below some frequently used German, Dutch and Afrikaans adjectives that are used
“predicatively”:
140
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
wir sind traurig we zijn treurig (or ons is treurig (or we are sad
verdrietig) hartseer)
das Auto ist schnell de auto is snel die kar is vinnig the car is fast
der Bus ist langsam de bus is traag (or die bus is stadig the bus is slow
langzaam)
sie ist hübsch zij is mooi sy is mooi she is pretty
das Haus ist groß het huis is groot die huis is groot the house is big
der Tisch ist klein de tafel is klein die tafel is klein the table is small
However, unlike in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, attributive adjectives must agree in
gender, number and case (in German) with the noun they precede. Study the following:
Cape Town is South Africa’s oldest city. Dut. Zijn mooie huis.
It is also the most popular city with
gorgeous coastline and stunning beaches. Afr. Sy pragtige huis
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, as we can see from the example above, adjectives that are used
attributively require an ending.
Below we will discuss the declension of these adjectival endings in German, Dutch and Afrikaans
in greater detail:
141
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
German
To make it easier to master German adjective endings we should memorize the three paradigms in
order to know exactly what the correct ending is for an attributive adjective placed in front of a German
noun.
There are:
1. Weak inflection
• dies- (this), jen- (that), jeglich- (any), jed- (every), which decline similarly to the definite article
• manch- (some), solch- (such), welch- (which), which decline similarly to the definite article
• alle (all)
• beide (both)
2. Mixed inflection
• possessive determiners mein- (my), dein- (your), sein- (his)/ihr- (her)/sein- (its), unser-
(our), euer- (your meaning “you guys"), Ihr- (your formal), ihr- (their)
3. Strong inflection
• wenig- (few), viel- (much, many), mehrer- (several, many), einig- (some)
• non-inflectable phrases: ein paar (a couple, a few), ein bisschen (a bit, a little bit)
142

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
1. Weak inflection
Below is the table demonstrating the endings of adjectives and some examples supporting
the rule.
N -e -e -e -en
A -en -e -e -en
As it is seen from the table this set of endings is quite simple and consists of merely an -e or an -en.
This is because they are used after definite articles der/die/das and other determiners that take the
same endings as the definite articles themselves, such as dies- (this), jen- (that), jeglich- (any), jed-
(everyone), solch- (such), welch- (which, that), derselb- (the same) etc. (See Articles p. )
Therefore, as the determiners themselves have endings that clearly indicate gender, number and
case, there is no need for the adjectives that follow them to repeat this information.
N -e -e -e -en
143

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
2. Mixed inflection
Below is the table demonstrating the endings of adjectives and some examples supporting
the rule.
The adjective endings in this paradigm are used after indefinite articles ein/eine/ein and after all
the possessive determiners, for example: mein- (my), dein- (your), sein- (his)/ihr- (her)/sein- (its),
unser- (our), euer- (your meaning “you guys"), Ihr- (your formal), ihr- (their) as well as after kein-
(no, not any, none, nobody). Since it is impossible to use a plural noun after the article ein, one can use it
after all the other determiners in this group.
Remember that we should also use an appropriate possessive adjective ending when a person’s name
with a gen. -s ending is put before the adjective (ex. Marks neues IPhone - Mark’s new IPhone).
Ein reicher Mann Ein kluges Kind Eine junge Frau Meine/Keine
glücklichen Menschen
(A rich man) (A smart child) (A young woman) (My/No happy people)
A -en -es -e -en
It is worth saying that the black lines drawn is meant to emphasize that beyond these lines,
including the plural, all of the endings are identical.
144

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
3. Strong inflection
Below is the table demonstrating the endings of adjectives and some examples supporting
the rule.
N -er -es -e -e
A -en -es -e -e
The adjective endings in this paradigm are similar to the definite article endings, except for the
adjectival ending -en in the masculine and neuter genitive singular.
In strong inflection the endings are used when nothing (no determiner) precedes the noun, or if the
noun is preceded by a non-inflectable word or phrase such as ein bisschen, etwas or viel (a little,
some, a lot of/much).
It is also used when the adjective is preceded merely by another regular (i.e. non-article) adjective
and thus only the adjective indicates the gender, number and case.
N -er -es -e -e
145

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Dutch
Like in German, in Dutch, when an adjective is used attributively before a noun, it can take
different forms. Remember the general rule that says:
Example:
Nevertheless, many adjectives require spelling changes while adding the ending -e in Dutch. Below,
we will consider all the exceptions and spelling rules for the inflection of adjectives:
• Adjectives that contain more than one syllable with the long vowels aa, ee and oo in a closed syllable,
drop one vowel letter and add -e according to the rules for the spelling of long vowels in open syllables:
Dutch English
Adjectives ending in -f
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and ending in -f, double the -f and add -e. Note that -f must be
doubled to preserve the short vowel in the preceding syllable:
146

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Dutch English
NOTE:
If adjectives contain a long vowel or diphthong, or if a consonant precedes the
-f, the -f becomes -v and -e is added:
Dutch English
• The double vowel (aa, ee, oo) from the last syllable disappears in order to keep the single vowel in open
syllable while adding -e:
Dutch English
Adjectives ending in -g
• In Dutch, if the adjectives contain a short vowel, double the final -g in order to preserve the short vowel:
147
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Dutch English
Adjectives ending in -d
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and end in a single consonant d, double this consonant to preserve a
short vowel in a closed syllable and add -e:
Dutch English
• Adjectives ending in a consonant + -d, add the ending -e without any spelling changes:
Dutch English
Afrikaans
Like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, when used attributively, many adjectives take an -e ending, for
example:
There are two main rules for the adjectives that take the ending -e:
148

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
However, like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, many adjectives require spelling changes while taking the
ending -e. Below, we will consider all the exceptions and spelling rules for the inflection of adjectives:
• Adjectives that contain more than one syllable with the long vowels aa, ee and oo in a closed syllable,
drop one vowel letter and add -e according to the rules for the spelling of long vowels in open syllables:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
Adjectives that end in -er, even though they contain more than one syllable, do
not change:
Afrikaans English
149
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
Adjectives ending in -f
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and ending in -f, change the -f to -w and add -e. Note that -w must
be doubled to preserve the short vowel in the preceding syllable:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
If adjectives contain a long vowel or diphthong, or a consonant precedes the -f,
the same spelling changes apply but only one -w is added:
Afrikaans English
Adjectives ending in -g
• Adjectives containing a long vowel or diphthong plus the consonants g, drop the consonant g and add
-e and a diaeresis is also added to the ending where necessary to preserve the distinction between
syllables:
Afrikaans English
150
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
• In Afrikaans, if the adjectives contain a short vowel, either add the ending -te or double the final -g in
order to preserve the short vowel:
Afrikaans English
eg - egte real
NOTE:
Adjectives that end in -ig are polysyllabic. Thus, they always add -e without
dropping or doubling the -g, for example:
Afrikaans English
Also, adjectives that end in -ng add -e without any spelling changes:
Afrikaans English
Adjectives ending in -d
• Adjectives ending in a consonant + -d, add the ending -e without any spelling changes:
151
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and end in a single consonant d, double this consonant to preserve a
short vowel in a closed syllable and add -e:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
However, adjectives containing a long vowel or diphthong, drop the consonant
d and add -e. A diaeresis is also added where necessary to preserve the
distinction between syllables:
Afrikaans English
Exception
Adjectives ending in -s
• Historically, adjectives which ended in -st, but now end in -s, add -te:
Afrikaans English
152
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
Below, we will consider special rules for the inflection of adjectives that are used after indefinite
pronouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
German
In German, the following indefinite pronouns can be put in front of plural nouns with an adjective
between the two:
German English
einige some
mehrere several
verschiedene various
alle all
viele a lot of
wenige few
Note that the endings that are required after alle are the same as for the plural of der/die/das (See
Articles p. 218)
The endings that are used after other indefinite pronouns are the same as for unpreceded adjectives,
which means that the ending on the pronouns is identical to the ending on the adjective.
153

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Plural
N -e -e -en
The distinction in endings between alle and the other pronouns is because alle refers to a definite
number and the others to an indefinite number.
154

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the -s ending of partitive adjectives is usually found after iets and
niks but is now rarely used after all other indefinite pronouns, e.g.:
It is worth mentioning that In Dutch and Afrikaans, the ending -s applies to comparatives as well
when used after the indefinite pronouns (See also Comparative Adjectives p. 198). Observe the
following:
- something smaller
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, even after iets and niks the -s is now normally omitted
from comparatives:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the following adjectives do not usually take any endings:
155
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Indeclinable Adjectives
German
There are several adjectives borrowed from other languages that do not take any endings in
German. For example, beige, purpur (purple), orange etc.
Remember that if these adjectives are used before a noun they often add -farben, which can take
the usual endings. Observe the following:
Dutch
1. In Dutch, an attributive adjective does not take an -e ending when used before a neuter singular noun
(het-noun), that is used with the article een or no article. Observe the following:
- A big house.
In the example above the Dutch noun huis (house) is neuter and is used in the singular form
without any determiners and thus the adjective groot (big) gets no -e ending.
- A big table.
In the second example the Dutch noun tafel (table) is feminine and thus the adjective groot
(big) gets the ending -e.
• These adjectives normally describe materials from which the noun is made, e.g.:
Dutch English
gouden golden
156

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Dutch English
zilveren silver
houten wooden
katoenen cotton
wollen woolen
stoffen fabrics
Dutch English
gesloten closed
dronken drunk
gebakken fried
bevroren frozen
verboden forbidden
For instance:
Dutch English
eigen own
157

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Dutch English
dempen mute
open open
verlegen shy
verkouden cold
volwassen mature
For example:
4. Adjectives of foreign origin such as aluminium, plastic, beige etc. do not get an -e ending. Study the
following:
- A plastic chair.
5. When indefinite words elk - “each”, ieder - “every”, welk - “which” precede an adjective + neuter
singular noun, they and the adjective do not add any ending:
NOTE:
If the noun is not a neuter singular noun, then elk, ieder, welk as well as the
adjective get the -e ending. Observe the following:
158
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
6. Such words as linker- (left) and rechter- (right) in a combination with another word do not take an
-e ending. For example:
7. Some set expressions do not take an -e ending in Dutch. Observe the following:
Dutch English
NOTE:
In Dutch, the form het openbare vervoer is also used to mean the transport
that is public and it could be any transport.
8. Some attributive adjectives may add the -e ending or not depending on the meaning. Compare the
following:
159
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans
1. In Afrikaans, monosyllabic adjectives ending in k, p, t, m, n, l and r do not take any endings. Observe
the following:
Afrikaans English
sterk strong
ryp ripe
groot big
dom stupid
groen green
koel cool
swaar heavy
For example:
- a big house.
- a green car.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, if the indefinite pronouns elk - “every”, welk - “which” and sulk -
“such” precede an adjective, they always get the -e ending:
Furthermore, the following adjectives add the ending -e, even though
theoretically they require no ending:
Afrikaans English
160
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
2. Adjectives ending in a vowel or diphthong, such as: blou (blue), mooi (pretty), rooi (red). Observe
the following:
NOTE:
However, adjectives that end in -u change the spelling and add the ending -e in
Afrikaans:
Afrikaans English
ru - ruwe rough
3. Adjectives that denote materials such as aluminium (aluminium), plastiek (plastic), etc. do not get
an any ending, but are written together with the noun they qualify. Study the following:
- a plastic chair.
4. In Afrikaans, there are some adjectives which, even though they do not add the ending -e, change in
form when used attributively:
161
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
oud - ou old
To compare:
NOTE:
In the following compound adjectives, the historical ending has been retained:
Afrikaans English
162
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
5. In Afrikaans, many adjectives that do not usually add the ending -e may add it when used figuratively
or affectively, for example:
Afrikaans English
6. Some adjectives also take the ending -e when used in standard expressions in Afrikaans, for example:
Afrikaans English
163

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Afrikaans English
Unlike in Dutch, in German and Afrikaans, there is a number of compound nouns where the
adjectives are attached to the noun.
One should try to memorize those combination as there is no general rule concerning the
formation of compound nouns with prefixed adjectives.
Below is the list of some compound combinations of adjectives and nouns in German and
Afrikaans:
NOTE:
In Dutch, the adjectives are not joined to the nouns in this case. Observe the
following:
Dutch English
Note that the word basisschool - “Primary school” is more common in Dutch.
164
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, there is a number of words that can be converted into adjectives
by adding suffixes.
Below are German, Dutch and Afrikaans suf xes that are used to form adjectives from other
words:
Remember that the suffixes used in the mentioned above examples do not always cognate in all
Germanic languages when forming adjectives.
It is often that an adjective has different suffixes in English, German, Dutch and Afrikaans. For
example:
165

fi
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
NOTE:
In German, the suffix -isch can also designate the adjectival form of a city,
region, nationality, people or country.
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the suffix -s is added in this case. (See Nationality
Adjectives p. 179):
German Dutch/Afrikaans English
Most adjectives can get a modifying word or intensifier, such as Ger. sehr, Dut. heel/erg, Afr.
baie - “very”, or Ger. so, Dut. zo, Afr. so - “so” put before them in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
These modifying words or intensifiers are used to intensify the meaning of adjectives or
sometimes both adjectives and nouns (See also Adverbs of Intensity p. 190), for example:
166
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans (just as in English), the verb’s present participles can be used as
adjectives, known as “participial adjectives.” (See also the Present Participle p. 586).
However, unlike other adjectives, present participles as adjectives are only used attributively
(inflected form) in West Germanic languages (See Use of the Present Participle as an Adjective p.
168).
In English, participial adjectives from present participles are formed by adding to a verb the
ending -ing, e.g. working, speaking etc.
In German and Dutch and Afrikaans, participial adjectives from present participles are formed as
follows:
167

fi
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the present participle as an adjective is used in the following
ways:
1. It is used as an attributive adjective that is formed from the present participle. An attributive adjective
is put before a noun. Compare the following examples:
Example 1
Example 2
The first example shows that Ger. arbeitet, Dut. werkt, Afr. werk - “works” is the 3rd person
singular of the verb Ger. arbeiten, Dut. werken, Afr. werk - “work” .
168
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
In the second example, Ger. arbeitender, Dut. werkende, Afr. werkende - “working” is the
present participle used as an adjective and formed from the verb Ger. arbeiten, Dut. werken, Afr. werk
- “work”.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when the present participle is used as an
attributive adjective, it follows the rules of adjectives (See Declension of
Adjectival Endings p. 142)
2. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, it is frequently used as an adverb of manner, in which case it often
has a direct parallel in English (See also Adverbs of Manner p. 181):
3. It may also be used to form adjectival nouns (See also Adjectival Nouns p. 100):
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, in addition to its verbal functions in forming the perfect tenses
of verbs, the past participles of verbs are also quite frequently used as adjectives in much the same way as
it is in English (See The Past Participle p. 439).
The past participles in all Germanic languages can be divided into two major groups according to
whether:
1. the past participle is formed by the addition of a prefix and/or suffix to the stem. This group of verbs is
called “weak verbs”. For example:
169
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Below is the formula for the formation of the past participle of weak verbs in West Germanic
languages:
2. the past participle is formed by the addition of a prefix and/or suffix to the stem and a vowel change in
the stem itself. This category of verbs is called “strong verbs”. For instance:
Below is the formula for the formation of the past participle of strong verbs in West Germanic
languages:
NOTE:
Afrikaans comes from 18th century Dutch, where verbs, like in English and
German, had strong forms. For example: sing -> sang, take -> took, etc. So,
Afrikaans eliminated the strong form for verbs.
170
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the past participle as an adjective is used in the following ways:
1. It is used as a attributive adjective. An attributive adjective is put before a noun. For example:
In the example above “the baked cake”, the word “baked” is the past participle used as an
attributive adjective.
2. It is also used as a predicative adjective. A predicative adjective is put after a noun. Study the following
example:
In the phrase “the cake is baked”, the form “baked” is the past participle used as a predicate
adjective in this sentence.
Note that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the past participle as a predicative adjective is followed
by the verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be” and is invariable, which means it does not take
endings.
However, the past participle used as an attributive adjective must inflect, which means that it must
agree in gender, number, or/and case (in German), or other conditions with the noun it precedes.
To compare:
171
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Since Switzerland has four official Ger. Das Haus ist verkauft.
languages: German, French, Italian
and Romansh, it is known by multiple names: Dut. Het huis is verkocht.
Schweiz (German), Suisse (French), Svizzera
(Italian), and Svizra (Romansh). Afr. Die huis is verkoop
Example 2
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, past participles used as an attributive adjective change the
spelling and take endings and follow the same rules as all normal adjectives do. To learn more about
spelling changes and the inflexion of past participles as attributive adjectives in West Germanic
languages:
(See Declension of Adjectival Endings p. 142 and Verb Spelling Changes of Regular
Verbs in The Past Participle p. 443).
Like in English, in German, Dutch and in Afrikaans, there is a considerable number of adjectives
used predicatively that are followed by a fixed preposition. However, the prepositions are often different
in these Germanic languages and thus it is advisable to memorize them by heart.
Remember that predicate adjectives are normally used with the auxiliary verb Ger. sein Dut. zijn.,
Afr. wees - “to be”. For example:
172
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
NOTE:
In German, adjectives followed by a preposition require grammatical cases. To
compare:
The required grammatical case will be given after the prepositions in the
following list of adjectives.
Some of the following adjectives are derived from the past participle of weak and formerly strong
verbs (the latter now existing only as adjectives in Dutch and Afrikaans).
These adjectives can take two positions in a sentence regarding the prepositional phrase
dependent on them:
1. They precede a noun (like true adjectives, i.e. Ger. reich an, Dut. rijk aan, Afr. ryk aan - “rich in”)
Study the following example:
2. or can take either position: precede or follow a noun, then being put at the end of the clause and thus
resembling more the past participle from which they are derived. Compare the following:
173
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Note that the adjectives which can take up either position are marked with an asterisk (*).
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, it is more usual for all such adjectives to precede nouns.
Learners is unlikely to be wrong if they stick to this word order with all the
adjectives below.
Below is a list of the most common predicate adjectives used with a fixed preposition in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
erstaunt über* (+acc.); verbaasd over* verstom oor* amazed at, amazed by
begeistert von* (+dat.)
böse auf (+acc.) boos op kwaad vir angry with, mad at
blau vor (Kälte) blauw van (de kou) blou van (koue) blue with (cold)
174
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
beschäftigt mit* (+dat.) bezig met, druk met besig met, druk met busy with
besorgt um* (+acc.) bezorgd over* besorg oor* concerned about, for
angewiesen auf* (+acc.) aangewezen op*, aangewese op*, dependent on, reliant
abhängig von* (+dat.) afhankelijk van* afhanklik van* on
verzweifelt nach (+dat.) wanhopig voor wanhopig vir desperate for
175

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
176

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
stolz auf (+acc.) trots op, gesteld op* trots op, gesteld op* proud of
177

CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
NOTE:
In German and Afrikaans, the adjective Ger. voll and Afr. vol - “full of” adds no
preposition.
In Dutch, however, the adjective vol takes the preposition met when used with
the verb zijn - “to be”:
Moreover, the preposition mit can be used in the literal sense of a filled
container, and von can be used in figurative senses in German. To compare:
Like in German and Afrikaans, in Dutch, the adjective vol without preposition
is common with other verbs or in phrases without a verb:
Furthermore, unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German, the expression Ger. haben Angst vor -
“afraid of” is used with a noun Angst - “fear” and the verb haben - “to have”, and not as adjectives with
the verb “to be” like in other West Germanic languages. Compare the following:
178
CHAPTER 2: ADJECTIVES
Nationality Adjectives
Nationality adjectives are used to describe people or things that have origin from a particular
continent, country or nation, for example: African, Austrian, Dutch etc.
In general, German, Dutch and Afrikaans nationality adjectives are formed by adding particular
suffixes to the names of continents or countries.
Below is a table showing the suffixes that are used to form nationality adjectives in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans.
Remember that unlike nationality nouns, nationality adjectives are not used with the articles (See
also Inhabitants of Countries p. 106). Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when nationality adjectives are used as an
attributive adjective, they change the spelling and take endings and follow the
same rules as all adjectives do (See Declension of Adjectival Endings p.
142).
179
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
An adverb is a word that can be used with verbs, adjectives or other adverbs giving more
information about where, when, how, or in what circumstances something happens, for instance, there,
yesterday, suddenly, excellently. So mastering adverbs will significantly expand learner’s vocabulary.
Use of Adverbs
Generally speaking, adverbs are used with:
Forming Adverbs
In English, adverbs are usually formed by adding –ly to the end of the adjective (happy –
happily).
However, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, adverbs and adjectives are identical, which means
that adverbs add no endings and have the same form as the uninflected adjectives.
Below is the table demonstrating the examples of adverb forming from adjectives in English,
German and Dutch.
180

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Remember that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, adverbs, unlike adjectives, do not inflect, which
is why in the following sentence the adverbs Ger. äußerst, Dut. uiterst and Afr. uiters - “extremely”
have no ending but the adjective interessant - “interesting” takes the ending (See also Declension of
Adjectival Endings p. 142):
NOTE:
In Dutch, especially in speech, the adverb heel - “very” usually takes the ending
-e along with an inflected adjective when it occurs in front of one:
However, in formal writing, the form heel is likely to be used with an inflected
adjective:
Other Adverbs
Adverbs of manner
There are some common adverbs of manner which tell us how something is done.
Below is a list of some common adverbs of manner in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
181
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
For example:
Adverbs of place
Below is a list of some common adverbs of place in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
182
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
hier und da hier en daar; her en der hier en daar; her en der here and there
For instance:
183
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Adverbs of time
Below is a list of some common adverbs of time in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
nach na na after
fortan, von nun an voortaan, van nu af aan voortaan, van nou af henceforth, from now on
ab und zu, dann und nu en dan, af en toe nou en dan, af en toe now and then
wann
184

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
bis jetzt, bisher tot nu toe, tot dusver, tot nou toe, tot dusver so far, until now, as yet
damals toen, destijds, indertijd toe, destyds, indertyd then, at that time (in the
past)
heute vandaag vandag today
noch, immer noch nog , nog steeds nog, nog altyd/steeds yet, still
For example:
185
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Interrogative Adverbs
Interrogative adverbs introduce questions asking when, where, how and why etc. (See also
Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs p. 322).
NOTE:
Remember that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, if interrogative adverbs are used
to ask questions, the positions of subject and verb are inverted (See also Asking
Questions p. 514) For example:
186
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
• It is worth mentioning that in German, the interrogative adverb wie sometimes means ‘what’. Study the
following:
NOTE:
Unlike in German, in English, Dutch and Afrikaans, the interrogative pronoun
wat - “what” is used in this case:
In Dutch, however, the interrogative adverb hoe can also be used to mean
“what”:
Otherwise, Ger. wie, Dut., Afr. hoe means ‘how’ and is followed by other adverbs, like English
‘how’.
Below is a list of the interrogative adverb “how” followed by other adverbs in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans.
For example:
187
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
• When Ger. wo, Dut., and Afr. waar are used in a question with a verb of motion meaning direction to
or from a place, German, Dutch and Afrikaans must use the compounds Ger. wohin/woher, Dut. and
Afr. waarheen/waar vandaan respectively. Compare the following:
Example 1 (where)
Did you know?
NOTE:
In German, as it is seen from the example 2 (where to) and the example 3
(where from), two word orders are possible.
188
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
• In German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, the adverbs Ger. hin/her; Dut., Afr. heen/van denote direction
towards and away from the speaker. These adverbs can be used together with other adverbs to indicate
movement:
Below are some examples of the adverbs Ger. hin/her; Dut., Afr. heen/van used with other
adverbs in West Germanic languages:
Dut. Ik ga daarheen.
- I am going there.
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the adverb vandaan - “from” is generally used in
combination with verbs of motion like komen - “to come”, e.g.:
Instead, the adverb Dut., and Afr. van - “from” is used together with
prepositions to show movement.
• In German, however, the adverbs Ger. hin/her are also frequently used together with prepositions to
form separable prefixes of separable verbs to express movement (See also Separable Verbal
Prefixes p. 596):
Below are some examples of the adverbs hin/her used with prepositions to emphasize
movement in German:
189
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
German English
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the prepositions op - “up” and af - “down” are usually
used in this case:
Adverbs of intensity
In English, German and Dutch, there is a number of intensifying adverbs, which are used to
intensify other adverbs and adjectives.
The following adverbs are quite commonly used to qualify adjectives and adverbs in these
Germanic languages:
Maximizer
Booster
190
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Moderator
Approximator
fast, nahezu, beinahe, bijna, haast, vrijwel byna, amper, vrywel almost
bald
etwa ongeveer ongeveer approximately
Diminisher
Ger. sehr, Dut. zeer, heel, erg, Afr. baie, seer - “very” are one of the most common adverbs of
intensity used in sentences, but below is the list of other adverbs which can definitely help you enrich
your language.
191
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Adverbs of doubt
192

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
nur, allein maar, alleen, slechts maar, net, alleen, slegs only, just
Adverbs can also consist of more than one word, for example:
– without a doubt.
Adverbial phrases
There are some fixed phrases which have an adverbial function. Below are some common ones:
193
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
mit (dat.) + abstract noun met + abstract noun met + abstract noun with + abstract noun
Examples:
Below we will consider the word order of adverbs of time, place and manner:
194

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
1. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, adverbs of time can come after the verb, while in English, they are
usually put at the end of a sentence:
2. Adverbs of time are often placed at the beginning of a sentence in all West Germanic languages. Note
that unlike in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans if we begin the phrase with an adverb of time,
we must inverse the subject and the verb:
NOTE:
However, remember that only statements can begin with adverbs of time. In
questions the verb should be in first position in German, Dutch and Afrikaans
(See also Asking Questions p. 514):
1. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, adverbs of place usually come after the verb, while in English, they
are usually put at the end of a sentence:
195
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
- I work there.
NOTE:
Remember that in tenses which are formed by using Ger. haben, Dut. hebben,
Afr. hê + the past participle of the main verb, adverbs of place are put before
the past participle in German, Dutch and Afrikaans (See The Present Perfect
p. 467):
2. Adverbs of place can also be placed at the beginning of a sentence to provide emphasis. Like with
adverbs of time, when we start the phrase with an adverb of place, we should inverse the subject and
the verb:
1. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, adverbs of manner are likely to be placed after the verb to which they
refer, for example:
196
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, in compound tenses which are made up of
Ger. haben, Dut. hebben, Afr. hê + the past participle of the main verb,
adverbs of manner are also placed before the past participle (See See The
Present Perfect p. 467):
However, when there is more than one adverb in a sentence, we should remember the following
order:
• In English, adverbs are usually put in the following order in a sentence: Place -> Manner -> Time
(PMT),
• German, Dutch and Afrikaans, insist on the order: Time -> Manner -> Place (TMP).
Ger. Sie singt jeden Tag (time) fantastisch (manner) dort (place).
NOTE:
In West Germanic languages, if there is a pronoun object (it, me, him, them,
etc.) in a phrase, it is put before all adverbs (See Direct and Indirect Object
Pronouns p. 263-274):
Dut. Hij koopt het (pron. obj.) elke zondag (time) goedkoop (manner).
Afr. Hy koop dit (pron. obj.) elke Sondag (time) goedkoop (manner).
197
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Note that in English, when an adjective/adverb contains two or more than two syllables, its
comparative and superlative is formed by using “more/the most” or “less/the least” respectively rather
than adding “-er/-est”. Observe the following:
However, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, no matter now long the word is, one should add -er/-
st(e) to the end of it. For example:
198
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
NOTE:
It is worth mentioning that like in English, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the
comparative and superlative can also be formed by using meer/de (het)
meest - “more/the most” and minder/de (het minst) - “less/the least”, but
this is much rarer than in English.
These Dutch and Afrikaans forms can be used when the word is very long or
hard to pronounce or they can be used with past and present participles used as
adjectives (See Use of “more” and “most” in Dutch and Afrikaans p.
211).
Below is the table that shows comparative constructions of West Germanic languages:
The Comparative
Ich bin (nicht) so groß wie er. Ich bin größer als er. Ich bin weniger groß als er.
Dutch (niet) zo…als -er…dan minder…dan
Ik ben (niet) zo groot als hij. Ik ben groter dan hij. Ik ben minder groot dan hij.
Afrikaans (nie) so…soos (nie) -er…as minder…as
I am (not) as tall as him. I am taller than him. I am less tall than him.
Below is the table that displays superlative constructions of West Germanic languages:
The Superlative
199
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
• It should mentioned that, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, in order to express “the… the…”, the
following construction is used:
For example:
The Hague (Dutch: Den Haag), a Dut. hoe groter hoe beter.
city on the North Sea coast of the
Netherlands, is the capital of the province Afr. hoe groter hoe beter.
of South Holland. It is home to both the
U.N.’s International Court of Justice and - the taller the better.
the International Criminal Court.
• To express “more and more (ever) + comparative”, the following word is used in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans:
immer + comparative steeds + comparative steeds / al hoe + more and more (ever)
comparative
German
In German, the superlative of the adverb differs from that of the adjective. It is formed as follows:
am… -sten
200
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
For example:
If the article “the” can’t be omitted, it is the superlative of the adjective and thus the definite
article der/die/das and the ending -st(e) must be used. Compare two sentences:
NOTE:
In German, however, the am … -sten form is often used as the superlative of
the adjective, as well as of the adverb, for example:
Dutch
In Dutch, in the superlative of the adverb either the ending -st or -ste can be used, without any
difference in meaning. However, in the spoken language, the ending -ste is more often used.
Also, the superlative of the adverb is always preceded by the neuter article het, unlike in English
where this is optional:
het… -st(e)
For example:
Remember that when the superlative is used as a noun, it gets the ending -ste and is preceded by
the definite article de or het. Compare two phrases:
201
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, in the superlative of the adverb is formed by adding the ending -ste. Note that the
superlative of the adverb is always preceded by the article die, unlike in English where this is optional:
die… -ste
For example:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, there are spelling changes while adding the comparative and
superlative suffixes -er/-st(e).
German:
1. When adding the suffix -er, such vowels of the adjective as a, o or u are usually umlauted (ä, ö, ü):
German English
NOTE:
In German, however, adjectives that contain au do not umlaut. Observe the
following:
202
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
German English
2. Below is a list of some common adjectives that do not umlaut in spite of having an umlautable vowel in
German:
German English
German English
203

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
4. Adjectives that end in unstressed -el and -er drop e before adding the -er ending to form the
comparative. For example:
German English
5. When an adjective ends in -d/t or -s/-ß/sch/-x/-z, one must insert an e before adding -st(e) to form
the superlative. Study the following:
German English
NOTE:
It is worth noting that in German the same applies to the adjective neu - “new”,
for example:
German English
Dutch:
Many adjectives and adverbs require spelling changes while adding the comparative and
superlative endings -er/-st(e) in Dutch. Below, we will consider all the exceptions and spelling rules:
Comparative forms
• If an adjective ends in -r, one must insert -d- before adding -er to form the comparative:
Dutch English
204
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Dutch English
• Adjectives containing long vowels (aa, ee, oo), drop one vowel letter in order to keep the single vowel
in open syllable and add the suffix -er:
Dutch English
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and ending in -f, double the -f and add -er. Note that -f must be
doubled to preserve the short vowel in the preceding syllable:
Dutch English
NOTE:
If adjectives contain a long vowel or diphthong, or if a consonant precedes the
-f, the -f becomes -v and -er is added:
205
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Dutch English
• In Dutch, adjectives containing a short vowel and ending in -g, double the final -g in order to preserve
the short vowel and add -er:
Dutch English
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and ending in a single consonant d, double this consonant to
preserve a short vowel in a closed syllable and add -er:
Dutch English
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and end in a single consonant s, double this consonant to preserve a
short vowel in a closed syllable and add -er:
Afrikaans English
• Adjectives ending in a consonant + -d, add the ending -er without any spelling changes:
Dutch English
206

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Dutch English
Superlative forms
• When the adjective ends in -s or -sch, one should just add -t(e) to the superlative but these forms are
quite rarely used, and the form with de/het meest/minst (the most/least) are preferred:
Dutch English
Afrikaans:
In Afrikaans, many adjectives also require spelling changes while taking the endings -er/-ste.
Below, we will consider these spelling changes:
Comparative forms
• Like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, if an adjective ends in -r, one must insert -d- before adding -er to form the
comparative:
Afrikaans English
207

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Afrikaans English
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and ending in -f, change the -f to -w and add -er. Note that -w must
be doubled to preserve the short vowel in the preceding syllable:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
If adjectives contain a long vowel or diphthong, or a consonant precedes the -f,
the same spelling changes apply but only one -w is added:
Afrikaans English
• Adjectives containing a long vowel or diphthong plus the consonants g, drop the consonant g and add
-er. Note that a diaeresis is also added to the ending (-ër) where necessary to preserve the distinction
between syllables:
Afrikaans English
208
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
• In Afrikaans, if an adjective contains a short vowel, either insert -t- or double the final -g in order to
preserve the short vowel and add -er:
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
Adjectives that end in -ig are polysyllabic. Thus, they always add -er without
dropping or doubling the -g. Study the following:
Afrikaans English
Also, adjectives that end in -ng add -er without any spelling changes:
Afrikaans English
• Adjectives ending in a consonant + -d, add the ending -er without any spelling changes:
Afrikaans English
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and end in a single consonant d, double this consonant to preserve a
short vowel in a closed syllable and add -er:
209
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
However, adjectives containing a long vowel or diphthong, drop the consonant
d and add -er. A diaeresis (-ër) is also added where necessary to preserve the
distinction between syllables:
Afrikaans English
Exception
• Adjectives containing a short vowel and end in a single consonant s, double this consonant to preserve a
short vowel in a closed syllable and add -er:
Afrikaans English
• Historically, adjectives which ended in -st, but now end in -s, insert -t- and add -er:
Afrikaans English
Afrikaans English
210
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Afrikaans English
Superlative forms
• Note that the addition of the suffix -ste to form the superlative causes no changes in spelling and there
are no exceptions to the rule. Unlike in Dutch, in Afrikaans, even when an adjective already ends in -s,
the -s is doubled when -ste is added, for example:
Afrikaans English
Dutch:
Like in English, in Dutch, the comparative and superlative may also be formed by using the
following comparative and superlative forms:
Dutch English
meer more
Note that in Dutch these forms are used much rarer than in English. They are used in the
following ways:
• When the word would become very long, or when it would become quite hard to pronounce (especially
in the superlative), for example:
In Dutch, however, the comparative and superlative suffixes -er/-st(e) are more preferred:
211

CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
NOTE:
In Dutch, the use of repetitive comparative and superlative forms also happen
in colloquial speech:
• A certain number of strong past participles used as adjective may also form the comparative and
superlative with meer and de/het meest (See The Past Participle as an Adjective p. 169):
Dutch English
meer verlaten - de/het meest verlaten more abandoned - the most abandoned
• Adjectives formed from weak past participles can also be used with meer and meest:
Dutch English
• Adjectives formed from present participles ending in -end may also be used with meer and die meest
(See The Present Participle as an Adjective p. 167):
Dutch English
For example:
212
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Afrikaans:
Like in English and Dutch, In Afrikaans, the comparative and superlative can also be formed by
using the following comparative and superlative forms:
Afrikaans English
meer more
However, in Afrikaans these forms are used more frequently than in Dutch.
• Polysyllabic adjectives that end in -e form their comparative and superlative with meer and mees, for
example:
Afrikaans English
meer tevrede - die mees tevrede more satisfied - the most satisfied
meer beskeie - die mees beskeie more humble - the most humble
meer verleë - die mees verleë more shy - the most shy
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, comparative and superlative suffixes -ner/-nste are also
commonly used with these adjectives:
• A certain number of strong past participles used as adjective also form their comparative and
superlative with meer and mees, for instance:
Afrikaans English
meer verlate - die mees verlate more deserted - the most deserted
NOTE:
It should be said that comparative and superlative suffixes -ner/-nste are also
occasionally used with these adjectives in Afrikaans:
213
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
• Adjectives formed from weak past participles are also used with meer and mees, but they can never
take the endings -(n)er and -(n)ste:
Afrikaans English
meer geïllustreerd(e) - die mees geïllustreerd(e) more illustrated - the most illustrated
NOTE:
The exception is the adjective gewild - “wanted” which always takes -ste in the
superlative:
• Adjectives formed from present participles ending in -end are usually used with meer and die mees
(See The Present Participle as an Adjective p. 167):
Afrikaans English
meer winsgewend(e) - die mees winsgewend(e) more profitable - the most profitable
For example:
• It is worth mentioning that if adjectives consist of two or more syllables, you are likely to hear them used
with meer and mees, while grammar requires the use of -er/-ste.
Afrikaans English
214
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
Afrikaans English
NOTE:
The adverb onlangs - “recently”, however, always forms its comparative and
superlative with meer and mees:
There are some adjectives and adverbs which have irregular forms for the comparative and
superlative. Below is the table presenting the most common of them:
215
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
NOTE:
In German, the adjective nah - “close”, and the adverb hoch - “high” have
irregular forms:
Forms German English
In Afrikaans, the adjective nuut - “new” is also irregular. Study the following:
Forms Afrikaans English
Note that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the adverbs Ger. gern, Dut. and Afr. graag are used
as follows:
216
CHAPTER 3: ADVERBS
- Which musical instrument do you like playing most? (lit. most gladly).
217
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
1. The definite article the is normally used to identify a certain person or thing: I’m going to the
cinema.
2. The indefinite article a or an is usually used to indicate something unfamiliar or unspecific: He has a
car.
3. The partitive articles some or any (or no word) are used while talking about quantities or amounts:
We have some milk.
West Germanic languages have two articles, the definite and the indefinite. Unlike in English and
Afrikaans, the articles in German and Dutch languages vary according to the gender of the noun they
modify.
For example, the articles can be masculine, feminine (in German), or common gender (in Dutch),
neuter (German and Dutch) and plural forms (in all the West Germanic languages) - the complete
paradigms are shown below.
Below is the table demonstrating the forms of the definite and indefinite articles in West
Germanic languages.
Singular
218
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Plural
Indefinite* — — — —
* Note that, as in English, there is no plural indefinite articles in other West Germanic languages.
NOTE:
German
In German, articles are also declined according to the case of their nouns. (See
Case p. 112 and Article Declension in German p. 234).
Dutch
In Dutch, de is used as the singular definite article with over two-thirds of
Dutch nouns, which are of “common” gender, including masculine and feminine
genders. Het is the singular definite article used with the remaining nouns. It is
neuter in gender.
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, grammatical gender of articles has died out, just as it has in
English. The definite article for all nouns is die - “the”.
Singular Definite
Singular Indefinite
219
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Plural Definite
Plural Indefinite
— — — —
It should be noted that the gender of nouns in German and Dutch must be learned by memorizing
the definite articles with the noun.
NOTE:
In Dutch, the unstressed form of het is ’t. It is used mainly in informal writing,
for example:
Singular
German Die Stadt (fem.) ist groß Eine Stadt (fem.) ist groß
220
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the indefinite article 'n is never capitalized. When it occurs at the
beginning of a phrase the first letter of the next word must capitalized instead.
It should also be noted that the indefinite article ’n is widely pronounced as [ə]
in Afrikaans.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, articles are used similarly to the English articles. In general
terms, the article in West Germanic languages has common ways of use.
NOTE:
In German, if followed by a noun ein also takes all the above endings. The
distinction in meaning between ‘one’ and ‘a/an’ is usually made by stressing the
former.
The ending is decided by the gender and case of the noun (See Case in
German p. 112). Compare the following:
Ger. Ich habe nur eine (stressed) Tochter. -> Ich habe eine Tochter.
In Dutch, when the word een is used as a numeral meaning "one", it is stressed
and spelled as één.
In Afrikaans, however, the numeral “one” and the indefinite article “a/an” have
different forms. The numeral “one” is een and the indefinite article is 'n.
• It is used to refer to someone or something not yet known or not specifically identified:
221
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
– This is a book.
• The definite article is put before a noun which is used to refer to an entire category of people or things in
general:
222
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
• It is used with a variety of abstract nouns when they have a general use:
• It is used to refer to an object that became certain as it had been mentioned earlier:
223

CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
• It is used before a noun that has a definition specifying the object being discussed:
• It is used for any noun that refers to a general idea, practice or phenomenon. This includes colours,
diseases, fields of activity and meals:
For instance:
224
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
• It is used before names of towns, countries or regions when they are preceded/qualified by an adjective:
• It is used instead of the possessive adjective with parts of the body when preceded by a preposition:
vor dem Abendessen voor het avondeten voor die aandete before dinner
225
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
NOTE:
In German, the names of a few countries also add the definite article. Study the
following:
German English
Remember to use the appropriate case of the definite article where a preposition
is used (See Case p. 112 and Article Declension in German p. 234):
In Dutch and Afrikaans, there are a few countries that are also preceded by the
definite article. However, such cases correspond with English usage:
• It is used in numerous adverbial expressions and idioms together with prepositions in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans where the article is not required in English.
Below is a table presenting some frequently used adverbial expressions and idioms:
226
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
bei der Arbeit aan/op het werk by/op die werk at work
aus der Mode uit de mode uit die mode out of fashion
aus dem Deutschen uit het Duits vertalen uit die Duits vertaal to translate from
übersetzen German
ins Niederländische naar het Nederlands in die Nederlands to translate into Dutch
übersetzen vertalen vertaal
an die Macht kommen aan de macht komen aan die bewind kom to come to power
das nächste Mal de volgende keer die volgende keer next time
For instance:
– He is at work now.
227

CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
For example:
NOTE:
It should be mentioned that it is never wrong to use the indefinite article in this
case:
However, the indefinite article must always be used when the profession, nationality and religion
is preceded/modified by an adjective:
- He is a famous teacher.
228
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Es ist Viertel vor/nach Het is kwart voor/over Dit is kwart voor/oor It is a quarter to /past
vier vier vier four
als als as as
- He works as a waiter.
NOTE:
In English it is common to begin a sentence with “as a + profession”. However,
in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, it is best to omit the article in such cases:
4. The indefinite article is omitted if there is a numeral or pronoun put before a noun.
229
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
5. Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, the definite article is omitted with post-positioned toe -
“to”. Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, zum is the contracted form of the preposition zu - “to” and the
definite article dem (masculine, dative) (See also Contraction of
Prepositions and Articles in German p. 238)
6. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the indefinite article is not required before nouns in apposition:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, it is not incorrect to use the
indefinite article before nouns in apposition. To compare:
230
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
7. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the definite article is usually omitted in a few prepositional phrases
where the English equivalents require it:
8. The definite article is also omitted in a certain number of expression consisting of a noun and a verb in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
Mitglied sein (+gen.) lid zijn van lid wees van to be a member of
For instance:
9. Note that unlike in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the indefinite article can be omitted
before such numbers as:
231

CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
1. The definite article in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is also omitted before names of musical
instruments:
2. The definite article in West Germanic languages is usually omitted before names of cities and towns:
However, the definite article must be used when the names of cities and towns are modified by an
adjective. Note that in German and Dutch, the neuter definite article Ger. das, Dut. het is used in this
case:
232
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
NOTE:
In German, the feminine definite article die and in Dutch the common (masc.
and fem.) definite article de is used if we add the word Ger. Stadt, Dut. stad -
“city” to the above sentence. To compare:
3. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the definite article is usually omitted before names of languages after
the verbs Ger. sprechen, Dut. spreken, Afr. praat - “to speak”:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the definite article is also omitted before
names of sciences after the verbs Ger. studieren, Dut. studeren, Afr. studeer
- “to learn”:
It should be mentioned that unlike in German and Afrikaans, in Dutch, the definite article Dut.
het must be used in names of languages after the preposition Dut. in - “in”. Compare the following:
- It is written in Afrikaans.
233
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
4. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the definite article is usually omitted in certain adverbial phrases. In
English, however, the definite article is required in such adverbial phrases:
in kurzer Zeit, kurzfristig op korte termijn op kort termyn in the short time
Anfang letzten Monats begin vorige maand begin verlede maand at the beginning of last
month
Ende letzten Jahres eind vorig jaar einde verlede jaar at the end of last year
5. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the definite article is normally not used before nouns in apposition:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, it is not incorrect to insert the
definite article before nouns in apposition. To compare:
234
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Unlike in other Germanic languages, in German, the articles change their form to indicate the
gender, number, or case of a noun.
Indefinite Article
Below is the table demonstrating the declension (endings) of inde nite articles in German.
Note that in German the same endings must be used for the following negative indefinite article-
like words and possessive adjectives/determiners (See also Possessive Adjectives p. 288):
German English
mein- my
dein- your
sein- his
unser- our
Ihr- your
Below is the table showing the endings of the possessive adjective mein - “my” in ected like
the inde nite article in German.
235

fi
fi
fl
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
For instance:
NOTE:
In German, when followed by a plural noun the following indefinite pronouns
are also used as determiners and thus must be inflected for case (See also
Indefinite Pronouns p. 352):
German English
alle all
andere other
einige some
mehrere several
viele many
wenige few
verschiedene various
Below is the table showing the indefinite pronoun viele - “many” inflected for
case:
Plural
236
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Plural
For instance:
Definite Article
Below is the table demonstrating the declension (endings) of the de nite article in German.
It is worth saying that in German, there are other determiners, also called “der words”, that add
similar endings. They are demonstrative pronouns and relative pronouns (See Demonstrative
pronouns p. 318 and Relative pronouns p. 338).
German English
dies- this/that
welch- which
jed- every
manch- many
solch- such
237

fi
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Below is the table showing the endings of the demonstrative pronoun dies- - “this” inflected
like the definite article in German.
For instance:
Did you know? Ger. Ich wohne in diesem (neut. dat.) Haus.
As you can see from the above tables the German article is more complicated than that of other
Germanic languages.
Before choosing the correct article form, you need to ask yourself firstly if the following noun is
masculine, feminine, neuter or plural and secondly if that noun is the subject (nominative), direct object
(accusative), indirect object (dative) or shows possession (genitive).
In German, definite articles and the most frequently used prepositions can be contracted or
blended. In English, this phenomenon exists in other grammatical forms, for example: do + not = don’t,
does + not = doesn’t, etc.
However, in German, this is only possible when the article is not stressed. The definite articles
that can be contracted are Ger. dem, das and der. All other definite articles are never contracted.
To form such contracted forms in German, we should retain the preposition and add the last
letter of the definite article to it, for example: für + das = fürs, zu + dem = zum, etc.
Note that if prepositions end with -n such as in, an and von, they must be combined with the
definite article dem.
238
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
So, to obtain such forms in German, we omit the -n and change it to an -m, for instance: in +
dem = im, an + dem = am, etc.
German English
NOTE:
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, definite articles and prepositions are
never contracted.
239
CHAPTER 4: ARTICLES
Below are some more examples, which will help us understand when to use a contracted form of a
preposition and a definite article and when not in German. Even though the articles and prepositions are
not contracted in Dutch and Afrikaans, the examples will also be added for the sake of comparison.
In the example 1, in German, the preposition and the definite article are contracted because the
definite article is unstressed.
In the example 2, the preposition and the definite article are not contracted because the definite
article is stressed in order to refer to a particular object in German. Compare the following:
Example 1
Example 2
Ger. Ich würde gerne in dem Büro neben dem Park arbeiten.
- I would like to work in the office (which is) next to the park.
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the definite article is omitted in the adverbial
expression op kantoor - “at the office”.
However, the definite article must be used if we want to refer to a particular
office in Dutch and Afrikaans (See Example 2 above).
From the table and examples above it is clear that German differs from Dutch and Afrikaans in
terms of grammatical system of contraction of the definite article with prepositions.
240
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
A pronoun is a word we use and which serves as a noun when we do not want or need to name
something or someone directly, for instance, I, you, it, him, her.
The following major subclasses of pronouns occur in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
4. demonstrative pronouns (e.g. Ger. dies; Dut. deze; Afr. hierdie - this);
5. relative pronouns (e.g. Ger. der Mann, der…; Dut. de man die…; Afr. die man wat… - the man
who/that);
6. interrogative pronouns (e.g. Ger. wer; Dut. wie; Afr. wie - who);
7. indefinite pronouns (e.g. Ger. jemand; Dut. iemand; Afr. iemand - someone).
Personal Pronouns
There are four types of personal pronouns in Germanic languages:
• subject pronouns (nominative case);
• direct object pronouns (accusative case);
• indirect object pronouns (dative case);
• reflexive pronouns;
Subject (Nominative)
ich ik (‘k) ek I
241

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
er hij (-ie) hy he
ihr jullie (inf.)/u (f.) julle (inf.)/u (f.) you (pl. f.)
242

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Subject Pronouns
Overview
A subject pronoun, such as I, he, we, they, is used to perform the action, which is presented by the
verb.
Generally, subject or personal pronouns replace a subject noun or name, and they can be
classified in several different ways: person (1st , 2nd or 3rd), number (singular or plural), gender (male or
female) and formality (formal or informal) in the West Germanic languages.
Below is the table showing all the forms of subject pronouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
ich ik (’k)* ek I
er hij (-ie)* hy he
243

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
ihr jullie (inf.)/u (f.) julle (inf.)/u (f.) you (pl. f.)
* It should be noted that in Dutch, the pronouns can occur in a stressed form and an unstressed
form, which will be described below.
All unstressed forms except -ie normally replace the vowel with a schwa /ə/ (a short e sound),
and are used in speaking where the emphasis is normally not on the pronoun but on the following verb.
The unstressed forms are shown in brackets in the above table.
Gaat-ie weg?
- Is he leaving?
The unstressed pronouns ’k - I, ’t - it, tend to almost completely merge with the following word,
as in English “twas.”
Although stressed forms and unstressed forms are generally interchangeable, in order to avoid
any confusion or misuse of the unstressed forms, it is advisable to always use the stressed forms, as it is
always correct to use stressed forms, but not always correct to use the unstressed forms, for example:
Dutch English
- ik. - I did.
244
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans and Dutch, there is a stressed variant of Dut. ik, Afr. ek, which is
Dut. ikke, Afr. ekke. It is not common but is sometimes heard in one word
retorts, for example:
Dutch Afrikaans English
- Wie zei dat? - ikke - Wie het dit gesê? - ekke. - Who said that? - I did.
As it is seen in the above example, the pronoun he substitutes the noun Andreas, to which it
refers back. Using the pronoun means that one can avoid repeating the noun.
• It should be noted that in comparatives the subject pronoun must be used in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, never the object pronoun as in colloquial English. Study the following:
• Similar to the above, in English, object pronouns are colloquially used in the following expression, but
in German, Dutch and Afrikaans only subject pronouns must be used:
245
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Remember that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, if a pronoun is expressed in isolation when
responding to a question, we should imagine the unsaid sentence of which it is theoretically part and
use the appropriate case form of the pronoun (nominative, accusative, dative).
Example 2
In the example 1, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the subject pronoun is used in response to a
question. In the example 2, however, the indirect object pronoun is used (See Indirect Object p. 272).
- I am a student.
NOTE:
Remember that the English rule of putting the first person singular “I” last in
246
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
the expression you and I also exists in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
Unlike in English, In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, there are several ways to express you:
Singular Plural
German du ihr
Afrikaans jy julle
The examples above are basically used to address people one knows very well: close friends,
relatives and children, i.e. people whom one usually dresses by their first name. Observe the following:
- Are you guys going to the cinema? (more than one person)
247

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
The Flemish people often use ge (unstressed) or gij (stressed) instead of je/jij.
In Holland, however, this form is not used anymore.
German Sie (naturally 2nd person plural, but grammatically 3rd person plural)
NOTE:
In German, Sie - “you" (polite) is derived from sie - “they” it is capitalized to
distinguish it from sie in writing.
These pronouns are used to address older people, strangers, acquaintances, people whom one
does not know very well or has never met before, or to show a relationship that is polite and respectful.
For instance:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, it is common these days to use the informal pronoun jy to a
stranger while addressing the person with Meneer or Mevrou:
Unlike in Afrikaans, in German and Dutch, the formal pronoun Ger. Sie, Dut. u
would be required here.
248
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• In Dutch and Afrikaans, the second plural u is considered to be very formal and is rarely used (in
particularly formal situations, e.g. when addressing a crowd of people). The informal Dut. jullie and
Afr. julle are more commonly used (instead of the formal u).
Remember that in Dutch and Afrikaans, u is normally written in lowercase. U (with a capital
letter) is too formal and not very common anymore.
NOTE:
Unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German, the second person plural Ger. Sie -
“you” (polite) is very common and is widely used in this case.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, even though it is never written, a compromise form between julle
and u is u-hulle:
In German, it is important to notice the distinction between the capitalized Sie, which are formal
“you”, and sie which mean “she” and “they”.
Also, it should be noted that German capitalized Sie always take the 3rd person plural form of the
verb, even though it is placed in the 2nd person in the table above. For instance:
249
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• It is worth saying that as an English speaker you may find it difficult to judge when the appropriate time
has come for you to change from the formal Sie to the familiar form du in German and from the formal
u to the familiar jij in Dutch and jy in Afrikaans.
So it is advisable to translate English “you” by Ger. Sie and Dut. u when addressing strangers and
acquaintances rather than using the familiar second person pronouns Ger. du, ihr and Dut. jij, jullie.
It is considered as the polite or non-familiar form of address. Leave it up to the German and
Dutch to make the move, especially if she or he is older than you. For example:
Ger. Was möchten Sie trinken, Herr Müller? - Bitte, nenn mich Ben.
- What would you like to drink, Mr. Müller? - Please call me Bill.
7. Since inanimate things have 3 genders (masculine, feminine and neuter) in German and 2 genders
(common, which includes masculine and feminine and neuter) in Dutch, the 3rd person singular
pronouns Ger. er -“he”, sie -“she”, es -“it” are used when relating back to a masculine, feminine and
neuter noun respectively; and Dut. het -“it” must be used for neuter nouns and hij -“he” for all others,
even though in English, the rule states that inanimate objects are not usually personalized and used
with the pronouns “he or “she”. In this case an English speaker would use the pronoun “it”.
NOTE:
Afrikaans
Unlike in German and Dutch, and just like in English, in Afrikaans, as there is
no longer any distinction in the gender of nouns, one would use the pronoun dit
- “it” when referring to all inanimate nouns.
Below is the table showing the 3rd person singular pronouns used with inanimate nouns in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
German er - “he” (with masc. gender nouns), sie - “she” (with fem. gender nouns), es - “it” (with neut.
gender nouns)
Dutch hij - “he” (with common gender nouns, which includes masc. and fem. nouns), het - “it” (with
neut. gender nouns)
Afrikaans dit - “it” (with all the nouns)
250
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
8. Despite the rule presented above saying that pronouns Ger. er, sie or es; and Dut. het or hij used to
substitute an inanimate noun usually agree in gender with that inanimate noun in German and Dutch,
the pronouns Ger. es and Dut. het must be used when:
• the verb that follows is Ger. sein and Dut. zijn - “to be” and
• the predicate of the clause (i.e. the part which follows the verb) includes a noun or an adjective used as a
noun. Observe the following:
Ger. Er hat einen Computer gekauft. Es ist ein neuer Computer. Es ist ein neuer.
Dut. Hij heeft een computer gekocht. Het is een nieuwe computer. Het is een nieuwe.
However, if the predicate of the clause contains only an adjective, then Ger. er, sie or es and Dut.
het or hij must be used, depending on the gender of the noun to which these pronouns refer. For
example:
251

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
Just like in English, in Afrikaans, in both cases, the 3rd person singular pronoun
Afr. dit - “it” is used. Study the following examples:
Afr. Hy het 'n rekenaar gekoop. Dit is 'n nuwe rekenaar. Dit is 'n nuwe een.
9. But further still, the use of the 3rd person singular pronouns Ger. es and Dut. het is not limited to the
above in German and Dutch. They are also used:
• with reference to plural antecedents and being followed by a plural form of the verb Ger. sein; Dut.
zijn - to be.
Ger. Sie mieten zwei Häuser in Berlin. Es sind sehr teuere Häuser.
Dut. Ze huren twee huizen in Berlijn. Het zijn hele dure huizen.
Afr. Hulle huur twee huise in Berlyn. Hulle is baie duur huise.
- They rent two houses in Berlin. They are quite expensive houses.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans and English, as you can see the 3rd person plural pronoun Afr.
hulle - “they” is used in this case.
Remember that if the predicate of the clause contains only an adjective (without a noun), then
just like in Afrikaans and English the 3rd person plural Ger. sie, Dut. zij (ze), Afr. hulle - “they” must be
used along with the plural form of the verb Ger. sein; Dut. zijn - “to be” in German and Dutch. Study the
following:
• The 3rd person singular pronouns Ger. es and Dut. het are used in the introductory phrase meaning “it
is” or “they are” when the object(s) or person(s) have not been specifically named as yet, for example:
252
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- It is my car.
Similarly, Ger. dies/das, Dut. dit/dat - “this/that/these/those" can also be used in this case
(See also Demonstrative Adjectives and Pronouns p. 313).
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the 3rd person singular Afr. dit - “it” is still used in this case.
In West Germanic languages, the 3rd person single pronouns Ger. er, sie, Dut. hij, zij, Afr. hy,
sy - “he”, “she” are used with animate masculine and feminine nouns (people, animals) respectively.
In this case the use of the 3rd person singular neuter noun Eng. it; Ger. es; Dut. het, Afr. dit
instead of the 3rd person masculine and feminine is optional. However, the use of Ger. er, sie; Dut. hij,
zij, Afr. hy, sy is more usual.
Below is the table showing the 3rd person singular pronouns used with animate nouns in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
German er - “he” (with masc. nouns), sie - “she” (with fem. nouns), es - “it” (optional with masc. and
fem. nouns)
Dutch hij - “he” (with masc. nouns), zij - “she” (with fem. nouns), het - “it” (optional with masc. and
fem. nouns)
Afrikaans hy - “he” (with masc. nouns), zy - “she” (with fem. nouns), dit - “it” (optional with masc. and
fem. nouns)
253
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Ger. Mein Freund ist Professor. Er/Es ist ein intelligenter Mann;
Those who learn or know one or several Romance languages (Spanish, French etc.) this use of
Ger. es, Dut. het, Afr. dit - “it” presented here is identical to that of Sp. es; Fr. ce (c’est) versus Sp. él/ella;
Fr. il/elle.
C. With Expressions Relating to the Weather and to Time (See also Dates p. 662 and Time
p. 668):
The 3rd person singular neuter pronouns Ger. es, Dut. het and Afr. dit - “it” are also used in time
and weather expressions, for example:
Dortmund is known for its Westfalen Dut. Het is erg heet vandaag.
Stadium, the largest football stadium in
Germany. It is home to the sports club Borussia Afr. Dit is baie warm vandag.
Dortmund, which is considered one of the most
- It is very hot today.
successful clubs in German football history.
- It is five o’clock.
Impersonal Pronoun Ger. Man, Dut. Men, Afr. (’n) Mens - “One”
Overview
In West Germanic languages, Ger. man, Dut. men, Afr. (’n) mens - “one” is an impersonal,
indefinite pronoun that carries a generic meaning corresponding to people in general. It is a 3rd person
singular pronoun, however it is sometimes used with the 1st or 2nd person reference.
Note that in German, and especially in Dutch and Afrikaans, it is a rather formal form. However,
it is still a more common every day word than its English equivalent “one”.
254
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below is the table showing the 3rd person singular impersonal pronoun in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans:
NOTE:
In German, do not confuse the impersonal pronoun “man” with the noun
“Mann”, which stands for an adult male.
The impersonal pronoun Ger. man; Dut. men, Afr. mens - “one” is used:
1. Ger. man; Dut. men, Afr. (’n) mens - “one” is mainly used as the subject of a verb. It occurs mostly in
general statements referring to any person, not to any specified person. Observe the following:
2. The pronoun Ger. man; Dut. men, Afr. (’n) mens may be used to render “you” but it does not directly
refer to the person you are talking to. For example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, if in the same sentence the impersonal pronoun (’n) mens - “one”
is used a second time as a subject pronoun, the personal pronoun jy is then
used, not (’n) mens, for example:
255
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Compare the following phrase that is directly addressed to someone (See also Alternative to
Ger. Man, Dut. Men, Afr. (’n) Mens - “One” p. 260):
3. Ger. man; Dut. men, Afr. (’n) mens can also be used as “they” when it is not clear who “they” are.
Study the following:
Like in English, in Dutch, impersonal pronouns Dut. men - “one” do not change its form in the
direct object (accusative) position.
In German and Afrikaans, however, the impersonal pronoun Ger. man and Afr. (’n) mens
becomes Ger. einen and Afr. jou respectively in the direct object (accusative) (See Case in German p.
112 and Direct Object p. 263).
Below is the table showing the change of the impersonal pronoun Ger. man and Afr. (’n)
mens in the direct object (accusative) in German and Afrikaans.
German Afrikaans
256

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the pronoun Ger. jemanden, Dut. and Afr.
iemand - “someone” can be used in this case:
Just like in the direct object, English and Dutch impersonal pronouns Dut. men - “one” keep
their forms in the indirect object position.
Note that German and Afrikaans impersonal pronouns Ger. man and Afr. (’n) mens become
Ger. einem and Afr. jou respectively in the indirect object (dative) (See Case in German p. 112 and
Indirect Object p. 272).
Below is the table showing the change of the impersonal pronoun Ger. man and Afr. (’n)
mens in the indirect object (dative) in German and Afrikaans.
German Afrikaans
Ger. Diese Arbeit gibt einem die Chance, erfolgreich zu sein. (dative)
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the pronoun Ger. jemandem, Dut. and Afr.
iemand - “someone” can also be used in this case:
257
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In English, the impersonal pronoun one also has a possessive (genitive form) one’s (e.g. One’s
hat). German, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, do not have a possessive form for Ger. man; Dut. men,
Afr. (’n) mens.
Instead, the possessive pronouns Ger. sein and Dut. zijn - “his” and Afr. jou - “your” is used to
form the possessive form (genitive). (See Case in German p. 112 and Possessive Adjectives and
Pronouns p. 288).
Below is the table showing the possessive form (genitive) of the impersonal pronoun Ger.
man, Dut. men, and Afr. (’n) mens in German, Dutch and Afrikaans respectively.
For instance:
Ger. Wenn man ein Theater besucht, muss man seinen Mantel ausziehen.
Dut. Wanneer men een theater bezoekt, moet men zijn jas uittrekken.
Afr. Wanneer 'n mens 'n teater besoek, moet jy jou jas uittrek.
NOTE:
In German, the possessive pronoun Ger. sein must be declined.
The table below shows the declension of sein:
German
258
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the pronouns Ger. du, Dut. je and Afr. jy -
“you” could also be used in this case.
(See Alternative to Ger. Man, Dut. Men, Afr. (’n) Mens - “One” p. 260):
The impersonal pronoun Ger. man; Dut. men, Afr. (’n) mens - “one” also has a reflexive form,
which is Ger. sich, Dut. zich - “himself/herself/itself/oneself” (the same as that of the 3rd person
singular pronoun), and Afr. jou - “yourself” (the 2nd person singular pronoun) (See Reflexive
Pronouns p. 276)
The table below illustrates the reflexive form of the impersonal pronoun Ger. man, Dut. men,
and Afr. (’n) mens in German, Dutch and Afrikaans respectively.
Reflexive Form sich (himself, herself, zich (himself, herself, jou (yourself)
itself, oneself) itself, oneself)
For example:
Dut. Men stelt zich voor dat men aan het meer woont.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, we could also use the pronouns Ger. du, Dut.
je, Afr. jy to mean “you” instead of “one” in this case.
(See Alternative to Ger. Man, Dut. Men, Afr. (’n) Mens - “One” p. 260):
259
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Remember that spoken English prefers to use the generic “you” instead of “one”, because “one” is
considered to be very formal and is confined to formal written language.
Colloquially German, Dutch and Afrikaans can also use Ger. du/Sie, Dut. jij (je)/u, Afr. jy/u -
“you” in the same way:
• Generic They:
It is also possible to use the generic Ger. sie; Dut. ze, Afr. hulle - “they” in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans respectively. To illustrate:
• Other Alternatives:
You can equally use other alternatives that could be used to avoid the use of the generic Ger.
man, Dut. men, Afr. (’n) mens - “one” in contexts where it seems over-formal. These alternatives
include the use of:
260

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
For Instance:
However, this is not possible in West Germanic languages. English, German, Dutch and Afrikaans
are generally considered to be non-pro-drop languages, which means that they do not allow deletion of
the subject pronoun.
NOTE:
Colloquial and dialectal German, unlike the standard language, is partially pro-
drop. It allows deletion of the subject pronoun in main clauses.
Nonetheless, like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the subject pronoun can be
dropped in the following cases:
• Fixed Expressions:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the subject omission is allowed in a number of fixed
expressions. For example:
261
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- No worries/Never mind.
If the imperative is used for the 2nd person singular, or the 2nd person plural, the subject is
usually omitted because the conjugated verb implies the subject of the sentence.
- Come here!
NOTE:
In German, the formal imperative, requires the addition of the subject pronoun
Ger. Sie because the formal imperative form of a verb is identical to the
infinitive (See The Infinitive p. 578).
In Dutch, if the situation is formal, the subject pronoun Dut. u is used and the
verb is used in the 3rd person singular. Study the following:
• Conversational Deletion:
In English, German and Dutch, the subject pronoun may be omitted in intimate conversational
spoken language, set phrases, as well as in other informal communication systems such as email and
texting that can work like speech. This phenomenon is called “Conversational deletion”.
In general the 1st or 2nd person subject in statements or in questions may be omitted. Note that
subject pronouns may be dropped together with the auxiliary verb (like in the 1st example in English), or
other verbs (like in the 2nd example) for instance:
262
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- (I have) no idea.
NOTE:
Remember that it is not formal written style. For example, if you write an
official letter, you should always write in full sentences including the subject
pronoun and the verb.
Moreover, since West Germanic languages are non-pro-drop languages, the
omission of the subject pronouns would be ambiguous to have a proper
conversation.
In English, Dutch and Afrikaans, object pronouns (e.g. Dut. mij/me, Afr. my, Ger. mich - “me”)
are expressed by the accusative case and function as the direct objects in a sentence.
Below is the table that shows all the forms of direct object (accusative) pronouns in English,
Dutch, Afrikaans and German:
263
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Just like personal subject pronouns are used instead of subject nouns in sentences, direct object
pronouns (accusative case pronouns) replace the direct object noun in a sentence, which is a thing or a
person:
The noun Ger. Bücher, Dut. boeken, Afr. boeke - “books” receives the action of Ger. Wir
lesen, Dut. We lezen, Afr. Ons lees - “we’re reading”.
In this sentence, Ger. Bücher, Dut. boeken, Afr. boeke - “books” are the direct object. They are
the 3rd person plural, and therefore, we can replace them with the direct object pronouns (accusative case
pronoun) Ger. sie, Dut. ze, Afr. hulle - “them”.
As we said, the direct object of a sentence can be a person as well. Study the following examples:
264
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
1. We use them to substitute nouns when it is clear what or who is being discussed, and also to avoid the
repetition of the noun. Note that direct object pronouns go after the main verb in a sentence.
Dut. Klaus leest een krant. Hij leest haar (or die).
2. Ger. es, Dut. het, Afr. dit - “it” are sometimes used to replace the entire information or idea that has
already been presented.
Ger. Sie hat ein neues Kleid gekauft. - Ich weiß es.
However, in Dutch, there are some divergent peculiarities in direct object pronouns use that need
to be learnt and memorized. We will discuss these peculiarities below:
They are also used in speaking or less formal writing for special emphasis or contrast on the
person or to stress familiarity, e.g.:
265

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
4. All unstressed forms are usually used in speaking where the emphasis is normally not on the pronoun
but on the following verb. The unstressed forms are shown in brackets in the above table.
• The unstressed pronouns ’m - “him”, d’r - “her”, ’t - “it”, tend to almost completely merge with the
following word, as in English “twas.” Study the following:
NOTE:
In Dutch speaking Belgium, the unstressed form d’r is usually not used. Ze
(when referring to a person) is heard more often instead. However, this is not
considered standard language.
5. Note that the object pronoun het - “it” cannot be used after prepositions because there are no
construction corresponding to “of it”, “for it”, “on it”.
For example, we can see such constructions as van het - “of the”, op het - “on the” or voor het
- “for the” only when the het is an article, not when it is a pronoun.
Instead, the word er is put before the preposition. It can replace singular and plural direct objects
(See also Prepositions p. 676):
Below is the table showing the change of the object pronoun Dut. het when used after the
prepositions in Dutch:
Dutch
266
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Dutch
For example:
Dut. Wat betaal je voor het huis. —> Wat betaal je ervoor?
- What do you pay for the house. —> What do you pay for it?
6. The object pronouns hen and hun - “them” are the stressed forms and can only refer to people. The
object pronoun die - “them”, however, can refer to anything other than people in Dutch.
• Remember that hen is used as a direct object and after prepositions, while hun is used as an indirect
object. However, nowadays, hen is used much less in spoken Dutch. Compare the following:
- I see them.
Dut. Ze geeft de boeken aan hen. (hen is used after the preposition).
267

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In more familiar speech, the unstressed ze can be used in all these cases. Study
the following:
Ik zie ze.
- I see them.
7. When the object pronouns in the third person singular are stressed, die - “him/her” is often used.
Compare the following:
The object pronoun die can also be used to designate inanimate objects that have the common
gender instead of haar - “her” and hem - “him”. Study the following:
• As it was said earlier the direct object is usually put after a verb:
- I know him.
• In the perfect tense, which is formed with verbs Ger. haben, Dut. hebben, Afr. hê - “have" and the
past participle, English direct object pronoun is put after have and the past participle of the verb.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, the direct object pronoun goes after Ger. haben, Dut.
hebben, Afr. hê and before the past participle (See The Present Perfect p. 467):
268
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• The direct object pronoun can also be used with adverbs of time in order to emphasize when the action
happened. In this case, the adverb of time is put after the direct object pronoun and before the past
participle (See Adverbs p. 180 and Word Order with Adverbs p. 194):
• In West Germanic languages, you put the direct object pronouns after affirmative commands. In
negative commands, you place it after the negative word and the main verb in English. In German and
Dutch, you should put the direct object pronoun after the main verb and before the negative word (See
The Negative Imperative p. 592):
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, to form negative commands, you must add the word moenie to
the command and then added nie at the end of the sentence.
The direct object pronoun is placed after the word moenie and before the main
verb in this case:
269
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• When a verb is followed by another verb in the infinitive (the “to” form), the direct object pronoun is put
after the infinitive in English, for example:
However, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the direct object pronoun is placed after the first verb
and before the infinitive. Observe the same example:
• In questions, the direct object pronoun is put after the auxiliary verb and the main verb in English.
Although in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the direct object pronoun must be placed after the auxiliary
verb and before the main verb (See Asking Questions p. 514):
The direct object pronouns take the same position in questions introduced by such interrogative
words as:
For instance:
270

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• After subordinating conjunctions the direct object pronoun is put after the verb in the subordinate
clause in English. However, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the direct object pronoun precedes the
main verb because the main verb goes to the end of the subordinate clause. (See Subordinating
Conjunctions p. 756)
Below are some commonly used subordinating conjunctions in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
For example:
271

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Remember that in English, Dutch and Afrikaans, the object pronouns do not change and are used
as direct objects as well as indirect objects. However, in German, the accusative case pronouns function
only as the direct object. The indirect object is expressed by German dative case pronouns.
Below is the table that shows all the forms of indirect object (dative) pronouns in English,
Dutch, Afrikaans and German:
Sandra is the indirect object, and therefore, we can replace it with the indirect object pronoun
(dative case pronoun) Ger. ihr, Dut. haar, Afr. haar - “her”.
272

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In colloquial Afrikaans, it is common to insert vir before indirect objects.
“He is giving ten dollars to whom? To me”. Therefore, we should use the indirect object pronoun
(or the dative form of the appropriate pronoun in German) Ger. mir, Dut. mij, Afr. my - “me”.
273
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Generally indirect object pronouns follow the same word order rules as direct object pronouns.
(See Word Order of Direct Object Pronouns p. 268)
• When an indirect (dative) noun object and a direct (accusative) object are used in the same sentence
and are next to each other, the indirect (dative) noun comes first:
In the above example, “his mother” is the indirect object and “a letter” is the direct object.
• If one object is a pronoun and the other is a noun, the pronoun usually precedes. Observe the following:
274

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• If the indirect object is preceded by a preposition, it follows the direct object. For example:
• If the direct (accusative) object and indirect (dative) object are both pronouns, the direct object precedes
the indirect object. Study the following:
• In the perfect tense, which is formed with verbs Ger. haben, Dut. hebben, Afr. hê - “have" and the
past participle, German, Dutch and Afrikaans direct and indirect object pronouns must be placed after
Ger. haben, Dut. hebben, Afr. hê and before the past participle:
• The direct and indirect object pronouns can also be used with adverbs of time in order to emphasize
when the action happened. In this case, the adverb of time is put after the indirect object pronoun and
before the past participle (See Adverbs p. 180 and Word Order with Adverbs p. 194):
275
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Reflexive Pronouns
Reflexive pronouns follow the reflexive verbs and agree with the subject in order to indicate that
a person performs the action toward or for himself or herself.
Below is the table that shows all the forms of re exive pronouns in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans:
mich me my myself
As you can see from the above table, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, all forms of reflexive
pronouns are similar to the object (accusative) pronouns except for the 3rd person singular and plural in
German and Dutch where Ger. sich and Dut. zich stand for himself, herself, itself, oneself and
themselves. Observe the following examples:
276

fl
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- I wash (myself).
NOTE:
In English, in the above example “to wash (oneself)” the use of the reflexive
“oneself” is superfluous but obligatory in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
Furthermore, in Dutch and Afrikaans, just like in English, the following verb can be used without
any reflexive pronoun at all (even if the meaning is reflexive), but in German, the use of reflexive pronoun
is still required:
Dut. Ik ga scheren.
- I am going to shave.
Compare, for example, two sentences in these West Germanic languages where one sentence is
reflexive and another is not:
The given examples demonstrate that the verb “to wash myself” is reflexive (used with the
reflexive pronoun) and another “to wash” is not reflexive.
277
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below is the list of some frequently used re exive verbs that are used with a speci c
preposition and the accusative re exive pronouns or nouns after them in German:
German English
sich (acc) auf jdn. (acc) verlassen to depend on sb./to rely on sb.
sich (acc) für jdn./etw. (acc) eignen to suit sb./sth./to be suitable for sth.
sich (acc) für jdn./etw. (acc) entscheiden to decide upon sb./sth. /to opt for sth.
sich (acc) gegen jdn./etw. (acc.) wehren to fight/to defend oneself against sb./sth
sich (acc) über jdn./etw. (acc.) aufregen to get upset about sb./sth.
sich (acc) über jdn./etw. (acc) ärgern to get exasperated with sb./sth.
For example:
278

fl
fl
fi
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- He remembers me.
NOTE:
It is worth mentioning that in German, above-mentioned reflexive verbs can
also be used with accusative nouns instead of pronouns (See also The
Accusative Case p. 125 and Nouns in the Accusative Case p. 133):
Below we will consider the pronominal suffix that can be added to the reflexive pronouns in order
to emphasize the reflexive idea in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
NOTE:
In German, the emphatic form Ger. selbst is use din this case. However, it is not
considered as a pronominal suffix as it is never attached to the personal
pronoun like in Dutch and Afrikaans.
279
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below is the table that shows the forms of reflexive pronouns used with the pronominal suffix
Ger. selbst, Dut. -zelf, Afr. -self:
NOTE:
In German, the emphatic form Ger. selber is used in informal spoken language.
• Note that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, in the third person, the pronominal suffix Ger. selbst, Dut.
-zelf, Afr. -self can also added to the reflexive pronoun to remove any ambiguity, for example:
280
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Furthermore, whenever Dutch and Afrikaans verbs that take a prepositional object reflect back on the
subject, the use of a preposition in such cases requires the use of the reflexive pronoun along with the
pronominal suffixes Dut. -zelf, Afr. -self.
Below is the list of some verbs used with a preposition and the reflexive pronoun with the
pronominal suffix Dut. -zelf, Afr. -self:
- I believe in myself.
NOTE:
In German, unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, the emphatic form Ger. selbst is
only used when a contrast is made between performing the action on someone
else and on yourself. To compare:
Ger. Ich glaube an mich. —> Ich glaube an mich selbst, nicht an ihn.
In English the reflexive form “myself, yourself” etc. is used also to emphasize that one did
something oneself. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the independent form (not attached to the reflexive
pronoun) Ger. selbst, Dut. zelf, Afr. self is used in this case.
NOTE:
Remember that in German, the reflexive form Ger. selbst is always
independent and is never attached to the personal pronoun, for example:
281
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
It is worth mentioning that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when there is a reciprocal meaning,
the pronouns Ger. einander, Dut. elkaar, Afr. mekaar - “each other (one another)” are used:
NOTE:
In German, you can also use the reflexive verbs and pronouns in the plural with
the meaning “each other” (uns, euch, sich).
However, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the words Dut. elkaar, Afr. mekaar - “each
other (one another)” are still used in this case:
282
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In German, when a sentence contains another object besides the reflexive pronoun, then the
reflexive pronoun must be used in the dative case since the other object is in the accusative case. This is
when we use the dative reflexive pronouns instead of the accusative ones.
Below is the table illustrating the accusative and dative forms of re exive pronouns in
German:
German English
Accusative Dative
As you can see, all forms of the dative reflexive pronouns are similar to accusative reflexive
pronouns except for the 1st and the 2nd person singular.
Thus, the 1st and the 2nd person singular accusative reflexive pronouns “mich” and “dich”
become “mir” and “dir” respectively in the dative. Compare the following examples:
- I feel unwell.
283

fl
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
1. If a clause contains a direct (accusative) object, the dative form of the reflexive pronoun is used. The
direct (accusative) object will normally be a body part or item of clothing. Compare the following:
Accusative Dative
Ich wasche mich jeden Morgen. Ich putze mir zweimal am Tag die Zähne.
- I wash (myself) every morning. - I brush my teeth twice a day.
As you can see from the example, we use the dative reflexive mir because the word die Zähne -
the teeth is the accusative direct object and mir is the dative indirect object.
The main difference in the above-mentioned sentences between English and German is that in
English we would use the possessive “my teeth”, while in German the dative reflexive pronoun mir tells
us this information and therefore you should simply use the correct form of the article die Zähne - the
teeth.
Below is the list of several commonly used re exive verbs that are used with a speci c
preposition and the dative pronouns or nouns after them in German:
Geman English
sich (acc) mit etw. (dat) begnügen to content oneself with sth.
284

fl
fi
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Geman English
Remember that in German, in German, all forms of reflexive pronouns (mich, dich, uns, euch)
are similar to the object (accusative) pronouns except for the 3rd person singular and plural Ger. sich -
“himself, herself, itself, oneself and themselves”. For example:
- I am talking to her.
- He is afraid of me.
NOTE:
In German, all of the above-mentioned reflexive verbs can also be used with
dative nouns instead of pronouns (See also The Dative Case p. 121 and
Nouns in the Dative Case p. 131):
- I wash (myself).
285
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• If the same sentence is put in the interrogative, the reflexive pronoun stands after the subject (See
Asking Questions p. 514):
• However, in the case of compound verbs such as perfect tenses or verb + the infinitive etc., the reflexive
pronoun must be put after the infinitive or the past participle in English, and before the infinitive and
the past participle in German, Dutch and Afrikaans (See Reflexive Verbs p. 596).
For example:
Unlike Swiss German, Swiss Standard German Ger. Er hat sich gewaschen.
is fully understandable to all speakers of
Dut. Hij heeft zich gewassen.
Standard German.
Afr.Hy het hom gewas.
• Similarly, if a reflexive verb takes a pronominal object in addition to its reflexive pronoun, that pronoun
is normally placed immediately after the finite verb (finite verb forms show tense, person and number),
whether that finite verb is the reflexive verb itself or a modal verb or an auxiliary verb:
286
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
Remember that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, if the object is the pronoun
Ger. es, Dut. het, Afr. dit, the reflexive can be put after this pronoun:
• Note that negatives cannot be placed between the finite verb and the reflexive pronoun in West
Germanic languages, for example:
• If a reflexive verb is used in a subordinate or relative clause and is put at the end of that clause, the
reflexive pronoun is placed right after the subject as the verb has been removed from second position in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
• Unlike English, reflexive pronouns are can also be used in German, Dutch and Afrikaans after
prepositions when the pronoun “reflects back” to the subject of the sentence, for example:
287
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Possessive adjectives (e.g. English my, your, his, her, etc.) are used to indicate possession and
ownership. For example, “my car”, “his house”.
mein mijn my my
For example:
- This is my house.
Note that unlike in English, Dutch and Afrikaans, all possessive adjectives agree in case, number
and gender with the noun that they modify in German. Observe the following example:
Afr. my sak.
- my bag.
288

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
The word “bag” in German language is feminine, so we need to use possessive adjective which is
also feminine.
The declension of the possessive adjectives are the same as those for the indefinite articles ein.
The plural endings are identical to those of der/die/das articles in German (See Articles p. 218).
Below is a table demonstrating all the types of possessive adjectives that agree in case,
number and gender in German:
German English
289

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German English
Below will be demonstrated how the possessive adjective “my” agrees in case, gender and number
with a noun and how it is used in sentences.
We will take words “dog” (Ger. der Hund), which is masculine, “school” (Ger. die Schule),
which is feminine, “house” (Ger. das Haus) - neuter, and “children” (Ger. die Kinder) - a plural noun in
order to demonstrate the declension in German. Remember that you can replace the possessive pronoun
“my” or nouns used in the example with any other to make up your own phrases.
German
290

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
NOTE:
As it was said before, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the possessive adjectives do not
agree in case, number and gender with nouns, e.g.:
Dutch Afrikaans English
Ger. Wo ist mein (dein, sein, etc.) Hund? (Nominative case, masc.)
Ger. Ich kenne deine (ihre) Schwester nicht. (Accusative case, fem.)
Ger. Ich spiele mit meinem (ihrem) Kind (Dative case, neut.)
291
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Dutch English
Stressed Unstressed
The stressed forms retain the original full vowel, and are usually used in writing. However, they
are also used in speaking or less formal writing for special emphasis.
• Jouw/Je - “your”
For example, in order to to stress that the object is owned by you, we should use the stressed
jouw instead of the unstressed je. To compare:
NOTE:
The unstressed je can be used if the stressed form jullie has already been used
in the sentence in order to avoid two instances of jullie in a row:
292
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Haar/d’r - “her”
Furthermore, in Dutch, the unstressed form d’r is often heard instead of the stressed haar,
particularly in the Netherlands:
Dutch English
Stressed Unstressed
haar d’r her
For example:
NOTE:
In Dutch speaking Belgium, the unstressed form d’r is usually not used. Instead,
the stressed haar is mainly used:
2. The use of ons/onze - “our” depends on the gender of the following noun: ons is used with neuter
singular nouns (het-nouns) and onze is used with common gender nouns (de-nouns), as well as all
plural nouns. Compare the following:
Example 1
Example 2
293
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
Remember that, in Dutch, a plural noun is always a de-noun, regardless of
whether its singular form takes the article de or het. For example:
But:
Dut. de boeken —> onze boeken.
- the books. —> our books.
The examples above show that the neuter singular noun “het huis” becomes
“ons huis”, while its plural form is “onze huizen”.
3. In Dutch, there is no translation for “its”. Instead, the form zijn - “his” is used. In this case, it does not
matter whether the noun is neuter (het-noun), or common (de-noun). Study the following:
Example 1
Example 2
Adjectives that modify a noun require an adjective ending when they are preceded by a possessive
adjective in Dutch.
A neuter singular noun preceded by a possessive has a modifying adjective with an ending -e.
Study the following:
294
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Remember that the possessive adjective ons has no ending when it precedes a neuter singular
noun with modifying adjective:
Like personal pronouns, possessive pronouns have gender-based contrasts (masculine, feminine
or non-personal) in the 3rd person singular.
Below is a table presenting possessive pronouns in Dutch and Afrikaans and nominative
masculine possessive pronouns in German:
For instance:
295

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
As it is seen from the above example, the first sentence contains the possessive adjective “my” as
it is used in front of a noun to show possession: “my coffee”. In the second sentence the possessive
pronoun “mine” is used as unlike possessive adjective “my”, it does not proceed the noun “coffee”, but
replaces it.
NOTE:
In Dutch, independent possessive pronouns add the ending -e and are always
preceded by a definite article: de or het (except for jullie).
Which article we use, depends on whether the pronoun refers to common nouns
(de-nouns) or neuter nouns (het-nouns). To illustrate:
To express possession with jullie, one needs to use van jullie (meaning “of
you”) and the appropriate demonstrative. Note that other forms can also be
used with van. (See Informal Possession with Van in Dutch p. 305):
The declension of the possessive pronouns are the same as those for the definite articles der/die/
das in German (See Articles p. 218).
296
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
These endings agree with the gender and number of the noun that the possessive pronouns are
replacing, and which case the noun belongs to.
German English
297

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German English
For example:
The word das Auto - “car” is a neuter noun in the nominative case in German, so we need to use
possessive pronoun which is also neuter in the nominative case (See also Determine the Case of
Possessive Pronouns in German p. 299).
NOTE:
In spoken German, the letter e from the ending of the nominative and
accusative neuter possessive pronouns is usually dropped. For example:
298
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Furthermore, a phrase “a friend of mine” uses the independent possessive in English, but in German,
the following construction is used: the preposition van + dative personal pronoun (See Informal
Possession with Von in German p. 308). For example:
- a friend of mine.
Below we will demonstrate how to determine cases of the possessive pronouns correctly in
German. The Dutch and Afrikaans examples will also be added for the sake of comparison.
German English
Nominative Case
Now let's look at the nominative possessive pronoun endings for each gender:
299

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• If the noun is masculine such as der Stuhl - “the chair”, the nominative possessive pronoun that
replaces this noun takes an -er ending:
• If the noun is feminine such as die Tasse - “the cup”, the nominative possessive pronoun that replaces
this noun takes an -e ending.
• If the noun is neuter such as das Auto - “the car”, the nominative possessive pronoun that replaces this
noun takes an -es ending, which may or may not drop that middle -e-.
• If the noun is plural such as die Autos - “the cars”, the nominative possessive pronoun that replaces
this noun takes an -e ending:
NOTE:
As it was said before, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the possessive pronouns do not
agree in case, number and gender with nouns and only take the -e ending in all
cases below. Observe the same examples:
300
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German English
Accusative Case
301

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Note that in German the possessive pronoun seinen replaces the phrase einen Bleistift.
Even though the noun “pencil” is masculine (der Bleistift), we cannot use the nominative case form
seiner in this case.
The subject Er - “he” has lost his pencil, so the pencil is the direct object and therefore is used in the
accusative case. That is why the -en ending is used to reflect this.
Furthermore, in German, the accusative case can also be identified by accusative prepositions (See
also The Accusative Case p. 125). For example:
Ger. Wir gehen mit seinem Vater ins Kino, aber ohne meinen.
- We’re going to the cinema with his father but without mine.
NOTE:
Study the same examples in Dutch and Afrikaans:
Dut. We gaan met zijn vader naar de bioscoop, maar zonder de mijne.
- We’re going to the cinema with his father but without mine.
German English
Dative Case
302
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German English
As we already know, the dative case represents an indirect object in the sentence. Remember that the
dative case can also be indicated by a dative verb and/or dative preposition (See also The Dative Case
p. 121). Study the following:
Ger. Sein Vater ist nicht hier, also essen wir mit meinem.
NOTE:
Observe the same example in Dutch and Afrikaans:
German English
Genitive Case
303
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German English
Note that possessive pronouns in the genitive case are very rare. They mainly occur after specific
expressions, for example:
Ger. Du bist dir deines Fehlers bewusst, sie sich ihres nicht.
The word der Fehler - “mistake” is a masculine noun used in the genitive case in the expression:
“Du bist dir deines Fehlers (genitive) bewusst” - “You’re aware of your mistake” in German. Therefore,
we need to use possessive pronoun ihres - “hers” which is also in the genitive case.
There are two alternative paradigms of possessive pronouns used in elevated style in German, which
we need to know and recognize, but will never need to use.
Below we will demonstrate the first paradigm using the possessive pronoun “my” to show how it
agrees in case, gender and number with a noun.
Paradigm 1
304

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
There are two alternative paradigms of possessive pronouns used in elevated style in German, which
we need to know and recognize, but will never need to use.
Paradigm 2
Ger. Meine drei Kinder sind alle Jungen, die ihren aber alle Mädchen.
- My three children are all boys but hers are all girls.
An alternative way of showing possession without using the possessive pronouns is to use the
following construction: van + object pronoun in Dutch.
This construction is especially particular for the spoken language in Dutch. It corresponds to “of +
object” construction and generally occurs in sentences with the verb zijn - “to be”.
Below is the formula that shows how to form the informal possession with van and the object
pronouns in Dutch:
Below is the formula that shows how to form the informal possession with van and the object
pronouns in Dutch:
mij - mine
jou (inf.)/u (f.) - yours
hem - his
van + haar - hers
ons - ours
jullie (inf.)/u (f.) - yours
hen - theirs
305

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, there is no separate form for “its”. To mean “of it/that” the form
ervan is used. In order to stress that something belongs to “it”, the form
hiervan - “of this” or daarvan - “of that” are used. To compare:
Furthermore, remember that if the noun is not present in the clause, then the object pronoun
preceded by van and the appropriate demonstratives die - “that” or dat - “those” are used.
Below is the formula showing how to form the mentioned above structure in Dutch:
mij - mine
jou (inf.)/u (f.) - yours
hem - his
die or dat + van + haar - hers
ons - ours
jullie (inf.)/u (f.) - yours
hen - theirs
306
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
Remember that the construction die or dat + van + object pronoun is the only
way to form possession with jullie, as there is no possessive pronoun for it. For
example:
Dut. Mijn huis is erg oud, maar dat van jullie is nieuw.
- My house is very old but yours is new.
• The construction with van + object noun is also the common way of expressing the possessive in Dutch,
which corresponds to the English use of “of”. Observe the following:
• Unlike English, Dutch also uses the construction with van to refer to persons:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the possessive form with van - “of” is not as common as in Dutch.
Instead, the particle se is used (See also Alternative Constructions for
Possessives p. 310). Compare the following:
However, the possessive form with van - “of” can be used to avoid the double
possessive in Afrikaans. For example:
307
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• The preposition van is also used before the interrogative pronoun Dut. wie - “who” in order to express
an interrogative possessive in Dutch (See Interrogative Pronouns and Adverbs p. 322). For
example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the possessive particle se is used after the interrogative pronoun
Afr. wie - “who” in this case. To illustrate:
In German, an alternative way of showing possession without using the genitive case is to use the
following construction: von + indirect object (dative) pronouns or nouns (See also The Genitive Case
p. 115 and The Dative Case p. 121).
Below is the formula that shows how to form the informal possession with von and the object
pronouns in the dative in German:
mir - mine
dir - yours
ihm - his
von + ihr - hers
uns - ours
euch - yours
ihnen (pl.)/ihnen (f.) - theirs
- an aunt of his.
308
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- My father's glasses.
Below are some rules concerning the use of the informal possession with von as a genitive substitute
in German.
The genitive case is often replaced by the construction: von + indirect object (dative) pronouns or
nouns:
Ger. der Schlüssel von der Tür (von-phrase) des Büros (genitive).
309

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
The main difference between possessive adjectives and possessive pronouns is as follows:
Dut. Dat is mijn boek. Dat is het mijne. (or informal: Dat is van mij.)
However, in German and Dutch, we only add the letter -s to the third person proper noun, In
Afrikaans, the particle se is used. Study the following:
- Tom’s wallet.
NOTE:
Unlike in German and Afrikaans, in Dutch, an apostrophe is added when the
name ends in a vowel other than -e or when the last letter is an s or x:
310
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Remember that in German and Dutch, you can only turn proper names into possessive nouns
when adding -s. In Afrikaans, however, to show ownership, we can use the particle se with both proper
names and nouns.
NOTE:
In Dutch, if you want to form the possession with a noun, you should use the
preposition van in this case in Dutch (See Informal Possession with Van
in Dutch p. 305).
In German, you should use the genitive case suffixes to form the possession
with the noun or the name of a person (See Case in German p. 112).
- My neighbour’s house.
NOTE:
In German, we use the genitive case suffixes (See The Genitive Case p. 115).
In Afrikaans, the particle se is still used this case.
311
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In Afrikaans, just like se, the particle s’n is used with both proper names and nouns in order to show
ownership. However, unlike se, s’n is used in phrases where the noun or pronoun is put independently.
In German, we use the suffix -s in both cases, while in Dutch, the preposition van is used. Observe
the same example:
Dut. Het huis van Luan. —> Dat huis is van Luan.
NOTE:
In Dutch, we can also use the possessor's name along with the possessives haar
- “her”, zijn - “his” and hun - “their”.
It is, however, considered very informal and it is only used for the third person
singular and plural:
312
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In Germanic languages (except for Afrikaans), all demonstrative adjectives agree in number with
the noun that they modify. However, in German, unlike in English and Afrikaans, demonstratives are also
declined to reflect gender and case. In Dutch demonstratives also agree in gender (common and neuter).
For example:
The word “man” in German language is masculine, and is common gender in Dutch, so we need
to use demonstrative adjective which is also masculine (in German) and of common gender (in Dutch).
As we could also see from the previous examples, the definite article is not used with
demonstrative adjectives in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
Below is a table presenting all the sets of demonstrative adjectives in Dutch, Afrikaans and
nominative case demonstratives in German:
313
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the demonstrative adjective diè (even more colloquially daai) -
“this, that, these, those” is also frequently used. For example:
Note that unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German all demonstrative adjectives, apart from
gender and number, also agree in case with the noun that they modify. For example:
The noun Mann - “man" in German language is masculine and used in the singular, and diesen
Mann - “this man” is the direct object in the above example, so we need to use the demonstrative
adjective diesen in the accusative case, singular, and masculine.
The declension of each of these determiners (dieser, jener) are the same as those for the definite
articles der/die/das in German (See Articles p. 218).
314
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below is a table presenting all of the types of demonstrative adjectives (dieser, jener) that
agree in case, gender and number in German language:
German English
Below will be demonstrated how the demonstrative adjective “this” agrees in case, gender and
number with a noun and how it is used in sentences.
We will take words “dog” (Ger. der Hund), which is masculine in German, “school” (Ger. die
Schule), which is feminine, “house” (Ger. das Haus) - neuter, and “children” (Ger. die Kinder) - a
plural noun to demonstrate the declension.
Remember that you can replace the demonstrative adjective “this” or nouns used in the example
with any other to make up your own phrases.
German
NOTE:
As it was said before, in English and Afrikaans, the demonstrative adjectives do
not agree in case and gender with nouns, while in Dutch, demonstratives agree
in gender (common and neuter), for example:
315
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
common neuter __ __
For example:
In English, these demonstrative adjectives also signify the time and proximity:
316

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In English, the demonstrative adjective “this” also signifies the time, e.g. “this
afternoon”.
However, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the following expression is used in
this case:
German Dutch Afrikaans English
NOTE:
In German, jener is rarely used in spoken language. A more usual way of
expressing “that, those” in German is simply by using dieser, which is also
translated as “that”.
Below are the examples that demonstrate the use of that and those in West Germanic languages:
Did you know? Ger. Wie viel kostet dieser (jener) Mantel?
Luxembourg has 3 official languages: Dut. Hoeveel kost die jas?
French, German and Luxembourgish.
Children are taught in Luxembourgish in Afr. Hoeveel kos daardie jas?
nursery schools, and French and German at
primary schools. - How much does that coat cost?
317
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Demonstrative Pronouns
Demonstrative pronouns indicate the location of the noun they replace. You can use
demonstrative pronouns when you have several options to choose and while choosing you can say “this
one” (the one close to you) or “that one” (the one far from you). So, the words “this one” and “that one”
are both demonstrative pronouns.
Like demonstrative adjectives, German and Dutch demonstrative pronouns agree in number with
the noun that they modify. In German demonstrative pronouns are declined to reflect gender and case. In
Dutch demonstrative pronouns also agree in gender (common and neuter) with the noun that they
substitute (See Demonstrative Adjectives p. 313).Observe the following:
The noun “dress” in German language is neuter, and is common gender in Dutch, so we need to
use demonstrative adjective which is also neuter (in German) and of common gender (in Dutch).
Below is a table presenting demonstrative pronouns in Dutch, Afrikaans and nominative case
demonstratives in German:
318

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Sing. jener jene jenes die dat daardie een that one
Far
Pl. jene die daardie een those ones
Remember that demonstrative pronouns in West Germanic languages are used to replace a noun
instead of modifying it like an adjective would.
In other words, demonstratives can be used without a noun. In this case, the noun is implied
because the speaker has mentioned it earlier in the context, so that it is clear what the speaker is saying:
Compare the following:
NOTE:
In Dutch, if a demonstrative pronoun is linked to a noun with the verb zijn - “to
be”, we must use dit and dat (which are normally used for neuter nouns or het-
nouns), even if the noun is common or de-noun. For example:
Demonstrative Adjective Demonstrative Pronoun
319
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
It is worth saying that in order to emphasize something or someone one can use the following form in
West Germanic languages:
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the demonstratives “this, that, these and those”
are also used independently with the things, such as statements, situations, actions and items that the
speaker cannot identify precisely.
In other words, these independent demonstrative pronouns point out but do not directly modify.
They are placed at the beginning of the sentence.
For example:
320
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below is a table presenting all the independent (neuter demonstrative) in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans:
Below is an example that demonstrates the use of neuter form of demonstrating pronouns in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans languages:
NOTE:
In German and Dutch, the neuter form Ger. es and Dut. het can also be used to
mean “it”.
In Afrikaans, the form dit is still used in this case:
321
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
The main difference between demonstrative adjectives and demonstrative pronouns is the same
as with possessive adjectives and pronouns in West Germanic languages:
Such interrogative words can be pronouns, adverbs or interrogative pronominal adverbs as they
answer the questions: Who? What? Where? How? When? Why?.
These question words are usually placed at the beginning of the phrase. To make a question using
question words:
For example:
322

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- What is that?
Below is the table showing most common “question” words in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
323

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, the interrogative pronoun wer - “who” agrees in case (See also
Who(m)? - Ger. Wer?, Dut. Wie?, Afr. Wie? p. 326):
German
Nominative wer
Accusative wen
Dative wem
Genitive wessen
In Dutch, welk is used before het-nouns, while welke before de-nouns and
plural nouns. If not followed by a noun, welke is normally used. Compare the
following:
The interrogative pronouns Ger. was?, Dut. wat?, Afr. wat? - “what?” can be used as subjects,
direct objects, or objects of a preposition. For example:
As a subject:
324
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- What is that?
As an object:
As object of a preposition:
In English, for example, the interrogative pronoun “what” can also be used with prepositions such
as “about, with, for”. For instance, “about what?”. In this case the interrogative pronoun is used as object
of a preposition.
However, unlike English “what”, German was, Dutch and Afrikaans wat cannot be used in
combination with a preposition.
In this case, German, Dutch and Afrikaans use an adverbial construction with Ger. wo(r)-, and
Dut., Afr. waar- + a preposition (e.g. Ger. -für, -über; Dut. -voor, -over; Afr. -vir, -oor - for, about) in
order to make a question word. In German, if the preposition starts with a vowel, an “r” is added between
them to make the pronunciation easier.
Below is the formula of forming an adverbial construction with Ger. wo(r)-, and Dut., Afr.
waar- and a preposition:
Below is the table showing the most common “question” words used with prepositions in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
325

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In colloquial Afrikaans, the forms vir wat - “what for?” and wat van - “of what”
are also used.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the following forms can also be heard mostly in the spoken
language:
The interrogative pronouns Ger. wer?, Dut. wie?, Afr. wie? - “who(m)?” can also be used as
subjects, direct objects, or objects of a preposition in the sentences as well.
As a subject:
- Who is she?
326
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
As an object:
As object of a preposition:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, just like in English, the interrogative pronoun Ger. wer?, Dut.,
Afr. wie? - “who(m)” can also be used with prepositions. In this case it is used as object of a preposition.
Note that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, this construction is rendered by “preposition + Ger.
wer, Dut., Afr. wie.
Below is the table showing the most common “question” words with Ger. wer, Dut. and Afr.
wie used with prepositions:
For instance:
327
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
It is worth reminding that in German the interrogative pronoun wer agrees in case. Note that the
declension of the interrogative pronoun wer is the same as that for the masculine article der in German
(See Articles p. 218).
Below is the table showing all of the cases of the German interrogative pronoun wer:
For example:
- Who are you talking to? (or To whom are you talking?)
NOTE:
In German, to ask “who”, one should decide if the “who” is the subject, the direct
object, or the indirect object in the phrase.
Remember that the nominative case wer is the subject, the accusative case wen
is the direct object, and the dative case wem is the indirect object. For example:
German English
Indirect object Wem hast du den Schlüssel To whom did you give the key?
gegeben?
The interrogative pronoun Ger. wessen?, Dut. van wie?/wiens?/wier, Afr. wie se? -
“whose?” is a possessive form of the pronoun and is used to denote ownership for people when a person is
the possessor. For instance:
328
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, wessen is the genitive case form of the interrogative pronoun wer.
In Dutch, wiens is the form for the masculine and neuter singular. Wier is
used with the feminine singular and the plural. However, this form is fast
becoming obsolete. Wiens or van wie are used in all cases nowadays.
In Afrikaans, the form wie se is used before nouns in this case. However, the
form wie s'n is used when “whose” is not followed by a noun.
Compare the following:
NOTE:
In German, welch- is declined according to gender and case.
In Dutch, welk is used before het-nouns (neuter gender), while welke before
de-nouns (masculine and feminine) and plural nouns. If not followed by a noun,
welke is normally used. For example: welk radiostation? - which radio
station?. It is a neuter noun - het radiostation - so we use welk before it.
In Afrikaans, the Dutch word welke, which has been widely replaced by
watter, both as an interrogative and as a relative. However, it is still heard in
certain standard expressions in formal contexts. For instance:
329
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
As mentioned above, the interrogative pronoun welch- agrees in case and gender in German.
Note that this question word has the same ending as the definite article der/die/das (See also Articles
p. 218)
Below is the table showing all of the cases of the German question word welch-:
German
It should be noted that Ger. welche(-r/-s)?, Dut. welk(-e)?, Afr. watter? - “which(one/-s)?” is
used when we are asking a question that requires a choice between a limited number of items. We use
Ger. was?, Dut. wat?, Afr. wat? - “what?” when asking a general question. Compare the following:
330

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In the above example, we have a context of choice so that is why we used Ger. welche(-r/-s),
Dut. welk(-e), Afr. watter - “which(one/-s)”.
In the above example, we have a general question without any context of choice so we used Ger.
was?, Dut. wat?, Afr. wat? - “what?”.
It is worth mention that the interrogative Eng. which one/-s is singular and is used when asking
the listener to select a single item from a group of many. The interrogative Eng. which ones is plural
form and asks for multiple choices out of the group.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, the interrogatives Ger. welche(-r/-s)?, Dut. welk(-
e)?, Afr. watter? are used in this case. Compare the following:
Along with all listed above interrogative pronouns, some adverbs such as Ger. wie, Dut. hoe,
Afr. hoe - “how?” are also used to ask questions. For example:
331

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, to ask for someone’s name, the interrogative pronoun
wat? - “what?” can also be used.
In German, however, the adverb Ger. wie? - “how?” must be used in this case.
Study the following:
It is worth mentioning that Ger. wie, Dut. hoe, Afr. hoe - “how?” are often followed by other
adverbs. Observe the following:
Below we will consider these construction one by one with the following examples.
332
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Note that in English and German we use Ger. wie viel - “how much” with uncountable nouns,
and Ger. wie viele - “how many” with countable ones. In Dutch and Afrikaans, however, hoeveel is
used in all cases. For example:
NOTE:
English, German, Dutch and Afrikaans use different ways of asking the date
(See Dates p. 662):
How often? - Ger. Wie oft?, Dut. Hoe vaak?, Afr. Hoe gereeld?
333
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
How far? - Ger. Wie weit?, Dut. Hoe ver?, Afr. Hoe ver?
How long? - Ger. Wie lange?, Dut. Hoe lang?, Afr. Hoe lank?
Since when? - Ger. Seit wann?, Dut. Sinds wanneer?, Afr. Van wanneer
af
334

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
Ger. woher, Dut. and Afr. waarvandaan - “where from” can be both separate
or left together in the phrase, for example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, van waar - “where from” is usually used with the verb wees -
“to be”, for example:
335
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, the adverb waarheen - “to where” is separable. Waar is put at the
beginning of the phrase and heen is put and the end of it.
Like in Dutch, in Afrikaans, the adverb waarheen/waarnatoe can also be
separable. In this case, heen or natoe are placed at the end of the clause:
NOTE:
In German, wie kommt es/wieso also mean “why” and are used in informal
questions. For example:
Ger. Wie kommt es, dass du nicht zur Party gehst? (or Wieso gehst du nicht
zur Party?)
- How come you are not going to the party?
They are are very similar to interrogative words, but instead of asking something, they declare an
idea or opinion. They are normally used in combination with a noun, for example:
336
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below are some common exclamatory words that are used in West Germanic languages:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, wat is interchangeable with hoe in interrogative exclamations:
In West Germanic languages, these exclamatory words are used in front of nouns, adjectives and
adverbs and mean How or What a…!
NOTE:
In German, you don't need to decline welch when using an exclamatory
adjective. In order to say “how or what a…!” you need to use the word stem
welch.
It is worth saying that like in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, exclamative words Ger. welch, Dut.
and Afr. wat can be combined with an indefinite article Ger. ein/eine, Dut. een, Afr. 'n (See
Indefinite Articles p. 218).
337
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In West Germanic languages, a qualifying adjective after the noun can be
preceded by Ger. so; Dut. zo; Afr. so - “so”. For example:
Relative pronouns and adverbs are also used to introduce further information about someone or
something. For example: “My brother, who is an outstanding singer, released a new album”.
Study another example: The company, where I work, employed many young professionals.
The clause which is introduced by the relative pronouns or adverbs designates the subordinate
clause. The clause containing the component modified by the relative clause is called the main clause. The
noun, pronoun or phrase which is modified by the relative pronoun is called an antecedent.
338
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
It should be mentioned that in English, the relative pronouns can be omitted when they define the
object of the clause (e.g. the book that you bought is interesting = the book you bought is interesting). In
German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the relative pronoun is always required. Observe the following:
Generally speaking the relative pronouns and adverbs are used to connect two short sentences,
for example:
Ger. Ich habe einen Film gesehen. Der Film war interessant. = Der Film, den ich gesehen habe, war
interessant.
Dut. Ik heb een film gezien. De film was interessant. = De film die ik gezien heb, was interessant.
Afr. Ek het 'n fliek gekyk. Die fliek was interessant. = Die fliek wat ek gekyk het, was interessant.
- I watched a movie. The movie was interesting. = The movie (that) I watched was interesting.
NOTE:
In German, the relative clause is usually shown by putting commas both before
and after it.
In English, Dutch and Afrikaans, however, the use of commas with relative
clauses is inconsistent. Compare the following:
der, die, das, was dat, die, wat, wie wat that, who(m), which
dessen, deren van wie, wiens, wier, wie se, welke whose
welke
339
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
wo, in + der, die, das waar, waarin waar, waarin where, in which
mit + der, die, das met wie met wie with whom/whom with
This relative pronoun is one of the most frequently used in West Germanic languages. It can refer
to either people or things.
However, there are differences in how they are used in these three West Germanic languages.
Below we will consider these differences in German, Dutch and Afrikaans separately.
German
1. Unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German the relative pronouns der, die, das are declined.
Note that the declension of these relative pronouns is for the most part the same as that for the
definite article der - “the” in German. The only differences are in the dative plural and the genitive.
(See Articles p. 218).
Below is the table showing all of the types of the German relative pronouns der/die/das:
German English
For example:
Example 1
340

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Example 2
Note that the relative pronouns den and das in the above examples are in the accusative case, as “the
table” and “the book” are the direct object of the verbs sehen - “to see” and kaufen - “buy” in the relative
clause respectively. Observe one more examples:
Example 3
Example 4
In the example 3 and in the example 3, the relative pronoun der is nominative, as “the man” and
“the author” are the subjects of the relative clause.
NOTE:
To avoid the repetition of the same word welcher, welche, welches are used
in this case in German. Compare the following examples:
German Das ist die Frau, die die Donuts Das ist die Frau, welche die
verkauft. Donuts verkauft.
English - This is the woman who sells the donuts.
• It is worth mentioning that der, die, das can be used with a preposition. The preposition should come
before the relative pronoun. Study the following:
341
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
Remember that in German, the dative case of the appropriate relative pronoun
is used with the prepositions mit - “with” and in - “in” (See also Case in
German. p. 112 and Prepositions p. 676).
2. Was can be translated as “that” or “which” and is used when referring to a whole sentence. Study the
following:
3. Note that the relative pronoun was cannot be used in combination with a preposition. So if we want to
use “that” or “which” to refer to an indefinite antecedent in combination with a preposition, we must
use the construction wo(r) + the preposition (e.g. Ger. -auf, -über - “for/upon”, “about”). If the
preposition starts with a vowel, an “r” is added between them to make the pronunciation easier.
Below is the formula of forming an adverbial construction with Ger. wo(r)- and the preposition
auf:
For example:
- This is something for which I am waiting. - This is something (that) I am waiting for)
Dutch
1. Dat can be translated as “that” or “which” and is used with het-words. This relative pronoun can be
used to specify the subject or give more information about something or someone else in the sentence,
for example:
342
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Like in German, if the Dutch relative pronoun dat is preceded by a preposition, the following
construction is used: waar- + a preposition (e.g. Dut. -in, -over - “in”, “about”).
Below is the formula of forming an adverbial construction with Dut. waar- and the preposition
in:
For instance:
NOTE:
In Dutch, the prepositions can also be used separately from waar, for example:
2. Die can be translated as “who” “that” or “which”. However, unlike dat, the relative pronoun die
applies to de-nouns instead. Study the following:
• If the relative pronoun die is referring something inanimate and is preceded by a preposition, it
becomes waar. For instance:
343
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
3. Like the German was, the Dutch relative pronoun wat can also be translated as “that” or “which” and
is used when referring to a whole sentence, to indefinite pronouns, or to adjectives. Study the following:
4. Wie - “whom” is used after a preposition and when we are not referring to a particular person, for
example:
NOTE:
However, in spoken Dutch, this rule is sometimes violated and the adverbial
construction “waar- + a preposition” is used instead when referring to persons.
For example:
• In Dutch, wie is used to mean “he who…”. We can also say hij die or zij die but the form wie is the
most common. Study the following:
344
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
5. Welke is translated as “that” or “which”. Just like die, welke also applies to de-nouns. However, it
may often sound too formal. Study the following:
Afrikaans
1. The relative pronoun wat translated as “that”, “which” or “who” is used for all antecedents (singular or
plural, personal or non-personal),. This relative pronoun can be used to specify the subject or give more
information about something or someone else in the sentence, for example:
The Altstadt ("old town"), one of the 50 - The book that I have bought.
quarters (Stadtteile) of Düsseldorf,
Germany, is the heart of the city’s nightlife.The
Düsseldorfer Altstadt is well-known as "the Afr. Die huis wat my pa gebou het.
longest bar in the world" with over 300 bars,
pubs, and restaurants. - The house which my father built.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the anglicism wie can also be used instead of wat when referring
to a personal antecedent. Remember that this is not considered standard
Afrikaans. For instance:
345
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Like in Dutch, if the Afrikaans relative pronoun wat is preceded by a preposition and refers to non-
personal antecedents, the following construction is used: waar- + a preposition (e.g. Dut. -in, -over -
“in”, “about”).
Below is the formula of forming an adverbial construction with Afr. waar- and the preposition
in:
For instance:
2. Wie - “whom” is used after a preposition and when we are referring to personal antecedents in
Afrikaans, for example:
NOTE:
However, the adverbial constructions “waar + preposition” and “preposition +
wie” are often replaced by “wat + preposition” when referring to personal or
non-personal antecedents in the spoken Afrikaans, for example: :
• Just like in Dutch, In Afrikaans wie is used to express “he who…”. Observe the following:
3. Watter - “which” is used when followed by a noun referring to something mentioned in the previous
clause. Otherwise this word is normally used as an interrogative (See p. 329). To illustrate:
346
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
The relative pronoun Ger. dessen/deren, Dut. van wie/wiens/wier, Afr. wie se - “whose” is
a possessive form of the pronoun and is used to denote ownership for people when a person is the
possessor. For instance:
Dut. Ik heb een vriend wiens (van wie de/zijn) vader dokter is.
Ger. Sandra, deren Schwester eine Boutique hat, studiert bei mir.
Dut. Sandra, wiens (van wie de/haar) zus een boetiek heeft, studeert bij mij.
Afr. Sandra, wie se suster 'n boetiek het, studeer saam met my.
It is worth mentioning that the relative pronoun Ger. dessen/deren, Dut. van wie/wiens/
wier, Afr. wie se - “whose” can also be used to indicate possession by animals. For example:
NOTE:
In German, dessen, deren is the genitive case form of the relative pronoun
der, die, das. Remember that the relative pronoun takes its gender and
number from the possessor.
In Dutch, wiens is the form for the masculine and neuter singular. The form
wier is used with the feminine singular and the plural. However, it is fast
becoming obsolete. Wiens or van wie are becoming more popular among
Dutch speakers instead.
347
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In Afrikaans, the colloquial form wat se can be used instead of wie se when
referring to people:
Where/In which - Ger. Wo/In + Der, Die, Das; Dut. and Afr. Waar/
Waarin
In West Germanic languages, the relative adverbs Ger. wo, Dut., and Afr. waar - “where”
introduce a relative clause that refers to a place or time. For example:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when referring to a place, one can also use the following
construction:
NOTE:
In German, the relative pronouns der, die, das are declined similarly as the
definite article der - “the” (See Articles p. 218). Normally, when indicating a
place, one should use the dative case, for example:
348
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, in order to introduce a relative clause that also refers to a place
and means “from where”, one can use the following construction:
NOTE:
In German, the preposition auf and the relative pronouns der/die/das are
used to mean “from where". As it was mentioned earlier, der/die/das are
declined similarly as the definite article der - “the” (See Articles p. 218). One
must use the dative case in this case.
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition vandaan can also be used separately
from waar, for example:
With Whom - Ger. Mit + Der/Die/Das, Dut. and Afr. Met Wie
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when referring to personal antecedents, one can also use the
following construction:
349
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
The relative adverbs Ger. wenn/falls/ob/als/wann, Dut. wanneer, als, toen, dan -
“when” are used to introduce a relative clause to make it clear which time we are talking about. For
instance:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, the word when has several translations
(See Prepositions p. 676 and Conjunctions p. 753).
350
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• If that clause already contains an infinitive, the finite verb is put after the infinitive in German and
before the infinitive in Dutch and Afrikaans, for example:
Ger. Das Auto, das ich für meinen Sohn kaufen möchte, ist fantastisch.
• If it contains a past participle (i.e. if the clause is in the past tense or the passive), the finite verb is
placed after the participle in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, for example:
Ger. Das Auto, das du für deinen Sohn gekauft hast, ist fantastisch.
Afr. Die kar wat jy vir jou seun gekoop het, is fantasties.
- The car that you have bought for your son is fantastic.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, there are often two possible positions for
infinitives and past participles when a relative clause follows a main clause. They
can be placed at the end of the main clause or straight after the finite verb as in
English. Compare the following:
Example 1
Ger. Ich habe das Buch, das du mir gezeigt hast, bereits gelesen.
Dut. Ik heb het boek dat je me liet zien, al gelezen.
Afr. Ek het die boek wat jy vir my gewys het, al gelees.
- I have already read the book that you showed me.
Example 2
Ger. Ich habe das Buch gelesen, das du mir gezeigt hast.
Dut. Ik heb het boek gelezen dat je me liet zien.
351
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Such phrases can be translated into English by converting them back into relative clauses which
often contain a passive.
German Ich sehe einen See, der zugefroren ist. Ich sehe einen zugefrorenen See.
Dutch Ik zie een meer dat bevroren is. Ik zie een bevroren meer.
Afrikaans Ek sien 'n meer wat bevrore is. Ek sien 'n bevrore meer.
German Der Mann, der rennt, ist mein Freund. Der laufende Mann ist mein Freund.
Dutch De man die rent is mijn vriend De rennende man is mijn vriend.
Afrikaans Die man wat hardloop is my vriend Die hardloop man is my vriend.
English The man that is running is my friend. The running man is my friend.
In general, indefinite adjectives and pronouns refer to an unspecified third person or thing.
Below are the most common inde nite adjectives and pronouns in West Germanic languages:
352

fi
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
andere(-r/-s)/der (die, andere(n)/de (het) ander, (die) ander other/the other one/
das) andere andere others
allein(e)/der (die, das) alleen/de (het) enige alleen/die enigste alone/the only
einzige(-r/-s)
nur/allein/erst slechts/alleen/maar net/slegs only /just
353

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, the indefinite pronoun etwas does not decline, which means it does
not change its form. Also, the German indefinite pronoun was is used more
colloquially.
In Dutch, the indefinite pronoun wat is used colloquially.
It is worth mentioning that if one wants to say “something else”, the following structure should be
used in German and Dutch:
354
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
For instance:
“Anything” is used when we are talking about a thing, when it does not matter which one.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, there are several ways of translating
“anything”. Here are some other examples for translating it:
355
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In German, in order to strengthen the indefinite pronoun etwas, one can insert
irgend- before it. For example:
“Everything” is used to mean the whole quantity of something or of some things. Observe the
following:
- I see nothing.
356
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- I bought nothing.
NOTE:
In German, the indefinite pronoun nix is used more colloquially.
Note that the the following construction should be used in order to express “nothing else” in
Germanic languages:
For instance:
357
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, just like with etwas, one can also add irgend- before jemand to
strengthen it.
In Afrikaans, one can also add enig(e)- before iemand to emphasize it
(enigiemand). For instance:
nominative jemand
genitive jemandes
accusative jemanden
dative jemandem
Note that in order to say “somebody else/someone else”, one should use the following structure in
German and Dutch:
358
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, in the expression jemand anderes the second word must be
declined (See p. 373). For instance:
This indefinite pronoun means no matter what person. Study the following:
- Is anybody there?
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, “anybody” can also be translated as
niemand. For example:
359
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
This indefinite pronoun means all the people in a group, or all the people in the world:
NOTE:
Unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German the indefinite pronoun jeder is
declined. It must also agree with the noun that it replaces.
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this pronoun:
German
For example:
360
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In Dutch, iedereen is the most usual word. Ieder is sometimes used. In more
formal style een ieder can also be used.
In Afrikaans, however, iedereen is rather formal word. In natural speech
almal is more likely to be used than elkeen. The forms elkeen/iedereen
require the singular possessive sy - “his/its”:
- No one came.
NOTE:
Unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German the indefinite pronoun niemand is
declined (See Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of niemand:
German
nominative niemand
genitive niemand(e)s
accusative niemanden
361
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
dative niemandem
For example:
Note that “nobody else” is expressed in the following way in Germanic languages:
For instance:
(See Impersonal Pronoun Ger. Man, Dut. Men, Afr. (’n) Mens - “One” p. 254).
362

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Ger. einige, Dut. sommige(n)/enkele(n), Afr. sommige/etlike - “some/a few” can be used as an
adjective or as a pronoun that refers to a quantity of something or a number of people or things. Study the
following:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, if we want to express “some of”, the preposition van is commonly
used. For example:
363
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, in order to say “some ..., (but) others …” the following construction
must be used:
For example:
NOTE:
In Dutch, sommige(n) and enkele(n) add -n when they are used
independently referring to people, for example:
A couple of/A few - Ger. ein paar; Dut. een paar, Afr. ’n paar
Ger. einige; Dut. sommige(n); Afr. sommige - “certain” can be used as a determiner to mean
“one” or “some”, not definitely named. For example:
364
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, sommigen is used when referring to people to express “some people”.
It is worth mentioning Ger. bestimmt/gewiss; Dut. bepaalde; Afr. sekere/beslis can be used
as an adjective to mean “certain”, “specific” or “determined”. Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, gewiss is less commonly used than bestimmt. Remember that
bestimmt and gewiss are declined (See Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of the adjective bestimmt:
German
For example:
365
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
It is notable that Eng. certain; Ger. sicher; Dut. zeker; Afr. seker can also mean reliable,
definite, certain. Observe the following:
- It is not certain.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the form sekere is used with nouns and seker is used without
nouns. To compare:
Ger. solche(-r/-s), Dut. zulke, Afr. sulke - “such”can be used to refer back to the thing or
person that you have just mentioned, or a thing or person like the one that you have just mentioned.
Study the following:
366
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Ger. solche(-r/-s), Dut. zo’n, Afr. so ’n - “such a/an” used with an indefinite article in front of a
noun means like this or like that. For instance:
One can use Ger. so, Dut. zo’n, Afr. so ’n - “such a/an” with an indefinite article in front of an
adjective followed by a noun to make the adjective stronger. Observe the following:
NOTE:
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, one should only use the form Dut.
zo’n, Afr. so ’n to mean “such a/an”:
367
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Ger. jede(-r,-s); Dut. elk(e); Afr. elke - “each/every” are used as an adjective:
NOTE:
In German, jede(-r,-s) is declined (See p. 360).
In Dutch, the form elk is used with neuter singular nouns (het-nouns). Elke is
used with masculine and feminine singular and plural nouns (de-nouns). For
example:
In Afrikaans, the form al wat ('n) can also be used to express “every” . For
example:
These are used as an indefinite adjective as well as a pronoun meaning “several/multiple”. For
example:
368
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, mehrere is declined (See also Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this pronoun:
German
nominative mehrere
genitive mehrerer
mehreren/mehrern
accusative mehrere
dative mehreren/mehrern
For example:
Ger. Ich habe es aus mehreren Gründen getan. (dative case, plural, strong declension)
It is worth saying that that Ger. verschieden; Dut. verschillende; Afr. verskillende - “different/
various” can also mean “varied” or “different”:
369
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, verschieden is declined (See Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this adjective:
German
nominative verschiedene
genitive verschiedener
accusative verschiedene
dative verschiedenen
For example:
Ger. Ich reise in verschiedene Städte (accusative case, plural, strong declension)
Dut. Ik reis naar verschillende steden.
Afr. Ek reis na verskillende stede.
- I am travelling to different/various cities.
Note that Ger. (ein/eine) andere(-r/-s), Dut. (een) ander, Afr. (‘n) ander can be used to say that
two things are different or opposite, they are not like each other (See below).
German Ich mag verschiedene Arten von Musik. Ich mag eine andere Art von Musik.
Dutch Ik hou van verschillende soorten muziek. Ik hou van een ander soort muziek.
Afrikaans Ek hou van verskillende soorte musiek. Ek hou van 'n ander soort musiek.
370
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In Germanic languages, these indefinite adjectives can be used to mean the following:
• Ger. ein(-e) andere(-r/-s); Dut. een ander(e); Afr. 'n ander are used to mean “different”. For
example:
NOTE:
In German, ein(-e) andere(-r/-s) is declined (See Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this adjective:
German
For example:
Note that in Dutch, the form een ander is used with a neuter singular noun (het-noun), while the
form een andere is used with de-nouns. Study the following examples:
371
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
One more - Ger. noch eine(-r/-s); Dut. and Afr. nog een
• Ger. noch eine(-r/-s); Dut. nog een; Afr. nog een - “one more” are used to express “additional”.
Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, noch eine(-r/-s) is also declined (See Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this pronoun:
German
• Ger. andere(-r/-s); Dut. andere; Afr. ander - “other” are used as an adjective. Observe the following:
372
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Ger. Ich fühle mich glücklicher, wenn ich andere Menschen lächeln sehe.
NOTE:
In German, andere(-r/-s) must agree in case and gender.
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of andere(-r/-s):
German
For example:
Ger. Ich will mit anderen Menschen sprechen. (dative case, plural)
Below are some derived words and expression of the indefinite adjective Ger. andere(-r/-s);
Dut. andere; Afr. ander:
373
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Ger. der (die, das) andere; Dut. de (het) andere; Afr. die ander (een) - “the other one” can be
used as a pronoun.
Ger. Dieser Mann ist klein und der andere Mann ist groß.
NOTE:
In German, der (die, das) andere must agree in case and gender.
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this adjective:
German
For instance:
374
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In the above example the noun der Kuchen - “the cake” is masculine in
German. Therefore, the masculine article der changes when used in the
accusative. Der turns into den.
In Dutch, de (het) andere agrees only in gender. For instance:
• Ger. andere; Dut. anderen; Afr. ander - “others” are used as a plural pronoun. Study the following:
Ger. allein(e); Dut. alleen; Afr. alleen - “alone” can be used as an adjective to mean you are
alone, you are not with any other people. Study the following:
375

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, alleine is mainly colloquial and the form allein is used instead.
For instance:
It should be said that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, these adjectives cannot be used to convey
English “the only” when you talk about the only thing or person and when there are no others.
In this case, the word Ger. der (die, das) einzige(-r/-s); Dut. de (het) enige (enigste); Afr.
die enigste – the only is used. For example:
Ger. Das einzige Kino, das diesen Film zeigt, befindet sich im Zentrum der Stadt.
Dut. De enige bioscoop die deze film vertoont, bevindt zich in het centrum van de stad
Afr. Die enigste bioskoop wat hierdie film wys, is in die middel van die stad.
- The only cinema that shows this film is in the centre of the city.
NOTE:
In German, der (die, das) einzige(-r/-s) must agree in case, number and
gender.
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this adjective:
German
376
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
For example:
In Dutch, de (het) enige agrees in gender. The masculine and feminine gender
is used with de and the neuter is used with het, e.g.:
377

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Below are some useful derived expression of the inde nite adjectives and adverbs Ger. nur;
Dut. alleen; Afr. net - “only/just”:
nicht nur (allein)…, niet alleen…, maar nie net…nie, maar not only…, but also
sondern auch ook ook
For example:
Afr. Sy is nie net 'n aktrise nie, maar ook 'n sangeres.
Ger. genug; Dut. and Afr. genoeg - “enough” are used as adjectives, pronouns or adverbs to
mean as much or as many as needed. Observe the following:
Ger. ausreichend (genügend); Dut. and Afr. voldoende - “sufficient”, “adequate” are used as
adjectives. Study the following:
378

fi
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• As an adjective or pronoun Ger. viel; Dut. veel; Afr. baie - “much/a lot (of)/lots of” is used to talk
about a large amount of something or about something considerable or impressive. For example:
• As an adjective or pronoun Ger. viele; Dut. veel; Afr. baie - “many/a lot of/lots of” is used to talk
about a large number of people or things. Study the following:
379
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Note that Ger. viel/viele; Dut. veel; Afr. veel - “much/many” are used with Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. te -
“too” to mean a very large amount of something. For instance:
NOTE:
In German, viel is used with nouns that cannot be counted (e.g. viel Zeit -
much/a lot of time). Viele is used with nouns that can be counted (e.g. viele
Menschen - many/a lot of people)
In Afrikaans, veel - “many”, “much” is usually used chiefly with negatives or
when modified by adverbs. However, baie is a more common synonym with a
mostly complementary distribution.
• As adverbs or nouns Ger. wenig; Dut. weinig; Afr. min - “little” are used to mean a small amount of
something. For example:
380
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
- Little is known about his life. (About his life little is known)
• As an adverb Ger. ein wenig/ein bisschen; Dut. een beetje; Afr. 'n bietjie - “a little (bit)” are used
to mean in only a small quantity or degree. For instance:
NOTE:
In English, “a little” is often used with “bit”. In German ein bisschen, Dutch
een beetje and Afrikaans 'n bietjie are still used. For example:
• As an adjective Ger. wenig; Dut. weinig; Afr. min - “a little” are used to mean that something exists
only in a small amount. For example:
381
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Remember that as adjectives Ger. klein; Dut. klein; Afr. klein - “little” are used to mean a person or
thing that is little or small in size. Observe the following:
NOTE:
In German, klein is declined (See Case in German p. 112).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this adjective:
German
For example:
• As an adjective or pronoun Ger. wenige; Dut. weinig; Afr. min - “few” are used to mean a small
number of people or things. Study the following:
382
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Note that Ger. ein paar; Dut. een paar; Afr. 'n paar - “a few” can also mean a small number of
people or things (See also p. 364). For instance:
NOTE:
In German, wenig is used with uncountable nouns. Wenige is used with plural
countable nouns. To compare:
German wenig Zeit wenige Städte
Unlike in German, the Dutch weinig and Afrikaans min - “little”, “few” are
used with both uncountable and countable nouns, for example:
Dutch weinig tijd weinig steden
• As an adjective, Ger., Dut. and Afr. alle means “the entire”, “the whole” amount, number, quantity, or
extent of something, or every member or individual:
383
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the forms Dut. al de, Afr. al die are also used before
before plural nouns, for example:
Remember that German, Dutch and Afrikaans alle is only used before plural nouns or before
uncountable singular nouns. For example:
NOTE:
In German, alle is also used to express “every” in time intervals with plural
nouns. In Dutch and Afrikaans, elke is used instead. For example:
• It is worth mentioning that unlike German, Dutch and Afrikaans alle, the forms Ger. all, Dut. and Afr.
al must be used before possessive and demonstrative pronouns. Study the following:
384
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, it is still more common to use alle in this case:
All(e) meine Freunde sind nett. Meine ganzen Freunde sind nett.
• You can also use the expression Ger. der (die, das)/ein (eine) ganze(-r/-s); Dut. de (het)/een hele;
Afr. die/'n hele to mean “the/a whole” or “the/an entire” number or sum of something. For example:
Ger. Die ganze Straße ist mit Schnee bedeckt. (nominative, feminine)
NOTE:
In German, der (die, das)/ein (eine) ganze(-r/-s) must agree in case,
number and gender.
Below is the table demonstrating the weak declension (with definite article) of
this adjective:
German
385
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
Below is the table showing the mixed declension (with indefinite article) of this
adjective:
German
In Dutch, de (het) hele agrees in gender. The masculine and feminine gender is
used with de and the neuter is used with het, e.g.:
• Ger. alle, Dut. and Afr. alle - “all” in previous examples were used as adjectives and put before the
word they modified (see above), but they can also be used as adverbs and can occur somewhere after
the noun they say something about.
Note that in this case Dut. allemaal and Afr. almal must be used. Observe the following:
386

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In Dutch, allemaal and Afrikaans almal are the common forms and are used
to refer to plural nouns and to singular nouns that do not have plural forms.
Observe one more example:
• As a pronoun, we use the forms Ger. alles/alle; Dut. alles/allen; Afr. alles/almal - “all/everything”
when they occur independently, which means that it does not have an antecedent (a noun it refers to):
1. German, Dutch and Afrikaans alles is used to mean “everything”. Study the following:
NOTE:
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans the form al wat can also be used to
express “everything”, “all”, for example:
387
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
2. Ger. alle, Dut. allen, Afr. almal are normally used as a synonym for “everyone/all people”. It is used
for people only. To illustrate:
In the above example Ger. alle, Dut. allen, Afr. almal can also be substituted by Ger. jeder,
Dut. iedereen, Afr. iedereen/elkeen - “everyone”:
NOTE:
In German, alle is declined and becomes allen in the dative case (See Cases p.
300). For example:
In Dutch, the use of allen is very formal. Its synonym iedereen - “everyone” is
more commonly used. Study the following:
388
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• You can also use “all of” before personal pronouns (you, us, them) and relative pronouns (whom,
which). Ger. alle and Dut. allemaal, Afr. almal are used in this case. Study the following:
Also, if you talk to two or more people you can say Ger. beide, Dut. beide/allebei (de), Afr.
albei - “both (of)” (See also Both (of) Ger. beide; Dut. beide(n)/allebei (de), Afr. albei p. 512). For
instance:
You can also use “all (of)” before demonstrative pronouns (this, that, these, those). Ger. alle, Dut.
allen/iedereen, Afr. almal are used instead. Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the form Ger. derjenige , Dut. degene, Afr.
diegene - “the one who/those who” can also be used when referring to people
(singular and plural), for example:
389
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• There are also fixed expressions with Ger. alle/all/alles; Dut. alle/al/allemaal/alles/allen; Afr.
alles/almal - “all” that should be remembered.
However, in some cases Ger. ganz, Dut. hele, Afr. hele are used instead:
alles Gute het allerbeste alles van die beste all the best
den ganzen Tag (lang) de hele dag (lang) die hele dag (lank) all day long
das ganze Jahr durch/ hele jaar door die hele jaar all year round
über
390

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
Everything - Ger. alles; Dut. alles, Afr. alles (as an indefinite pronoun)
As an indefinite pronoun Ger. alles; Dut. alles; Afr. alles refer to “all”, “everything” in general:
NOTE:
In German Dutch and Afrikaans, alles should be put before past participle in a
sentence.
The rest - Ger. der Rest; Dut. de rest, Afr. die res
As a noun, Ger. der Rest; Dut. de rest; Afr. die res - “the rest” are preceded by the definite
article which agrees in case (in German) and in gender and number (in German and Dutch) and mean the
others or the parts of something that are left. Observe the following:
Afr. Die res van die besoekers kan nie kom nie.
391
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
NOTE:
In German, der Rest must agree in case.
Below is the table showing the declension of Rest:
German
Masculine
The indefinite pronoun Ger. keine(-r/-s); Dut. geen; Afr. geen/geeneen- “none” are used to
express not one or not any:
NOTE:
In German, keine(-r/-s) agrees in case, gender, number (See Determine the
Case of Possessive Pronouns p. 299 and Negation p. 550)
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of this pronoun:
German
392
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
In Afrikaans, the form geeneen can also be used to mean “none’ or “not one”.
Study the following:
Ger. beide; Dut. beide(n)/allebei (de); Afr. albei - “both (of)” are used to refer to two people,
things or places. These pronouns can be dependent, independent, or predicative:
• Dependent:
3. Ger. beide; Dut. beide/allebei de; Afr. albei - “both” are used before a noun. Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, beide is declined (See also Determine the Case of Possessive
Pronouns p. 299).
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of beide:
393
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
German
genitive — beider
For example:
In Dutch, allebei de is more often used than beide in the previous example.
4. Ger. beide; Dut. beide/allebei; Afr. albei - “both or both of” can also be used after a determiner (e.g.
a/an, the, her, his) + noun:
• Independent:
1. We can also use Ger. beide; Dut. beide(n); Afr. albei - “both” independently as a pronoun. For
example:
394

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
In the first example, we refer to any goods that could be on sale. In the second example, we refer
to persons.
NOTE:
In Dutch, when used independently, beide is used for things and beiden for
persons.
• Predicative:
1. Ger. beide; Dut. allebei; Afr. albei - “both” are used with pronouns:
• You can use Ger. beide and Dut. allebei; Afr. albei - “both” after a subject pronoun or an object
pronoun (you, us, them). Study the following:
• Remember that you must put Ger. beide; Dut. allebei; Afr. albei - “both” after a modal verb or the
first auxiliary verb, or after Ger. sein; Dut. zijn; Afr. wees - “to be” as a main verb (See Verbs p. ). For
instance:
395
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
• Eng. both of is used before relative pronouns (whom, which). However, Ger. and Dut, beide and Afr.
albei must be used after the relative pronoun Ger., Dut. die and Afr. wat - “which” in this case.
2. Ger. beide; Dut. beide/allebei and Afr. albei - “both (of)” must also be used after prepositions.
Observe the following:
To say Eng. both…and, the following expression is used in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
For example:
396

CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
It is worth saying that Ger. keine(-r/-s) von beiden, Dut. geen van beide(n), Afr. geen/
geeneen/nie een van albei…nie - “neither of them” are used as a pronoun to refer to each of two
things or people, when a negative statement is made that includes both of them, for example:
NOTE:
Remember that in Dutch, beide is used for things and beiden for persons. For
example:
In order to say Eng. neither…nor, the following expression is used in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans (See also Negation p. 515):
For instance:
397
CHAPTER 5: PRONOUNS
(The) most - Ger. Die meisten; Dut. De meeste, Afr. Die meeste
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the article die in the expression (die) meeste is commonly
omitted. For example:
398
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
A verb is a word that indicates an action or a state of being, for example: go, live, be.
Overview
German and Dutch verbs, just like English verbs, have categories of mood (indicative, conditional,
subjunctive, and imperative), tense, person, number (two numbers), and voice (active, passive) to
consider in conjugation.
In English, many tenses have a parallel tense in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. In these West
Germanic languages, the indicative mood is used for general statements and consists of six basic tense
forms in German and Dutch, and three main tenses in Afrikaans.
They are divided into simple (one single word) and compound (made up of an auxiliary verb and a
past participle) tense forms. The simple tenses include the present, past. The compound tenses include
the present perfect, pluperfect, future and future prefect. Compound tenses in all these Germanic
languages are formed using the auxiliary verbs “to be” and/or “to have”.
Subjunctive forms are used for statements that are perceived as desired or hypothetical. In West
Germanic languages, they are considered archaic or dialectal and are usually replaced by the indicative or
by a periphrastic conditional phrase. There is also the imperative mood of the verb that does not have
different tenses and is only used for the second person. The imperative mood expresses commands,
orders or instructions.
In total there are the following spoken active-voice forms for each verb in these West Germanic
languages: infinitive, imperative, present, preterite/imperfect/past, perfect, pluperfect, participle.
West Germanic verbs may also take the passive voice. German, Dutch, and Afrikaans use the
passive voice more frequently than English.
The following demonstrates all the moods and tenses of the 1st person singular of the regular verb
Ger. arbeiten; Dut. werken; Afr. werk - “to work”.
Indicative mood
Present tenses
399

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Future tenses
Future ich werde arbeiten ik zal werken; (Ik ga werken) ek sal werk; (ek gaan werk)
Future ich werde gearbeitet haben ik zal gewerkt hebben ek sal gewerk het
Perfect
Conditionals
Present tenses
Past tenses
Imperative mood
Participle
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, owing to the almost total demise of the preterite/imperfect or past
tense, the present prefect tense is also used the preterite or past tense.
400
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Verbs are always learnt in the infinitive form, i.e. the form that has not yet defined who is
performing the action of the verb, which ends in -en in German and Dutch.
In order to conjugate verbs—that is, employ verbs in a sentence, naming the doer of that verb—
one must remove the ending leaving the stem of the verb. In other words, the stem is what is left when the
ending -en of the infinitive is removed (See Infinitive p. 578).
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans and English, there is almost no distinction between the
infinitive and the stem of the verb. Observe the following:
Infinitive Stem
NOTE:
In English, the infinitive is the combination of to and the stem or the base form
of a verb. In order to conjugate verbs in English one must remove this particle
to leaving the stem of the verb.
The present tense of most verbs is formed by adding the appropriate personal endings to the stem
of the verb and the ending it takes depends on its subject in German and Dutch, for example:
In the present tense, the verb uses four different forms in German and three different forms in
Dutch.
However, in Afrikaans, the verbs use only one form in the present tense, which is the infinitive or
the stem, since verbs do not inflect in person or number. To compare:
401
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It is somewhat similar to English verbs, since infinitives are mostly equivalent to verbs in the
present tense, except for the singular 3rd person forms, in which case the suffix “-s” must be added to the
stem, which means that English only has two forms in the present tense.
The table shows all the forms of regular verbs in the present tense:
Below is the conjugation formula of the present tense in the West Germanic languages.
What follows is the conjugation of a regular verb, Ger. trinken, Dut. drinken, Afr. drink - “to
drink” in the present tense.
er, sie, es trinkt hij, zij, het drinkt hy, sy, dit drink he, she, it drinks
402

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
German
In spoken German, it is quite common to drop the final -e of the first person.
However, it should be indicated by the use of an apostrophe if ever done in writing,
for instance:
Dutch
If the pronoun U is used, whether it addresses one or more people the verb is always
singular.
When jij/je follows the verb and its subject, the verb always drops the ending -t
(but not the t of the stem). For example:
Remember that if the pronoun jij/je following the verb is used as the indirect object,
the verb keeps the ending -t:
If hij follows the verb, it is pronounced ie in ordinary speech unless the pronoun
receives special emphasis, e.g.:
Just like in German, in Dutch, the pronouns Ger. sie, Dut. zij - “she” and Ger. sie,
Dut. zij - “they” are identical, but the form of the accompanying verb always
indicates which is intended:
It is worth mentioning that some of these verbs require spelling changes in addition to adding the
personal endings (See Verb Spelling and Vowel Changes p. 406).
403
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
404

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
405

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In German and Duch, the verbs marked with an asterisk require spelling
changes in addition to adding the appropriate personal endings (See Verb
Spelling and Vowel Changes p. 406).
In Afrikaans, the absolute majority of the verbs are regular. There are only two
verbs that differ in the infinitive and the present form of the verb (See
Completely Irregular Verbs in the Present Tense p. 421).
Therefore, it is highly important to regard the special rules for when the spelling or vowels change
in a verb conjugation. Since the rules are very divergent and particular for each language, it makes it
difficult to somehow combine these changes occurring in a verb conjugation of the West Germanic
languages.
So, it is necessary to consider them separately in German and Dutch. Note that in in Afrikaans,
however, conjugations are relatively straightforward compared to German and Dutch, which means that
there are almost no spelling or vowel changes in a verb conjugation.
German
As it was said before, there are also some verbs whose spelling changes in order to preserve the
correct pronunciation (sound) presented in the infinitive in German. Basically, the understanding of these
rules is essential for correct writing in German. Below are the rules of the spelling changes in a verb
conjugation:
406
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• When the stem of a verb ends in -t or -d, an additional -e- is inserted between the stem and an -st (the
2nd person singular) or a -t (the 3rd person singular and the 2nd person plural) ending of the present
tense, for example: arbeiten - to work and finden - to find:
Arbeiten: ich arbeite - du arbeitest - er/sie/es arbeitet - wir arbeiten - ihr arbeitet - sie arbeiten.
Finden: ich finde - du findest - er/sie/es findet - wir finden - ihr findet - sie finden.
Below are some common verbs that add an additional -e- before a -t or -st ending:
antworten to answer
arbeiten to work
bedeuten to mean
lauten to be
warten to wait
enden to end
finden to find
melden to report
senden to send
verbinden to connect
• Verbs whose stem ends in a consonant + n or m also add an -e- before the endings -st and -t in order to
make them easier to pronounce, for instance: öffnen - to open and widmen - to devote:
Öffnen: ich öffne - du öffnest - er/sie/es öffnet - wir öffnen - ihr öffnet - sie öffnen.
Widmen: ich widme - du widmest - er/sie/es widmet - wir widmen - ihr widmet - sie widmen.
atmen to breathe
begegnen to encounter
407

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
bewaffnen to arm
entgegnen to reply
ereignen to occur
leugnen to deny
öffnen to open
rechnen to calculate
regnen to rain
segnen to bless
trocknen to dry
vervollkommnen to perfect
wappnen to prepare
widmen to devote
zeichnen to draw
3. Verbs with a stem ending in -s, -ss, -ß, -tz, -x, or -z:
• When the stem of a verb ends in -s, -ss, -ß, -tz, -x, or -z, the ending used for the 2nd person singular
(du form) is just -t, not -st, which means that the 2nd and 3rd person singular endings look the same,
e.g. heißen - to be called, reisen - to travel.
Ger. Heißen: ich heiße - du heißt - er/sie/es heißt - wir heißen - ihr heißt - sie heißen.
Ger. Reisen: ich reise - du reist - er/sie/es reist - wir reisen - ihr reist - sie reisen.
bremsen to brake
boxen to box/fight
dösen to dose
408

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
entgleisen to derail
grasen to graze
grinsen to grin
hausen to dwell
heißen to be called
hopsen to hop
knipsen to snap
kreisen to circle
leasen to lease
reizen to travel
sitzen to sit
• As we already know, most German verbs end in -en. However, a few verbs end in -eln or -ern. The 1st
person of the verbs ending in -eln drops this e when adding the -e ending of the 1st person singular, but
those ending in -ern do not, for example: lächeln - to smile and wandern - to hike, go walking:
Ger. Lächeln: ich lächle (not lächele) - du lächelst - er/sie/es lächelt - wir lächeln - ihr lächelt - sie
lächeln.
Ger. Wandern: ich wandere (not wandre) - du wanderst - er/sie/es wandert - wir wandern - ihr wandert -
sie wandern.
entwickeln to develop
fordern to demand
handeln to act/trade/negotiate
lächeln to smile
liefern to deliver/provide
regeln to regulate/control
409

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dutch
Many verbs change their stem spelling in the various forms of the conjugation following the
spelling rules in Dutch.
Take, for example, the infinitive form of the verb maken - to make. This infinitive has a long
vowel “a”. In order to conjugate this verb, we need to derive the stem from this infinitive.
Following the rule for deriving the stem from the infinitive (stem = infinitive minus -en), we get:
mak-. The stem has a short vowel “a" (a single, closed vowel). To keep it long, we need to add an extra
“a". The stem then becomes: maak-. Observe the following:
Infinitive: maken —> stem: maak- —> conjugation: ik maak - jij maakt - hij/zij/het/u maakt - wij
maken - jullie maken - zij maken.
NOTE:
See how the plural conjugations for wij - “we”, jullie - “you”, and zij - “they” are
identical to the infinitive form, and the stem is identical to the 1st, 2nd and 4rd
person singular forms.
410
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
If the stem of a verb ends in -t like haten (haat), praten (praat), weten (weet),
the stem does not get the ending -t in the conjugation of the 2nd and the 3rd person
singular (See p. 412). For example:
Remember that when a stem ends in two identical consonants, one must subtract one consonant
in Dutch. For example, leggen - to lay:
Infinitive: leggen —> stem: leg- —> conjugation: ik leg - jij legt - hij/zij/het/u legt - wij leggen - jullie
leggen - zij leggen.
NOTE:
It is worth noting that the plural conjugations for wij - “we”, jullie - “you”, and zij
- “they” are identical to the the infinitive form.
411
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In Dutch, if the stem of a verb ends in -t, the ending -t for the 2nd and 3rd person singular is not
added, for example zitten - to sit, weten - to know:
Infinitive: zitten —> stem: zit- —> conjugation: ik zit - jij zit - hij/zij/het/u zit - wij zitten - jullie
zitten - zij zitten.
Infinitive: weten —> stem: weet- —> conjugation: ik weet - jij weet - hij/zij/het/u weet - wij weten -
jullie weten - zij weten.
When the stem of a verb ends in -d, we do add the ending -t in the 2nd and 3rd person singular,
even though the pronunciation does not change at all, for example rijden - to ride, houden - to hold:
Infinitive: rijden —> stem: rijd- —> conjugation: ik rijd, rij - jij rijdt - hij/zij/het/u rijdt - wij rijden -
jullie rijden - zij rijden.
Infinitive: houden —> stem: houd- —> conjugation: ik houd, hou rij - jij houdt - hij/zij/het/u houdt -
wij houden - jullie houden - zij houden.
NOTE:
The verbs rijden and houden as spoken and written normally drop the ending -d
of the stem as well as the ending -t of the 2nd person singular in the inverted form
(See Asking Questions p. 514).
For example:
412
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Note that if, after subtraction of the ending -en from the infinitive, and possibly the vowel length
correction (See below), the stem ends in v or z, these letters become f and s respectively in the 1st, 2nd,
3rd person singular.
Infinitive: schrijven —> stem: schrijf- —> conjugation: ik schrijf - jij schrijft - hij/zij/het/u schrijft - wij
schrijven - jullie schrijven - zij schrijven.
Infinitive: lezen —> stem: lees- —> conjugation: ik lees - jij leest - hij/zij/het/u leest - wij lezen - jullie
lezen - zij lezen.
413

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In Dutch, there are a few verbs that end in -iën. The dieresis over “e” means that it is the
beginning of a new syllable. The vowel combination “ie" is normally pronounced as /ee/ (as in the English
verb to seek), but iën must be pronounced separately as /ee-ye/.
So when we derive the stem of an -iën verb, we subtract the ending -n, and we keep -e, but we
remove the dieresis from it in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd person singular and we keep it in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd person
plural.
Infinitive: ruziën —> stem: ruzie- —> conjugation: ik ruzie - jij ruziet - hij/zij/het/u ruziet - wij ruziën -
jullie ruziën - zij ruziën.
NOTE:
The 1st person singular of the verb skiën is an exception as we must subtract the
personal ending -e. For instance:
Afrikaans
Remember that in Afrikaans, conjugations are straightforward compared to other West Germanic
languages. Since in Afrikaans, the stem of a verb is identical to its stem in Dutch and since the Afrikaans
verbs do not decline, verbs do not change their stem spelling.
414
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Conjugation
Note that the real indicator of whether verbs are regular or irregular is how they conjugate in the
past tenses (See The Preterite p. 481).
Many German verbs that are irregular in the past are perfectly regular in the present. However,
there are many common irregular verbs that show several irregularities in the present tense as well in
German.
Therefore, we will refer to them as strong verbs, as opposed to the completely irregular verbs (See
Completely Irregular Verbs in The Present Tense in German, Dutch and Afrikaans p. 421).
It should be mentioned that the irregularities normally apply only to the 2nd and 3rd persons
singular in German. We will deal with them below.
NOTE:
Remember that if a verb is irregular in any of the following ways in the present
tense in German, it is almost certainly irregular in the past tenses and will thus be
found in the list of irregular verbs (See List of (Strong) Irregular Verbs in the
Preterite p. 495)
In German, there is a number of strong or irregular verbs whose vowels change the stem. Stem-
changing verbs are normally conjugated the same way as regular verbs, except there is a stem change in
the 2nd person singular (du form) and the 3rd person singular (er/sie/es form) conjugations in the
present tense. There are four main types of stem changes in German.
415
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
‣ e –> i
This type of stem change is considered to be one of the most common in German. Nearly all irregular
verbs whose stem contains an e change that e to i in the second and third persons singular, e.g. geben -
to give, essen - to eat:
Geben: ich gebe - du gibst - er/sie/es gibt - wir geben - ihr gebt - sie geben.
Essen: ich esse - du isst - er/sie/es isst - wir essen - ihr esst - sie essen.
NOTE:
The verbs nehmen and treten show further idiosyncrasies of spelling in the 2nd
and 3rd persons singular. For instance:
Ger. ich nehme - du nimmst - er/sie/es nimmt - wir nehmen - ihr nehmt - sie
nehmen.
Ger. ich trete - du trittst - er/sie/es tritt - wir treten - ihr tretet - sie treten.
416
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
‣ e –> ie
This type of stem change is considered to be less common in German. A much smaller number of verbs
change the e to ie in the 2nd and 3rd persons singular, e.g. lesen - to read:
Lesen: ich lese - du liest - er/sie/es liest - wir lesen - ihr lest - sie lesen.
NOTE:
Like regular verbs, stem-changing verbs whose stems end in -s, -ß, or -z, such as
essen and lesen, drop the -s- in the 2nd person singular (du form) ending.
‣ a –> ä
An extensive number of irregular verbs whose stem contains an a add an Umlaut to the a (ä) in the 2nd
and 3rd persons singular in the present tense, for example schlafen - to sleep:
Schlafen: ich schlafe - du schläfst - er/sie/es schläft - wir schlafen - ihr schlaft - sie schlafen.
417
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Unlike regular verbs, stem-changing verbs whose stems end in -d or -t, such as
braten, halten, laden, and raten, do not add an additional -e- in the 2nd and the
3rd persons singular. Study the following:
Ger. ich brate - du brätst - er/sie/es brät - wir braten - ihr bratet - sie braten.
Ger. ich halte - du hältst - er/sie/es hält - wir halten - ihr haltet - sie halten.
Ger. ich lade - du lädst - er/sie/es lädt - wir laden - ihr ladet - sie laden.
Ger. ich rate - du rätst - er/sie/es rät - wir raten - ihr ratet - sie raten.
‣ au –> äu
There are also several irregular verbs with au in their stem that add an Umlaut to the a (äu) in the 2nd
and 3rd persons singular in the present tense, for instance laufen - to run.
Laufen: ich laufe - du läufst - er/sie/es läuft - wir laufen - ihr lauft - sie laufen.
NOTE:
The is one verb with o in its stem that also takes an Umlaut (ö) in the 2nd and 3rd
persons singular in the present tense, e.g. stoßen - to shove:
Ger. ich stoße - du stößt - er/sie/es stößt - wir stoßen - ihr stoßt - sie stoßen.
It is worth reminding that the (strong) irregular verbs in German are characterized by
unpredictable changes in their roots to show verb tense. These stem changes occur mostly in the past
tense forms, but in some instances, present tense forms are also affected.
Below is the comprehensive list of the most commonly used (strong) irregular verbs in the present
tense, which contains the infinitive and the 3rd person singular form in German:
German English
418
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German English
419

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German English
sein (ist) to be
420

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German English
In West Germanic languages, there are completely irregular verbs in the present tense that do not
fit into any of the above categories. While they share similarities with other types of verbs, their
conjugations are quite unpredictable.
These verbs are very common, so their forms must be memorized by heart.
What follows is the description and conjugation of presented above completely irregular verbs in
the present tense:
421

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be”, the most irregular verb in all of the West
Germanic languages, is conjugated like no other verb in the present tense. It is also used in more different
ways than any other verb.
As an independent verb, it can be used as the link verb “to be”. Furthermore, it often functions as
the auxiliary verb before a past participle (See The Past Participle p. 439).
Below is the conjugation of the verb “to be” in the present tense in West Germanic
Languages.
er, sie, es ist hij, zij, het is hy, sy, dit is he, she, it is
For example:
Afr. Ek is in Berlyn.
- I am in Berlin.
Just like the verb “to be”, the verb Ger. haben, Dut. hebben, Afr. hê - “to have” is used in a
variety of ways.
As an independent verb it means to have, but like the verb to be, it can also be used as the
auxiliary verb before a past participle (See The Past Participle p. 439).
NOTE:
In German, the present tense of haben shows irregularities only in the 2nd and 3rd
persons singular, where the b of the verb stem is omitted.
422
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In Dutch, the verb hebben is not very irregular in the present tense as only the 3rd
person singular has an irregular stem heeft.
Below is the conjugation of the verb “to have” in the present tense in West Germanic
Languages.
er, sie, es hat hij, zij, het heeft hy, sy, dit het he, she, it has
For example:
NOTE:
Remember that in Dutch the form hebt is can also be used with the pronoun u, for
example:
There are other frequently used irregular verbs in the present tense in German and Dutch, which
we need to consider.
Below is a list of other commonly used irregular verbs in German and Dutch:
tun doen to do
423
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans the above mentioned verbs are
regular:
Afrikans English
doen to do
sien to see
weet to know
word to become
kom to come
Below we will consider these irregular verbs in the present tense in German and Dutch:
The verb Ger, tun and Dut. doen - “to do” is only irregular in the present in that it ends in -n,
and not -en, but to conjugate it you just remove the ending -n and add the regular personal endings, as
with Ger. trinken, Dut. drinken above.
We mentioned these verbs here, because their infinitives do not allow us to simply follow the
usual steps for deriving the verb stem. For example:
er, sie, es tut hij, zij, het doet he, she, it does
424
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
For the sake of comparison, we add the conjugation of the regular verb Afr.
doen - “to do” in Afrikaans:
Afrikaans English
ek doen I do
jy doen you do
ons doen we do
In German, the verb sehen - “to see” is a stem-changing verb (e —> ie) in the 2nd and 3rd
persons singular.
In Dutch, just like the verb doen, the verb Dut. zien - to see does not end -en, but in -n, and is
also considered to be regular in the present tense in Dutch. For instance:
er, sie, es sieht hij, zij, het, U ziet he, she, it see
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the verb sien - “to see” is regular. To compare:
425
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Afrikaans English
ek sien I see
Furthermore, in Dutch, just like the verbs doen and zien, there are three more verbs with an
infinitive that end in -n. These are gaan - “to go”, staan - “to stand”, and slaan - “to hit”. All of these
verbs occur quite frequently in Dutch. Otherwise, they are regular in the present tense.
To conjugate these verbs, you should remember that a syllable never ends in a double vowel. The
stems are thus ga, sla, and sta.
In the 2nd and 3rd singular, however, we must write double aa again. Because of the additional
-t, we need a double vowel to keep the sound long. As an example, study the conjugation of the verb gaan
below:
Dutch English
ik ga I go
wij/we gaan we go
NOTE:
Unlike in Dutch, in German and Afrikaans the following verbs are perfectly
regular:
German Afrikaans English
gehen gaan to go
426
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Observe the conjugation of the verb Ger. gehen and Afr. gaan:
German Afrikaans English
The verb werden - “to become” is a stem-changing verb (e —> i). Plus, it drops the personal
ending -t in the 3rd person singular (er/sie/es form) in German. Note that this verb is also the auxiliary
verb we use for the future tense in German (See The Future Tense p. 531). Study the following:
German English
NOTE:
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the verb Dut. worden, Afr. word -
“to become” is regular in the present tense:
Dutch Afrikaans English
hij, zij, het wordt hy, sy, dit word he, she, it becomes
427
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In German, the conjunction of the verb wissen - “to know” is similar to that of the modal verbs
(See Modal Verbs in the Present Tense p. 430).
Additionally, note that the 2nd person singular (du-form) adds only a -t personal ending since the
verb stem ends in ß. Observe the following:
German English
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the verb Dut. weten, Afr. weet - “to know” is also
considered regular.
In Dutch, however, it follows the general spelling rules. In order to conjugate
this verb, we need to add an extra “a” to the stem to make the vowel long
(weet).
In addition, the stem of this verb does not get the ending -t in the conjugation of
the 2nd and the 3rd person singular because it already ends in -t. Study the
following:
Dutch English
ik weet I know
428
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dutch English
In Dutch, the stem vowel of the verb komen - “to come” is short in the singular, but long in the
plural. Observe the following:
Dutch English
It is worth mentioning a few more examples of verbs with the same conjugation as Dutch
komen:
bijkomen to recover
ontkomen to escape
overkomen to hapen to
NOTE:
Unlike in Dutch, in German, the verb kommen - “to come” is perfectly regular
in the present tense:
German English
429
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German English
In German and Dutch, modal verbs can be grouped together not only because they are used in
much the same way but also because their formation is also similar in the present tense.
These verbs can be considered as mixed verbs because they share characteristics of both (strong)
irregular verbs and regular verbs.
For example, modal verbs have characteristic stem changes in their singular forms, but like all
other verbs, the plural forms of all modal verbs are perfectly regular.
NOTE:
In Dutch, the modal verb moeten and willen are regular and conjugated
according to the general rules. However, willen has one little extravagancy. In
the 3rd person singular of the present tense, we do not add the ending -t to the
stem (See below).
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, all the modal verbs are regular and
are used in the same way as we use them in English, which means that we use
the same form of the modal verbs for the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd persons singular and
plural:
Afrikaans English
430
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Afrikaans English
wil to want to
What follows is the conjugation of modal verbs in the present tense in German, Dutch, and
Afrikaans.
Below is the conjugation of the verb “can, be able to” in the present tense in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans.
er, sie, es kann hij, zij, het, U kan hy, sy, dit kan he, she, it can
NOTE:
In Dutch, the 2nd person singular forms kan and kunt are both correct.
- I can swim.
431
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In Dutch, the verb kunnen as spoken and written normally drop the -t of the
second person singular in the inverted (question) form. To compare:
Dutch
Verb Should - Ger. Sollen, Dut. Zullen (Zou/Zouden) Moeten , Afr. Moet
Below is the conjugation of the verb “should” in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
er, sie, es soll/sollte hij, zij, het, U zou moeten hy, sy, dit moet he, she, it should
sie, Sie sollen/sollten zij zouden moeten hulle moet they should
Note that in German, the present and past tenses are used to express “should”. In the present
tense, sollen shows how something should definitively occur. The simple past form implies that
something should happen, but might not.
In Dutch, zullen must be used in the past form (zouden) together with another modal verb
moeten to express “should”. However, zouden moeten is used when something should happen, but
might not, while moeten (without zouden) shows that something should definitively occur.
432
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
- I should do it.
Below is the conjugation of the verb “may, to be allowed” in the present tense in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans.
er, sie, es darf hij, zij, het, U mag hy, sy, dit mag he, she, it may
- May I go?
Below is the conjugation of the verb “must, have to” in the present tense in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans.
er, sie, es muss hij, zij, het, U moet hy, sy, dit moet he, she, it must
433

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
- We must do it.
Below is the conjugation of the verb “to want to” in the present tense in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans.
er, sie, es will hij, zij, het, U wil hy, sy, dit wil he, she, it wants to
NOTE:
In Dutch, the modal verb willen has an exception. In the 3rd person singular of
the present tense, we do not add the ending -t to the stem.
434
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The above irregularities in the forming of the present tense of German, Dutch, Afrikaans, and
English verbs occur overwhelmingly in very frequently used verbs, which is what makes remembering
them quite easy as you will be confronted with these completely irregular verbs so frequently that they will
cease to look irregular.
It is relevant to note that whereas English has multiple present tense forms, German, Dutch and
Afrikaans has one form of the present tense. The German and Dutch present tense is equivalent to all of
the present tense English forms. Study the following:
du isst jij eet jy eet you eat, you are eating, you do eat
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, there are also progressive or continuous constructions
which are usually used to emphasize the continuity of an action (See p. 570)
The present tense in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is used in the same cases as in English. It has
five main uses:
• To identify an action that takes place in the present or at the moment of speech:
Ger. Es regnet.
435
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Habitual actions
• To indicate the regular repetitive action or things that one does as a habit:
- He travels a lot.
Universal truths
• To indicate the action that is not referred to a certain moment, but refers to general statements,
scientific definitions, proverbs and etc.:
436
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Der Mount Everest ist der höchste Berg der Erde.
• To refer to close or planned future especially when future time is clearly indicated in some other way, i.e.
usually by an adverbial expression of time (next week, tomorrow, etc.):
Did you know? Ger. Ich gehe heute Abend ins Kino.
The Austrian flag dates from 1191, Dut. Ik ga vanavond naar de bioscoop.
which makes it one of the oldest
national flags in the world. Afr. Ek gaan vanaand bioskoop toe.
437
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
The German, Dutch, and Afrikaans equivalent for “will" Ger. werden, Dut.
zullen, Afr. sal can be used as well, but it is less common and can make a
sentence sound quite stiff (See The Future Tense p. 531).
• The present tense is most often used in temporal and conditional clauses in West Germanic languages
(See The Conditional Tense p. 537):
NOTE:
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the auxiliary verb Ger.
werden, Dut. zullen, Afr. sal - “will” after an “if or when clause” is also used:
• In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the present tense together with the prepositions of time Ger. seit,
Dut. sinds, Afr. sedert - “since” can be used to describe an action that started in the past and still
continues in the present. In English, the present perfect continuous is used in this case (See also
Prepositions p. 676).
438
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Also, be careful to avoid the incorrect use of the German, Dutch and Afrikaans present perfect for
English expressions like, “I have lived in Berlin for two years (now)”.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, that would be expressed in the present tense with the same
prepositions of time Ger. seit, Dut. sinds, Afr. sedert. Observe the following:
In order to ask the question “since when”, Ger. seit wann, Dut. sinds wanneer; Afr. van
wanneer af are used. Study the following:
What follows is the example of the past participle used in the present perfect in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans:
439

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The above example shows that Ger. gewohnt, Dut. gewoond, Afr. gewoon is the past participle
of the regular verb Ger. wohnen, Dut. wonen, Afr. woon - “to live, reside, dwell”.
The past participles in all of the West Germanic languages can be divided into two major groups
according to whether:
1. the past participle is formed by the addition of a prefix and/or suffix to the stem. This group of verbs is
called “weak verbs”. For example:
NOTE:
In Dutch, as seen in the previous examples (wonen > gewoond), many regular
verbs change their stem spelling in the past participle following the spelling
rules in Dutch (See p. 442).
2. the past participle is formed by the addition of a prefix and/or suffix to the stem and a vowel change in
the stem itself. This category of verbs is called “strong verbs”. For instance:
NOTE:
It must be mentioned that the historical distinction between regular and
irregular verb forms has died out in favour of the former in Afrikaans.
So, all the past participle forms are regular in this Germanic language.
440
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In English, the past participle of regular verbs end in -d/-ed. In German and Dutch, the past
participle of a regular verb is formed by attaching the prefix -ge to the beginning of the stem of the verb.
Remember that verb stems are the infinitives minus the -en, with the appropriate spelling changes in
German and Dutch.
In addition to this prefix, regular verbs in German and Dutch form the past participle by adding
the suffix -t (or also -d in Dutch) to the end of the stem of the verb.
NOTE:
To derive the past participle in Afrikaans, one only needs to add the prefix -ge
to the stem (infinitive). No suffixes are added to the end of the past participle.
Below is a table presenting how the past participle of regular verbs is formed in all of the
West Germanic languages:
441
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It is worth noting that some of these verbs require spelling changes when deriving the stem of the
verbs and adding the prefix -ge and/or suffixes -t or -d (in German and Dutch).
442

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
* The German and Dutch verbs marked with an asterisk require spelling changes in addition to
adding the prefix -ge and the suffixes -t or -d (See Verb Spelling Changes of Regular Verbs in the
Past Participle in German and Dutch p. 443).
It is important to regard the special rules for when the spelling or vowels change in a verb
conjugation in the past participle.
Since the rules are very divergent and particular for each language, it makes it difficult to
somehow combine these changes occurring in a verb conjugation of these West Germanic languages. So, it
is necessary to consider them separately in German and Dutch.
German
Just like in a verb conjugation of the present tense, in the past participle, there are also some
verbs whose spelling changes in order to preserve the correct pronunciation (sound) presented in the
infinitive in German (Verb Spelling and Vowel Changes in The Present Tense p. 406).
Below are the rules of the spelling changes in the past participle:
• When the stem of a verb ends in -t or -d, an additional -e- is inserted between the stem and the suffix -t,
for example:
443

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Below are some common verbs that add an additional -e- before the suf x -t in German:
• Verbs whose stem ends in a consonant + n or m also add an -e- before the suffix -t in the past participle
in order to make them easier to pronounce, for instance:
444

fi
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• Remember that if any regular or (strong) irregular verbs start with unstressed inseparable prefixes be-,
emp-, ent-, er-, ge-, miss-, über-, ver-, zer-, one forms the past participle without the prefix ge- and
with the -(e)t ending (See Inseparable Verbal Prefixes p. 622). For instance:
NOTE:
German
Note that verbs with the inseparable prefix ge- do not add an additional ge- in the
past participle:
445
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
446

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
German
It is worth mentioning that verbs with separable prefixes include the ge-
between the prefix and the verb stem in the past participle (See Separable
Verbal Prefixes p. 596):
• Additionally, verbs that end in -ieren, omit the prefix ge- in the past participle. These verbs are all
regular (weak), so their past participles end in -t, for example:
NOTE:
German
It is worth saying that most of the verbs that end with -ieren in German are
derived from French.
447
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dutch
Just like in a verb conjugation of the present tense, in the past participle, many verbs change their
stem spelling following the general spelling rules in Dutch.
It is important to familiarize yourself with the general Dutch spelling rules, so that the stem rules
presented above and below will not come as a surprise (See Verb Spelling and Vowel Changes in
The Present Tense p. 406).
In Dutch, the choice of the ending -t or -d in the past participle tense is determined by the
consonant in the stem. Study the following:
• -t
If the stem of a verb ends in voiceless consonants -t, -k, -f, -s, -ch, -p, the suffix -t is used in
addition to the prefix -ge in order to form the past participle. Let us take, for example, the verbs werken
- to work, wensen - to wish:
NOTE:
Dutch
Remember that the stem of a verb that ends in t, do not add an additional -t in
the past participle, for example zetten - to set, kosten - to cost:
448
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• -d
When the stem of a verb does not have any of the above consonants, the suffix -d is used along
with the prefix -ge to form the past participle, e.g. bouwen - to build, vragen - to ask:
NOTE:
Dutch
If the stem of a verb ends in d, one does not add an additional -d in the past
participle, for example antwoorden - to answer, baden - to bath:
449
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Verbs that have v or z in the infinitive, also add the suffix -d. However, note that this suffix is
added to the stem of the verb (not the infinitive) to form the past participle, e.g. leven - to live:
NOTE:
Remember that even though the verb stems change the letters v and z to the
letters f and s respectively, the pronunciation of the past participle forms is sill
450
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
pronounced with the sounds [v] or [z]. For instance: /geloovd/, /geglanzd/, /
geleevd/, /gereizd/.
Note that, just like in German, in Dutch, if any regular or (strong) irregular verbs begin with
unstressed inseparable prefixes be-, er-, ge-, her-, mis-, ont-, over-, toe-, ver-, the past participle is
formed without the prefix ge- and with the -t/-d ending (See Inseparable Verbal Prefixes p. 622).
For example:
NOTE:
In Dutch, verbs with the inseparable prefix ge- do not add an additional ge- in
the past participle:
451
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
It should be said that in Dutch, verbs with separable prefixes get the ge- ending
between the prefix and the verb stem in the past participle (See also Separable
Verbal Prefixes p. 596):
• Additionally, unlike German, many Dutch verbs that end in -eren, do require the prefix ge- in the past
participle regardless of the length of the verb. These verbs are all regular (weak), so their past participles
end in -t/-d. Compare the following:
452
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Unlike the regular (weak) verbs which use the same infinitive stem and add the appropriate
prefixes and/or endings to form the past participle, the irregular (strong) verbs, in addition to prefixes
and/or suffixes, have stem changes to form the past participle in West Germanic languages.
Note that these stem changes are not predictable and must be learned by heart or looked up in a
dictionary. For easy reference, there is a comprehensive list of the irregular (strong) verbs in West
Germanic languages. (See List of (Strong) Irregular Verbs in the Past Participle p. 455).
453
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Just like the past participle of regular (weak) verbs, in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, the past
participle of irregular (strong) verbs is formed by attaching the prefix -ge to the beginning of the stem of
the verb.
In addition to this prefix added to the beginning of the verb stem that have a vowel change in the
stem itself, irregular verbs in German and Dutch, form the past participle by adding the suffix -en to the
end of the stem of the verb.
NOTE:
Remember that in Afrikaans the absolute majority of the past participle forms
are regular.
To form the past participle, one only adds the prefix -ge to the stem (infinitive).
One does not add any suffixes to the end of the verb stem.
Below is a table presenting how the past participle of irregular verbs is formed in all of the
West Germanic languages:
As seen from the table, the common form of irregularity in the past perfect is the changing of the
vowel in the stem of the irregular verb in German and Dutch, exactly as in English where we say “drunk”
(not “drinked”), or “spoken” (not “speaked”) etc. Observe the following:
Remember that, in German and Dutch, if any (strong) irregular verbs begin with unstressed
inseparable prefixes:
Dutch: be-, er-, ge-, her-, mis-, ont-, over-, toe-, ver-,
German: be-, emp-, ent-, er-, ge-, miss-, über-, ver-, zer-,
one forms the past participle without the prefix ge- and with the -en ending. Study the following:
454
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Just like in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, the (strong) irregular verbs that
begin with unstressed inseparable prefixes are also formed without the prefix
ge-. To illustrate:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, verbs with the inseparable prefix ge- do not add an additional
ge- in the past participle. For instance: Afr. geniet > geniet
However, it should also be noted that (strong) irregular verbs with separable prefixes get the ge-
between the prefix and the verb stem in the past participle in German, Dutch and Afrikaans (See
Separable Verbal Prefixes p. 596). Observe the following:
Remember that the (strong) irregular verbs in West Germanic languages are always marked by
unpredictable changes in their roots to demonstrate verb tenses. These stem changes also occur in the
past participle forms that are used to construct perfect tenses. To know what these root changes are is
important to properly use the strong verbs.
Below you will find a comprehensive list of all (strong) irregular verbs, which contains the
infinitives and the past participle forms, which need to be memorized.
455
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
It is worth reminding that the historical distinction between regular and
irregular past participle forms has died out in favour of the former in
Afrikaans.
So, almost all of the past participle forms listed below are regular and are put in
the list for the sake of comparison with other Germanic languages.
Below is a list of verbs, the past participles of which are irregular in all or some of the West
Germanic languages:
456
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
457

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
458

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
459

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
460

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
461

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
462

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
463

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
wenden (mixed) (gewandt) wenden* (gewend) wend (gewend) to turn to, consult,
address
werben (geworben) werven (geworven) werf (gewerf) to enlist, recruit
464

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The underlined past participles are regular in German and Dutch (See Formation of the Past
Participle of Regular (Weak) Verbs p. 441).
NOTE:
The mixed verbs are marked in brackets in German (See Mixed Verbs in the
Past Participle in German p. 465).
In Afrikaans, as you can see, there is only one verb that differs in the infinitive
and the past participle form of the verb, which is hê - “to have”.
It is seen from the table that the range of German and Dutch irregular past participles are quite
similar to each other. In this regard, it can be argued that there is a partial convergence of irregular past
participle forms in these two West Germanic languages.
Once you know these above mentioned irregular forms, you can easily conjugate strong verbs in
the preterite tense.
Mixed verbs share characteristics of both (strong) irregular verbs and (weak) regular verbs. Like
(weak) regular verbs, the mixed verbs use the prefix -ge and the suffix -(e)t in the past participle forms.
Like the (strong) irregular verbs in the past participle, they also have a stem vowel change. These
verbs are quite few in number in German, for example: brennen - to burn and wissen - to know:
It is worth mentioning that the modal verbs are a subset of the mixed verbs. Modal verbs are like
the rest of the mixed verbs, in that they:
• have a changed stem past participle forms, except for of sollen - “will, should” and wollen - “to want
to”;
465
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• use the suffix -(e)t in the past participle, for example: dürfen - “may, to be allowed” and müssen -
“must, have to”:
• As an adjective
Past participles in West Germanic languages can be used as adjectives when the action is finished or has
been completed and must agree in gender, number, and/or in case (in German) with the nouns they
modify. (See The Past Participle as an Adjective p. 169) For example:
- A translated book.
• As a predicative adjective
Past participles can also act as predicative adjectives when used in conjugation with a linking verb
Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be”.
This can be referred to as the statal passive in analogy with the structure of passive voice (See
also Predicate Adjectives Followed by a Fixed Preposition p. 172).
466
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It should be noted that the verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees + past participle describes a
particular state, whereas the use of the passive voice means a process or its end result (See The Passive
Voice p. 561).
In this case, they do not agree in gender and number with the nouns they modify in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans. For example:
The perfect tense is often referred to as the present perfect or the compound past tense,
contrasting with the preterite, imperfect, or simple past tense (See The Preterite p. 481).
In English the present perfect is formed by combining a finite form of the verb “to have” with the
past participle, e.g. “He has played”. German, Dutch and Afrikaans are similar in the way in which they
form this tense.
In these West Germanic languages, the present perfect is formed by the combining present
indicative of the auxiliary verb Ger. haben; Dut. hebben; Afr. hê - “to have”, which is conjugated to the
subject of the sentence, and the past participle.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, owing to the almost total demise of the preterite, imperfect, or simple
past tense, the prefect tense is normally called the preterite or past tense.
467
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
habe
hast
German haben hat
haben
habt
haben
Afrikaans hê het
- I have danced.
It is worth mentioning that the important difference from English, is that in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, the auxiliary verb and past participle are not normally placed next to one another if there are
any objective nouns in the sentence.
In a regular sentence, in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, the auxiliary verb Ger. haben; Dut.
hebben; Afr. hê is put immediately after the subject and the past participle is always placed at the end of
the clause after objective nouns. Remember that the auxiliary verb can also be positioned second in the
sentence.
In English, however, the auxiliary verb to have and the past participle are both placed
immediately after the subject. To compare:
Below is the standard pattern of the word order of a regular sentence in the present perfect:
German
Dutch Subject + auxiliary verb (Ger. haben; Dut. hebben; Afr. hê) + objective nouns +
Afrikaans past participle
468
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
English Subject + auxiliary verb (Eng. to have) + past participle + objective nouns.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the auxiliary verbs Ger. haben; Dut.
hebben; Afr. hê also separate from the past participle if there are object
pronouns in the sentence, they are placed after the auxiliary verb, and the past
participle goes to the end of the sentence.
In English, however, the auxiliary verb to have does not separate from the past
participle. If there is an object pronoun in a regular sentence, it is placed at the
end of the clause.
To compare:
Formation of the Present Perfect with the Verb to be in German and Dutch
In German and Dutch, the auxiliary verb Ger. sein; Dut. zijn - “to be” is used with intransitive
verbs (meaning they do not have a direct object), particularly those which are used to talk about
movement, a transition from one state to another, or a change of place or state) in order to form the
present perfect.
469
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Unlike other Germanic languages, the Afrikaans present perfect tense is always
formed using the auxiliary verb Afr. hê - “to have”.
The majority of the intransitive verbs that take Ger. sein, Dut zijn - “to be” in the perfect tense
are (strong) irregular.
German and Dutch have a similar group of (strong) irregular and (weak) regular intransitive
verbs with which the auxiliary verb Ger. sein; Dut. zijn is used. Remember that in Afrikaans, the
auxiliary verb Afr. hê - “to have” must always be used with all groups of verbs.
Below is a list of some common (strong) irregular intransitive verbs in West Germanic
languages:
ablaufen uitgaan (is uitgegaan) uitgaan (het uitgegaan) to expire (has expired),
(ist ausgegangen) to run off (has run off)
ankommen aankomen aankom to arrive
(ist angekommen) (is aangekomen) (het aangekom) (has arrived)
eintreffen arriveren arriveer
(ist eingetroffen) (is gearriveerd) (het gearriveer)
ausgehen uitgaan (is uitgegaan) uitgaan (het uitgegaan) to go out (has gone
(ist ausgegangen) out)
470
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
beginnen* beginnen (is begonnen) begin (het begin) to begin (has begun)
(hat begonnen)
bersten (ist geborsten) barsten (is gebarsten) bars (het gebars) to burst (has burst)
platzen (is geplatzt)
biegen (ist gebogen) buigen* (heeft gebogen) buig (het gebuig) to bend (has bent),
to turn (has turned)
brechen# breken# breek (gebreek) to break (has broken)
(ist/hat gebrochen) (is/heeft gebroken)
eindringen binnen-dringen dring (het gedring) to penetrate (has
(ist eingedrungen) (is binnen-gedrongen) penetrated)
erscheinen verschijnen verskyn to appear
(ist erschienen) (is verschenen) (het verskyn) (has appeared)
erschrecken schrikken skrik (het geskrik) to be startled (has been
(ist erschrocken) (is geschrokken) startled)
fahren+ rijden+ ry (het gery) to drive (has driven),
(ist/hat gefahren) (is/heeft gereden) to go (has gone)
fallen (ist gefallen) vallen (is gevallen) val (het geval) to fall (has fallen)
gehen (ist gegangen) gaan (is gegaan) gaan (het gegaan) to go (has gone),
lopen+ loop (het geloop) to walk (has walked)
(is/heeft gelopen)
gelingen (ist gelungen) slagen (is geslaagd) slaag (het geslaag) to succeed (has
succeeded)
genesen (ist genesen) genezen# genees (het genees) to cure (has cured)
(is/heeft genezen)
geschehen gebeuren (is gebeurd) gebeur (het gebeur) to occur
(ist geschehen) (has occurred)
gleiten (ist geglitten) glijden+ gly (het gegly) to glide (has glided),
(is/heeft gegleden) to slide (has slid)
kommen (ist gekommen) komen (is gekomen) kom (het gekom) to come (has come)
471

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
kriechen (ist gekrochen) kruipen+ kruip (het gekruip) to crawl (has crawled)
(is/heeft gekropen)
laufen (ist gelaufen) lopen+ loop (het geloop) to run (has run)
(is/heeft gelopen)
misslingen mislukken+ misluk to fail (has failed)
(ist misslungen) (is/heeft mislukt) (het misluk)
quellen (ist gequollen) zwellen (is gezwollen) swel (het geswel) to swell (has swelled)
schwellen
(ist geschwollen)
reißen+ (ist/hat gerissen) rijten* (heeft gereten) ruk (het geruk) to rip (has ripped),
to tear (has torn)
reiten+ (ist/hat geritten) rijden* (heeft gereden) ry (het gery) to ride (a horse)
(has ridden)
rennen+ (mixed) rennen+ loop (het geloop) to run (has run)
(ist/hat gerannt) (is/heeft gerend)
schießen+ schieten+ skiet (het geskiet) to shoot (has shot)
(ist/hat geschossen) (is/heeft geschoten)
schleichen sluipen+ sluip (het gesluip) to sneak (has sneaked)
(ist geschlichen) (ist/hat geslopen)
schlittern slippen (is geslipt) gly (het gegly) to slide (has slid),
(ist geschlittert) to slip (has slipped)
schleudern slingeren slinger (het geslinger) to fling (has flung),
(ist/hat geschleudert) (heeft geslingerd) to hurl (hurled)
schmelzen# smelten# smelt (het gesmelt) to melt (has melted)
(ist/hat geschmolzen) (is/heeft gesmolten)
schreiten schrijden sryd (het gesryd) to stride (has strid)
(ist geschritten) (is geschreden)
schrumpfen krimpen krimp (het gekrimp) to shrink (has shrunk
(ist/hat geschrumpft) (is gekrompen)
schweben+ zweven+ sweef (het gesweef) to float (has floated)
(ist/hat geschwebt) (is/heeft gezweefd)
schwimmen+ zwemmen+ swem (het geswem) to swim (has swum)
(ist/hat geschwommen) (is/heeft gezwommen)
schwinden slinken (is geslonken) slink (het geslink) to dwindle
(ist geschwunden) (has dwindled)
sinken (ist gesunken) zinken (is gezonken) sink (het gesink) to sink (has sunk)
sprießen (ist gesprossen) spruiten (is gesproten) spruit (het gespruit) to sprout (has
sprouted)
springen (ist gesprungen) springen springen to jump (has jumped)
(is gesprongen) (het gespring)
472

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
steigen (ist gestiegen) stijgen (is gestegen) styg (het gestyg) to rise (has risen),
to climb (has climbed)
sterben (ist gestorben) sterven (is gestorven) sterf (het gesterf) to die (has died)
stoßen (ist/hat gestoßen) stoten* (heeft gestoten) stoot (het gestoot) to bump (has bumped),
to push (has pushed)
tauchen+ duiken+ duik (het geduik) to dive (has dived)
(ist/hat getaucht) (is/heeft gedoken)
treiben+ drijven+ dryf (het gedryf) to drive (has driven),
(ist/hat getrieben) (is/heeft gedreven) to drift (has drifted)
treten+ (ist/hat getreten) treden+ trap (het getrap) to step (has stepped),
(is/heeft getreden) to tread (has treaded
verderben# bederven# bederf to spoil (has spoiled),
(ist/hat verdorben) (is/heeft bedorven) (het bederf) to ruin (has ruined)
verschleißen+ verslijten* verslyt to wear out (has worn
(ist/hat verschlissen) (heeft versleten) (het verslyt) out) (by use)
verschwinden verdwijnen verdwyn to disappear
(ist verschwunden) (is verdwenen) (het verdwyn) (has disappeared)
wachsen (ist gewachsen) groeien (is gegroeid) groei (het gegroei) to grow (has grown)
weichen (ist gewichen) wijken (is geweken) wyk (het gewyk) to yield (has yielded)
ziehen+ (ist/hat gezogen) trekken+ trek (het getrek) to pull (has pulled),
(is/heeft getrokken) to draw (has drawn)
zurückkommen terugkomen terugkom to return
(ist zurückgekommen) (is teruggekomen) (het teruggekom) (has returned)
Remember that the underlined past participle forms are regular in German and Dutch.
NOTE:
German and Dutch
1) Verbs that take the auxiliary verb Ger. haben; Dut. hebben - “to have” to
form the perfect tense are shown with an asterisk (*).
2) Verbs that are both transitive and intransitive are indicted with a plus (+). In
German and Dutch, if one uses the verb intransitively, one has to use the
auxiliary verb Ger. sein, Dut zijn - “to be”. If the verb is used used transitively,
one must use Ger. haben; Dut. hebben - “to have”. Compare the following:
473
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
To identify whether one uses the transitive or the intransitive form, remember
to associate the transitive with a direct object. This will also help us identify
those verbs that can be both.
3) Verbs that can be used with both Ger. haben; Dut. hebben and Ger. sein,
Dut zijn are shown with a hashtag (#). One usually uses the auxiliary verb Ger.
sein, Dut zijn with these verbs to talk about a movement or a change.
We will also present a list of (weak) regular verbs that require Ger. sein; Dut. zijn - “to be” in the
perfect tense because they indicate motion or a change of state in German and Dutch respectively.
Remember that in Afrikaans, unlike in German and Dutch, all the verbs require Afr. hê - “to
have” in the perfect tense.
Below is a list of some (weak) regular intransitive verbs used with the verb “to be” in German
and Dutch:
474
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
For example:
It is worth mentioning that, in German and Dutch, there are several verbs that also use the
auxiliary verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn - “to be” to form the present perfect, although they show no change of
place or state.
In Afrikaans, however, these verbs take the auxiliary verb Afr. hê - “to have” when forming the
present perfect:
For instance:
475

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, as seen from the above example, the past participle form of wees
-> gewees (to be -> been) is rarely used. It is usually replaced with was in the
present perfect.
The past participle form gewees can be used along with the auxiliary verb hê
(het) - “to have (had)” when a modal verb is used in the present perfect:
Recall that in the passive voice, the auxiliary verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn - “to be” is always used
(See The Passive Voice p. 561)
In German and Dutch, the present perfect is used more and the preterite (imperfect or simple
past) correspondingly less than in English, particularly in speech (See Special Use of the Present
Perfect in German and Dutch p. 481).
476
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The English grammar requires us to use the preterite when an action happened in the past, but in
German and Dutch, there are no such restrictions. The present perfect tense is roughly equivalent in
meaning to the preterite (imperfect or past simple) tense. Both are normally used to narrate actions or
events that has occurred in the past. (See The Preterite p. 481).
NOTE:
Remember that in Afrikaans, no formal distinction is made between the present
perfect and preterite. The perfect tense is called the preterite or past tense and is
used to refer to actions or events that has occurred in the past.
• To describe situations and actions that happened in the past, without fixing it in time. Also, it is used for
actions that happened in the recent past, which usually refer to what someone has done:
NOTE:
With expressions of time that refer to a more specific moment in the past or ones
that refer to a time that is over, German and Dutch tend to use the present
perfect, whereas English prefer to use the preterite.
Just like in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, the present perfect is used to
express past events since the preterite tense has disappeared.
Below is a list of some time adverbials that refer to a definite point in the past in West
Germanic languages:
477
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In the Netherlands there are over Dut. Ik heb hem gisteren gezien.
1,000 windmills spread across the
Afr. Ek het hom gister gesien.
country. The UNESCO World Heritage Site of
Kinderdijk is one of the best places to see - I saw him yesterday.
Dutch windmills.
• With expressions of time (time adverbials) that do not refer to a specific moment in the past or ones that
refer to a time that isn’t over yet (See also Adverbs of Time p. 184):
Below is a list of some common time adverbials that refer to an indefinite moment in the past
in West Germanic languages:
478
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
schon al al already
For example:
The Bloukrans Bridge, Western Cape, Dut. We hebben hem net gezien.
South Africa, is the highest commercial
bungee jump in the world. It is 216m (709 ft) Afr. Ons het hom net gesien.
high and falls over the Bloukrans river valley. - We have just seen him.
• To describe actions that happened in the past and/or continue into the present. For example:
NOTE:
When an action that began in the past and continues at the present tense,
German, Dutch, and Afrikaans also use the present tense, usually accompanied
by Ger. seit, Dut. al, Afr. al as the action of the verb is expected to be still
ongoing:
479
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The Lærdal Tunnel, Norway, is the Dut. Waar heb je Afrikaans geleerd?
world’s longest road tunnel. It is 15
miles (24.5 km) long and connects the small Afr. Waar het jy Afrikaans geleer?
communities of Lærdal and Aurland.
- Where have you learned Afrikaans?
Dut. Als hij Duits heeft geleerd, kan hij hier werken.
Note that in questions that begin with Ger. Wie lange?; Dut. Hoe lang?; Afr. Hoe lank? -
“How long?”, one should use:
• the perfect tense if the main interest is the duration of the event rather than a specific point in time. For
example:
NOTE:
Dutch
Remember that in Dutch, one usually uses the preterite tense if the duration of
the event is not important (See The Preterite p. 481)
480
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Afrikaans
Since the preterite of all verbs in Afrikaans has disappeared, the present perfect
is always used to express past events and actions:
It is notable that in conversational German the present perfect tense is used as the preterite tense,
which is the most common tense to talk about past events and actions.
The preterite (or simple past) tense, however, is used mostly in written German to narrate past
events and actions.
Unlike in German, in Dutch the present perfect and the preterite tense are equally used in
conversational contexts. One can often mix up these two tenses and there are no strict rules that indicate
when to use which tense in Dutch.
The Preterite
Overview
The preterite is also referred to as the simple past tense and the imperfect tense, contrasting with
the perfect or compound past tense. It is important to note that the difference between a regular and an
irregular verb really comes to the fore in the past tenses in German and Dutch.
For example, verbs like Ger. trinken, Dut. drinken - “to drink” and many others, don’t differ
from regular verbs in the present, but they certainly do in the past. Compare the following:
481

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The verbs in German and Dutch can be divided into two major groups according to whether:
1. the preterite is formed by the addition of a suffix to the stem. This group of verbs is called “weak verbs”.
For example:
2. the preterite is formed by a vowel change in the stem itself. This category of verbs is called “strong
verbs”. For instance:
NOTE:
Afrikaans
With the few exceptions dealt with in this chapter, the imperfect tense of all
verbs has disappeared in Afrikaans.
There is only a handful of irregular verbs whose preterite (imperfect) form still
survives today (See p. 504).
The preterite of regular (weak) verbs is formed by dropping the infinitive ending -en and adding
the appropriate personal ending to the present infinitive stem of a verb in German and Dutch.
Below is the formula for the formation of the preterite tense of regular verbs:
482
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Below is a table demonstrating the endings of regular verbs in the preterite tense in West
Germanic languages:
What follows is the conjugation of a regular verb, Ger. tanzen, Dut. dansen - “to dance” in the
preterite tense.
er, sie, es tanzte hij, zij, het, U danste he, she, it danced
483

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Remember that in German and Dutch, the verbs marked with an asterisk require spelling changes
in addition to adding the appropriate personal endings (See below Verb Spelling and Vowel
Changes).
NOTE:
In Dutch, the verbs vragen and zeggen also have irregular form vroeg and
zei respectively.
It is important to regard the special rules for when the spelling or vowels change in a verb
conjugation in the preterite. Since the rules are very divergent and particular for each language, it makes
it difficult to somehow combine these changes occurring in a verb conjugation of the West Germanic
languages. So, it is necessary to consider them separately in German and Dutch.
German
Just like in a verb conjugation of the present tense (See Present Tense p. 401), in the preterite
tense, there are also some verbs whose spelling changes in order to preserve the correct pronunciation
(sound) presented in the infinitive in German.
• When the stem of a verb ends in -t or -d, an additional -e- is inserted between the stem and the -te,
-test, -te, -ten, -tet and -ten endings in the preterite, for example: arbeiten - to work and reden - to
talk:
Arbeiten: ich arbeitete - du arbeitetest - er/sie/es arbeitete - wir arbeiteten - ihr arbeitetet - sie
arbeiteten.
Reden: ich redete - du redetest - er/sie/es redete - wir redeten - ihr redetet - sie redeten.
Below are some common verbs that add an additional -e- before a -te, -test, -te, -ten, -tet
and -ten ending:
antworten to answer
484
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
arbeiten to work
bedeuten to mean
enden to end
falten to fold
kosten to cost
reden to talk
senden to send
warten to wait
• Verbs whose stem ends in a consonant + n or m also add an -e- before the endings -te, -test, -te, -ten,
-tet and -ten in the preterite in order to make them easier to pronounce, for instance: öffnen - to open
and widmen - to devote:
Öffnen: ich öffnete - du öffnetest - er/sie/es öffnete - wir öffneten - ihr öffnetet - sie öffneten.
Widmen: ich widmete - du widmetest - er/sie/es widmete - wir widmeten - ihr widmetet - sie widmeten.
atmen to breathe
öffnen to open
widmen to devote
zeichnen to draw
Dutch
In Dutch, the choice of the ending -te/-ten or -de/-den in the preterite tense is determined by
the consonant in the stem. Study the following:
• -te/-ten
If the stem of a verb ends in voiceless consonants -t, -k, -f, -s, -ch, -p, the ending -te/-ten is
used, for example zetten - to set, straffen - to punish:
Infinitive: zetten —> stem: zet- —> conjugation: ik zette - jij zette - hij/zij/het/u zette - wij zetten -
jullie zetten - zij zetten.
Infinitive: straffen —> stem: straf- —> conjugation: ik strafte - jij strafte - hij/zij/het/u strafte - wij
straften - jullie straften - zij straften.
485

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• -de/-den
When the stem of a verb does not have any of the above consonants, the ending -de/-den is used
to form the preterite, e.g. antwoorden - to answer:
Infinitive: antwoorden —> stem: antwoord- —> conjugation: ik antwoordde - jij antwoordde - hij/
zij/het/u antwoordde - wij antwoordden - jullie antwoordden - zij antwoordden.
Below are some common verbs that take the -de/-den ending:
lenen (hij leende, ze leenden) to lend, borrow (he lent/borrowed, they lent/
borrowed)
486

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
It should be noted that the double -tt- and -dd- is a spelling convention and is
pronounced like single t and d. The ending -n is also dropped in ordinary
speech: praten and antwoorden (infinitives), praatte and antwoordde
(preterite, singular), praatten and antwoordden (preterite, plural) are all
pronounced alike in Dutch.
Verbs that have v or z in the infinitive also add the endings -de/-den. However, note that these
endings are added to the stem of the verb in the preterite, e.g. leven - to live:
Infinitive: leven —> stem: leef- —> conjugation: ik leefde - jij leefde - hij/zij/het/u leefde - wij leefden
- jullie leefden - zij leefden.
NOTE:
It is worth reminding that this is the rule that the letters v and z may not close a
syllable.
However, the pronunciation does not follow this rule and the past tense forms
are pronounced as “geloovde”, “glanzde”, “leevde”, “reizde”.
Unlike the (weak) regular verbs which use the same infinitive stem and add the appropriate
personal endings to form the preterite tense, the strong verbs have stem changes to signify the preterite
tense in West Germanic Languages.
487
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Note that these stem changes are not predictable and must be learned by heart or looked up in a
dictionary.
For easy reference, there is a comprehensive list of the (strong) irregular verbs in German and
Dutch (See List of (Strong) Irregular Verbs in the Preterite p. 495)
Below is the formula for the formation of the preterite tense of irregular verbs:
As you can see, the most common form of irregularity in the preterite (imperfect) is the changing
of the vowel in the stem of the verb in German and Dutch, exactly as in English where we say “sang” (not
“singed”), or “spoke” (not “speaked”) etc.
Let us compare how a typical strong verb is conjugated in the present and in the preterite
(imperfect).
Below we will conjugate the (strong) irregular verb, Ger. singen, Dut. zingen - “to sing”, in the
present and in the preterite:
er, sie, es singt hij, zij, het, U zingt he, she, it sings
er, sie, es sang hij, zij, het, U zong he, she, it sang
488

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Furthermore, as it is seen from the table, in German and Dutch, personal endings are also added
to the preterite stem of (strong) irregular verbs to form the preterite conjugations.
In German, for example, the endings -st (in the 2nd person singular), -en (in the 1st and 3rd
persons plural), and -t (in the 2nd person plural) must be added to the preterite stem. The preterite stem
is usually considered to be the 3rd person singular in German, which must be memorized to conjugate
strong verbs correctly.
In Dutch, the ending -en is added to the preterite stem in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd persons plural.
The preterite stem is usually represented by the singular preterite form (the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd persons
singular in the preterite), which should also be learned since the preterite stem changes are very
unpredictable.
Below is a table demonstrating the endings of irregular verbs in the preterite tense in
German:
German Dutch
NOTE:
Dutch
Remember that, in Dutch, many strong verbs change their stem spelling in the
plural forms of the conjugation following the spelling rules when adding the
ending -en to the singular form in the preterite.
Compare the following:
Dutch
489
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dutch
hij, zij, het, U sprak (he, she, it spoke) hij, zij, het, U schreef (he, she, it wrote)
However, for easier learning and less confusion, it is advised to memorize both
forms: the preterite singular and the preterite plural in Dutch.
Vowel Changes in the Stem of Irregular Verbs in the Preterite Tense and
Past Participle
In German and Dutch, there are a number of different ways in which vowels of the stem of
(strong) irregular verbs might change in the preterite. Traditionally, in the West Germanic languages, we
arrange these so-called strong verbs in seven patterns or classes, each shown here with one verb.
In the table below, the preterite contains one form of the irregular verbs: the 3rd person singular
in German and two forms: the preterite singular and the preterite plural in Dutch.
Also, it is usual to include in the table the past participle of the verbs, which has the prefix ge-
and ends in an -en in German and Dutch (See The Past Participle p. 439 and The Present Perfect
p. 467).
German Dutch
490

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German Dutch
491

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German Dutch
Minor groups
(represented by only a few members)
8 Infinitive bewegen (to move) bewegen (to move)
NOTE:
Dutch
It is worth noting that the preterite of classes four and five has a short vowel in
the singular but a long in the plural.
German Dutch
492
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German Dutch
NOTE:
For more strong (irregular) verbs in the preterite (See List of (Strong)
Irregular Verbs in the Preterite p. 455).
Below is the full conjugation of an irregular (strong) verb Ger. schreiben, Dut. schrijven - “to
write” in the preterite (imperfect) tense in German and Dutch:
er, sie, es schrieb hij, zij, het, U schreef he, she, it wrote/was writing
NOTE:
It is useful to remember that a form like Ger. “ich schrieb”, Dut. “ik schreef”
translates “I wrote”, “I was writing” or “I did write”, depending on context.
It should be noted that one cannot tell from an infinitive whether a verb is (weak) regular or
(strong) irregular in German and Dutch. Here you find pairs of two verbs that look similar in the
infinitive, one is (strong) irregular and one (weak) regular, for example:
German Dutch
Regular Verb
493
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
German Dutch
Irregular Verb
German Dutch
Regular Verb
Irregular Verb
However, if a verb is (strong) irregular, one can observe recurring patterns within each class of
(strong) irregular verbs in German and Dutch. For instance, study the recurring pattern between the
following verbs:
German Dutch
494

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Nevertheless, one has to learn by heart whether a verb is (weak) regular or (strong) irregular, and
if (strong) irregular, in which way it is irregular and to what class of irregular verbs it belongs. Luckily, the
number of irregular verbs is finite.
• When the stem of the preterite ends in -t or -d, an additional -e- is inserted between the stem and the
ending in the 2nd person singular (-st) and plural (-t), as illustrated below by Ger. finden (class 3) - “to
find” and halten (class 7) - “to hold”:
Finden: ich fand - du fandest - er/sie/es fand - wir fanden - ihr fandet - sie fanden.
Halten: ich hielt - du hieltest - er/sie/es hielt - wir hielten - ihr hieltet - sie hielten.
• When the stem of the preterite ends in -s, an additional -e- is inserted between the stem and the ending
in the 2nd person singular (-st), as illustrated here by Ger. lesen (class 5) - “to read”:
Lesen: ich las - du lasest - er/sie/es las - wir lasen - ihr last - sie lasen.
Remember that the (strong) irregular verbs in West Germanic languages are marked by
unpredictable changes in their roots to demonstrate verb tense. These stem changes occur particularly in
the past tense forms. Knowing what these root changes are is essential to proper usage of the strong verbs.
Below is a comprehensive list of all (strong) irregular verbs in the preterite tense, which contains
the infinitive and the preterite stem which is represented by the 3rd person singular in German, and two
preterite forms of the irregular verbs: the singular and the plural in Dutch:
495

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
496

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
497

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
498

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
499

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
500

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
501

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
502

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The underlined verb forms in the preterite are regular in German and Dutch (Formation of the
Preterite of Regular (Weak) Verbs p. 482)
NOTE:
German
When the verb bewegen means “to move”, it is conjugated as a weak verb. If
the verbs erlöschen meaning “to extinguish” and erschrecken - “frighten”
are transitive, they are conjugated as weak verbs. The verbs hauen and
saugen may also be conjugated as a weak verb. In some regions, the preterite
form molk of the verb melken is the preferred preterite form.
When conjugated as weak verbs, schaffen, scheren, schleifen and senden
mean “to manage, work”, “to concern”, “to drag” and “to broadcast”
respectively. The verb wenden may also be conjugated as a weak verb,
especially to mean “to turn over, turn around”. The weak verb wiegen means
503
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
“to rock”. The mixed verbs are marked in brackets in German (See Mixed
Verbs in the Preterite in German p. 506).
It is seen from the table that the range of German and Dutch irregular verbs are quite similar to
each other. In this regard, it can be argued that there is a partial convergence of irregular verbs in these
two West Germanic languages. Once you know these above mentioned irregular forms, you can easily
conjugate strong verbs in the preterite tense.
To remind, in German, in order to conjugate (strong) irregular verbs in the preterite, you need to
take the preterite stem, which is the 3rd person singular form indicated in the table above, and add the
appropriate personal endings -st (the 2nd person singular), -t (the 2nd person plural), and -(e)n (the 1st
and 3rd person plural).
In Dutch, to learn the irregular verb conjugations, you need to learn only two forms presented in
the table above, which are the singular preterite and the plural preterite. To illustrate:
Below is the conjugation of a strong verb Ger. geben, Dut. geven - “to give” in the preterite
tense in German and Dutch:
er, sie, es gab hij, zij, het, U gaf he, she, it gave
As mentioned before, there are several irregular verbs whose preterite (imperfect) form still
survives today in Afrikaans.
Below is a table illustrating irregular verbs in the preterite (imperfect) tense in Afrikaans:
Afrikaans English
hê (had) to have
wees (was) to be
504

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Verb “Dink”
• Note that the preterite (imperfect) forms of the verb dink are frequently used. These two forms of the
preterite tense of this verb are synonymous and completely interchangeable, for example:
Afr. Sy dag/dog ek kan nie kom nie. (or Sy het gedink ek kan nie kom nie.)
Although the preterite (imperfect) forms dag/dog and the present perfect form het gedink are
synonymous and can alternate without any differentiation in meaning, the latter is particularly common
in the spoken language.
Verb “Weet”
• It should be mentioned that the preterite (imperfect) form wis is becoming rare. One may hear this
form in the speech of older people or meet in literary Afrikaans but not in natural speech.
Instead, the present perfect form het geweet is used in the spoken language:
Verb “Hê”
• Just like the verb weet, the verb hê also has a rarely used preterite (imperfect) form, had. This form is
never heard in speech anymore and is rarely written. It is occasionally found in literature, very high style
and journalistic writing. It also occurs dialectically in the Cape.
Verb “Wees”
• It should be said that the preterite (imperfect) form was and the present perfect form was gewees are
interchangeable, for instance:
505

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Note that unlike other Afrikaans verbs, the past participle of wees (gewees) - “to be (been)” does
not usually take the auxiliary verb hê (het) - “to have” to form the perfect tense:
However, if a sentence involves modal verbs, the form gewees het must be used (never gewees
is/was). Note that in this case the auxiliary verb het must follow the past participle gewees.
Below are some common constructions with modal verbs and the present perfect form of the
wees (gewees) in Afrikaans:
Afrikaans English
For example:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, subordinating dat - “that” is optional, as it is in English. Compare
the same example:
Brennen: ich brannte - du branntest - er/sie/es brannte - wir brannten - ihr branntet - sie brannten.
506
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Wissen: ich wusste - du wusstest - er/sie/es wusste - wir wussten - ihr wusstet - sie wussten.
NOTE:
German
Among the mixed verbs, the verb wissen has an irregular conjugation in the
present tense as well (See p. 428)
It is worth mentioning that the modal verbs are a subset of the mixed verbs. Modal verbs are like
the rest of the mixed verbs, in that they:
• have a changed stem in the preterite and past participle forms, except for of sollen - “will, should” and
wollen - “to want to”;
• use the suffix -te and -(e)t in the preterite and past participle forms respectively, for example: dürfen -
“may, to be allowed” and müssen - “must, have to”:
Dürfen: ich durfte - du durftest - er/sie/es durfte - wir durften - ihr durftet - sie durften.
Müssen: ich musste - du musstest - er/sie/es musste - wir mussten - ihr musstet - sie mussten.
It should be recalled that parallel with what is the case in the present tense (See Use of the
Present Tense p. 435), the German and Dutch preterite tense is equivalent to all of the past tense
English forms. Observe the following:
Even though there are many similarities between English and German and Dutch in the way in
which the preterite tense is formed, German and Dutch differ markedly from English in the way in which
they use this tense.
The preterite of most verbs is not nearly as frequently used in speech as the present perfect is
(See The Present Perfect p. 467).
The preterite in German and Dutch has the following uses:
507
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Habitual actions
• To express a habit from the past or to refer to an action or event that went on during a certain past
event:
NOTE:
German
In the third example, the present perfect is more commonly used in German
(See Special Use of the Preterite in German p. 511).
• To describe actions that happened in the past without any relation to the present:
Note that if the event or action is still relevant to the present time, the present perfect is normally
used. It is important to mention that when referring to past events or actions, the present perfect is still
much more common than the preterite, especially in German. Compare the following:
508
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Remember that in order to set the stage in the past, the present perfect is usually used. All events
and actions that follow are expressed by the preterite. Study the following:
Ger. Dieses Jahr sind wir in die Schweiz gefahren. Wir übernachteten in einem Hotel in Genf und
besuchten dann den Genfersee.
Dut. Dit jaar zijn we naar Zwitserland geweest. We verbleven in een hotel in Genève en bezochten
toen het Meer van Genève.
- This year, we went to Switzerland. We stayed in a hotel in Geneva and then, we visited the Lake
Geneva.
• Like in English, in German and Dutch, the preterite tense is normally used for the narration of a series
of actions or events in the past:
Ger. Ich ging in die Innenstadt, kaufte ein T-Shirt, sah meinen Freund und sprach mit ihm.
Dut. Ik ging naar de stad, kocht een t-shirt, zag mijn vriend en sprak met hem.
- I went downtown, bought a t-shirt, saw my friend and talked with him.
509

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
- It was Monday.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, unlike other verbs, the verb wees - “to be” has the past (imperfect)
form, which is was (See also p. 505). To illustrate:
• If we express a past event by using Ger. als and Dut. toen - “when”, we normally use the preterite
tense. Note that if we use the present perfect tense at all, the pluperfect must be used (See The
Pluperfect Tense p. 529):
NOTE:
In Dutch, we also use toen as a translation of “then”. In German, the word
dann is used in this case. Study the following:
Ger. Wir sind nach Genf gefahren und dann haben wir den Genfersee besucht.
Dut. We gingen naar Genève en toen bezochten we het Meer van Genève.
- We went to Geneva and then, we visited the Lake Geneva.
The following are the most common expressions that are usually used with the preterite:
510
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
vor einiger Zeit, vorhin een tijdje geleden, eerder a little while ago
For instance:
Note that, in German, the preterite tense is used mostly in a narrative of past events in writing.
Below are the special rules of the preterite use in German.
It should be mentioned that the preterite is used mostly in written German and usually to narrate
past events. In conversational contexts, the present perfect is normally used in German. Compare the
following:
511

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Remember that, in German, the preterite of the verb occurs in the 2nd position
and any additional verbal elements, such as separable prefixes and
complementary infinitives (with modal verbs), appear at the end of the
sentence, for example:
It should be mentioned that English normally has a rule that if the time of an event that occurred
in the past is mentioned, then the preterite must be used, but if the time is omitted, the present perfect is
used, for example:
Eng. She returned from Munich yesterday. She has returned from Munich.
Ger. Sie kam gestern aus München zurück. (written narrative form)
Ger. Sie ist gestern aus München zurückgekommen. (usual spoken form)
It is worth saying that because the preterite tense is primarily a written form, the 2nd person
singular and plural (du, ihr, Sie forms) are uncommon and usually sound strange to the ear of a native
speaker. For example, a phrase such as Ger, du tanztest - “you danced” sounds extremely odd and
would hardly be used by a native speaker. It means that the 1st and 3rd persons singular and plural (ich,
wir, er/sie/es, sie forms) are the only commonly used forms of the preterite tense.
However, there is a group of verbs that represent an exception to the above-mentioned rule. The
preterite tense of the modal verbs können - “can, be able to”, sollen - “will, should”, dürfen - “may, to
be allowed”, müssen - “must, have to”, wollen - “to want to” (See Modal Verbs p. ), the verbs like
sein - “to be”, haben - “to have", werden - “will”, and sometimes wissen - “to know” are preferred
over the present perfect tense forms, even in spoken German. For this reason, the forms of these verbs
will also be used in the 2nd person and they are used with equal frequency in written and conversational
German.
Observe how the present perfect tense and the preterite of these common verbs can be used in the
same sentence:
512
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Did you know? Ger. Ich habe viel gearbeitet und war so müde.
NOTE:
A few other commonly used verbs may be heard in the preterite tense in spoken
German. However, it is also usual to hear them in the present perfect tense. For
example:
German English
Difference between the Preterite and the Present Perfect in the West
Germanic languages
In German and Dutch, the preterite tense is roughly equivalent in meaning to the present perfect
tense. Both are used to refer to action or events that has occurred in the past.
The difference between the two is mainly in their usage. The present perfect tense is used mostly
in conversational contexts, especially in German, and the preterite tense is used mostly in a written form
and usually to describe past events.
In Afrikaans, however, the present perfect is always used since the preterite (imperfect) tense of
all verbs (with the few exceptions) has disappeared. Study the following:
513
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Asking Questions
We have already looked at question words (See Interrogative Adverbs p. 186) and now we
will consider yes/no questions, which are questions that can be answered with “yes” or “no”, and
questions that get more detailed information.
Unlike in English, in West Germanic languages questions are formed differently. In English, the
verb to do is used to form questions: “Do you know him?”, whereas in other West Germanic languages
this verb is never used.
Generally speaking, in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, asking a question which can be answered
with “yes” or “no” is quite simple. In order to pose such a question, you should invert the subject and the
verb to make it a question. In other words, you should place the conjugated verb first in the question and
the subject second. To compare:
Statement Question
It is worth mentioning that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, there is no equivalent to what is
called the continuous verb form. So the above examples could also be translated as: “He is working.”, “Is
he working?”.
Also, you can change a statement into a question by adding the word Ger. nicht wahr? Dut. niet
waar? Afr. nie waar nie? to the end of a statement in all of the West Germanic languages.
These kinds of phrases are called statement additions or question tags and can translate several
ways into English: isn’t he/she/it?, aren't you/we/they?, doesn’t he/she/it?, don't you/we/they?, right?,
am I right?, yes?, don't you think? etc., which depends on the subject and verb previously mentioned.
When you use these question tags, you are almost always expecting agreement. For instance:
514

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
German
Southern Germany and Austria tend to use gell? instead of nicht wahr?. The
latter is commonly abbreviated to nicht? or even ne? in speech:
If you are not sure if what you said is correct, you could also add Ger. oder? Dut. of? Afr. of? -
“or?” to the end of a statement instead. However, in this case, you would normally change the word order
of the statement to make it a normal yes/no question. Compare the following examples:
Example 1 Example 2
English You are coming tomorrow, aren’t you? Are you coming tomorrow, or?
The first example would mean that it is a rhetorical question, while the second example is more of
a genuine question and means one wants a response.
Negation
Unlike in English, in other West Germanic languages negation is also formed quite differently.
For instance, in English the verb to do is widely used to make a sentence negative: “I don’t know”, while
in German, Dutch and Afrikaans the verb to do is never used in negative sentences. For example:
NOTE:
German
When contradicting a negative question in German, ‘yes’ is translated as doch,
not ja (compare French si), for example:
515
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Furthermore, double negation is not acceptable in English, German, and Dutch, for example: I
know nobody/I don’t know anybody (since it is not grammatically correct to say I don’t know nobody).
Below are the examples demonstrating the formation of negative sentences from affirmative
in West Germanic languages:
Affirmative: Negative:
NOTE:
Afrikaans
If a nominal object, an adjective, an adverb or a separable prefix follow the
verb, the double negation nie…nie is required in Afrikaans, where the first nie
is placed after the verb and the second nie is put at the end of the phrase, e.g.:
516
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
2. If we want to negate a noun in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, we use the words Ger. kein(-e), Dut.
geen, Afr. geen…nie - “no, not a/any”, for example: I have no children.
NOTE:
German
The form Ger. kein or keine depends on the gender of the noun we use (See
Gender of Nouns p. 23).
German
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, the combination geen…nie is used to negate nouns where geen
is put before the noun and nie after it.
Below are the examples showing the negation of nouns using Ger. kein(-e), Dut. geen, Afr.
geen…nie:
Affirmative: Negative:
Ger. Sie schreibt ein Buch (neut.) Ger. Sie schreibt kein Buch.
- She writes a book. - She doesn’t write a book; - She doesn't write any
book; - She writes no book.
517
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
3. When an object pronoun (See Object Pronoun p.263, p.272) follows the verb, the negative word
should be placed after the object pronoun in West Germanic languages. For example:
Affirmative: Negative:
4. If there is an infinitive which follows the finite verb (a finite verb is a verb that shows agreement with a
subject) in a sentence, the negative word is placed after the finite verb in German and Dutch (See also
The Infinitive p. 578).
In Afrikaans, however, the combination nie…nie must be used in a negated clause where the first
nie is put after the finite verb and the second nie is placed after the infinitive. For instance:
Affirmative: Negative:
5. When a finite verb (or an auxiliary verb) is followed by a past participle in German and Dutch, the
negative word Ger. nicht, Dut. niet is also placed after the finite verb (See The Past Participle p.
439).
In Afrikaans, the combination nie…nie must also be used in this case. The first nie is put after
the finite verb and the second nie is placed after the past participle. For example:
Affirmative: Negative:
518

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The negative words Ger. nicht, Dut. niet, Afr. nie - “not” can also be used to negate adjectives.
Just like in English, if you want to negate an adjective in German and Dutch, you should put the
negative particle Ger. nicht, Dut. niet - “not” before it.
NOTE:
Afrikaans
To make an adjective negative in Afrikaans, however, the combination nie…nie
is used where the first nie is placed before the adjective and the second nie
must be put after it.
The adverb Ger. sehr, Dut. erg, Afr. baie - “very” can also be used with adjectives.
In this case, to negate an adjective with the adverb “very” in German and Dutch, the negative
word Ger. nicht, Dut. niet - “not” must be placed before the adverb, while in Afrikaans, the first negative
word nie is put before the adverb and the second nie after the adjective. For example:
In compound tenses, when a finite verb (or an auxiliary verb) is followed by a past participle in
German and Dutch negative sentences, the negative word Ger. nicht, Dut. niet is placed after the finite
verb (See The Past Participle p. 439).
In Afrikaans, however, the combination nie…nie must be used in this case. The first negative
word nie is put after the auxiliary verb and the second nie is placed after the past participle.
519
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In West Germanic languages, auxiliary verbs are Ger. haben; Dut. hebben; Afr. hê - “to have”.
Study the following:
Affirmative: Negative:
The German and Dutch auxiliary verbs Ger. sein; Dut. zijn - “to be” are also used with reflexive
and intransitive verbs (See Formation of the Present Perfect with the Verb to be in German
and Dutch p. 469).
NOTE:
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, the auxiliary verb hê - “to have” is used with all types of verbs.
Affirmative: Negative:
There are many other negative expressions, which are used in the West Germanic languages.
Below is a table demonstrating the most common negative combinations and expressions:.
520
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
1. If the pronouns Ger. niemand, Dut. niemand, Afr. niemand - “no one, nobody” are used as the
subject of a sentence, they are put before the verb in a sentence.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the combination niemand…nie is used in this case where the
negative word nie is placed at the very end of the phrase.
Study the following:
2. It should be remembered that the pronouns Ger. niemand, Dut. niemand, Afr. niemand - “no
one, nobody” are always placed after the verb in simple tenses or the auxiliary verb in compound
tenses when they function as the object in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
NOTE:
Afrikaans
The pronoun niemand is also used with the negative word nie that is placed at
521
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
the very end of the sentence in simple and compound tenses in Afrikaans. To
illustrate:
NOTE:
German
The word niemand is declined and depends on the position in a sentence (See
Case in German p. 112).
German
Nominative niemand
Genitive niemandes
Dative niemand/niemandem
Accusative niemand/niemanden
As you can see from the table above, niemand may or may not take the case
endings -em in dative and -en in accusative, for example:
“Ich warte auf niemand” and “Ich warte auf niemanden.” - “I'm waiting for
nobody.” are both correct.
3. If an infinitive is used in a sentence, Ger. niemand, Dut. niemand, Afr. niemand precede the
infinitive in West Germanic languages. Remember that in Afrikaans, the negative word nie should
also be put at the end of the sentence in his case. For instance:
522
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Like no one and nobody, nothing has similar rules of placement in the sentence in the West
Germanic languages.
1. If Ger. nichts, Dut. niets, Afr. niks - “nothing” are used as the subject, they are put before the verb
in a sentence, whereas the Afrikaans the second negative word nie is also placed at the very end of the
sentence. Observe the following:
2. When Ger. nichts, Dut. niets, Afr. niks function as the object, they follow the main verb in simple
tenses. In compound tenses, they follow the auxiliary verb in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
NOTE:
Afrikaans
In compound tenses, nie must also be put at the end of the sentence in
Afrikaans.
3. When there is an infinitive in the sentence, Ger. nichts, Dut. niets, Afr. niks precede the infinitive;
in Afrikaans, the negative word nie is also placed at the end of the sentence. For example:
523
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
These negative words are usually placed after the main verb in simple tenses or after the auxiliary
verb in compound tenses in the West Germanic languages.
It should be mentioned that the negative word Afr. nie, must always be placed at the end of the
sentence in simple and compound tenses in Afrikaans. For instance:
Ger. Wir sind weder nach Namibia noch nach Südafrika gereist.
It is worth noting that Ger. noch; Dut. noch; Afr. of can be used in the sentence more than
twice. Observe the following:
1. Unlike in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans the adverbs Ger. nie(mals); Dut. nooit; Afr.
nooit - “never” are placed at the end of the sentence in this case.
524

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, nooit must be used with nie where nie follows it. Study the
following:
2. In compound tenses, the adverbs Ger. nie(mals); Dut. nooit; Afr. nooit - “never” follow the
auxiliary verb in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. However, in Italian never can also be placed before
the past participle.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the second negative word nie follows the past participle in
compound tenses. Study the following:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, Ger. nie, Dut. nooit, Afr. nooit are often
used in combination with Ger. noch, Dut. nog, Afr. nog, which could be
translated as “not yet”. It could also add a slight connotation of “never ever”.
For example:
3. In German, nie and niemals can be used interchangeably. They both mean “never”. However,
niemals is somewhat stronger and could be translated as “never ever”. For example:
525
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In German, niemals can also stand alone as an answer meaning “never/no
way”. For example:
No longer, Anymore, No more - Ger. nicht mehr; Dut. niet meer; Afr.
nie meer…nie
1. The adverbs Ger. mehr; Dut. meer; Afr. meer - “more” can only be used in combination with the
negative words Ger. nicht; Dut. niet; Afr. nie - “no”.
Therefore, the combination Ger. nicht mehr; Dut. niet meer; Afr. nie meer - “no longer,
anymore, no more” follows the main verb in simple tenses in all of the West Germanic languages.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the second negative word nie must always be put at the very end
of the sentence in simple tenses.
- He doesn’t work at the hospital anymore (He no longer works at the hospital).
If a sentence contains an object pronoun following the verb, the combination Ger. nicht mehr;
Dut. niet meer; Afr. nie meer must be placed after the object pronoun in simple tenses in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans:
If there is a nominal object following the verb, the combination Ger. nicht mehr; Dut. niet
meer is also placed after the nominal object in simple tenses in German and Dutch.
526
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, nie meer is used after the main verb. Study the
following:
2. In compound tenses, Ger. nicht mehr; Dut. niet meer; Afr. nie meer - “no longer, anymore” follow
the auxiliary verb in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Also, in Afrikaans, the second negative nie must
also be placed at the end of the sentence. Study the following:
It is worth noting that if an object pronoun follows the auxiliary verb, the combination Ger. nicht
mehr; Dut. niet meer; Afr. nie meer should be placed after the object pronoun in compound tenses in
West Germanic languages. For instance:
Did you know? Ger. Ich habe ihn nicht mehr gesehen.
Dortmund, Germany, offers more than Dut. Ik heb hem niet meer gezien.
20 museums to explore, from art and Afr. Ek het hom nie meer gesien nie.
history to football and technology.
- I haven’t seen him anymore.
If a nominal object follows the auxiliary verb, the combination Ger. nicht mehr; Dut. niet
meer; Afr. nie meer should be placed after the nominal object in compound tenses:
527
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
3. When there is an infinitive in the sentence, no longer, anymore precede the infinitive in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans. Remember that in Afrikaans, the second negative word nie must be placed after
the infinitive. For example:
Not Even - Ger. nicht einmal; Dut. niet eens; Afr. nie eers…nie
1. Ger. nicht einmal; Dut. niet eens; Afr. nie ears…nie - “not even” follow the auxiliary verb in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Also, in Afrikaans, the second negative nie must also be placed at the
end of the sentence.
Not Yet - Ger. noch nicht; Dut. nog niet; Afr. nog nie…nie
1. Ger. noch nicht; Dut. nog niet; Afr. nog nie…nie - “not yet” also follow the auxiliary verb in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans. In Afrikaans, the second negative nie must also be placed at the end of
the sentence.
528

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In German and Dutch, the pluperfect tense is formed by using the past tense of the verb Ger.
haben or sein; Dut. hebben or zijn with the past participle.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, there is no difference between the perfect and the pluperfect form,
and therefore one uses the perfect to talk about events in the past (See Present
Perfect p. 467).
The formation of the pluperfect of the German and Dutch is presented in the drawing below:
Pluperfect Formula
hatte
hattest
haben hatte
hatten
hattet
hatten
German
war
warst
sein war
waren
wart
waren
+ Past Participle
had Ger. -ge + -t/-en
had Dut. -ge + -t/-d/-en
hebben had
hadden
hadden
hadden
Dutch
was
was
zijn was
waren
waren
waren
529
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Like in the Present Perfect, in the Pluperfect as well as other compound tenses
the auxiliary verbs Ger. sein; Dut. zijn - “to be” are also used with reflexive and
intransitive verbs in German and Dutch (See p. 469).
Below is the table showing the example of conjugation of verbs in the pluperfect tense:
German Dutch
Haben Hebben
Sein Zijn
For example:
530
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The pluperfect tense is used in the same way in German and Dutch as in English. It is used to
express:
In Afrikaans, however, the present perfect must be used in this case since the pluperfect tense has
disappeared. Study the same example:
The future tense of most verbs is formed by using the present tense of the auxiliary verb Ger.
werden; Dut. zullen; Afr. sal - “will” with the infinitive.
531
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
werde
wirst
German werden wird
werden
werdet
werden
zal
zult + Infinitive
Dutch zullen zal
zullen
zullen
zullen
The following is the table showing the example of conjugation of the verb Ger. sprechen; Dut.
spreken; Afr. praat - “to speak” in the future tense:
du wirst sprechen jij zult spreken jy sal praat you will speak
er, sie, es wird sprechen hij, zij, het, U zal spreken hy, sy, dit sal praat he, she, it will speak
wir werden sprechen wij zullen spreken ons sal praat we will speak
ihr werdet sprechen jullie zullen spreken julle sal praat you will speak
sie werden sprechen zij zullen spreken hulle sal praat they will speak
Like in English, the future tense in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is used:
532
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Note that Ger. werden; Dut. zullen; Afr. sal act syntactically the same as all the modal verbs,
which means that the infinitive of the action verb usually stands at the end. Study one more example:
- We will do it tomorrow.
• to make a request:
Ger. werden; Dut. zullen; Afr. sal like “will”, is also used in requests, for example:
• to promise:
• to invite:
533

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In conversational German, Dutch and Afrikaans the future can be used to express probability.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the following adverbs can be used in order to express
probability in the future.
For example:
It is important to mention that German, Dutch and Afrikaans often use the present tense to
express an action or intention that will occur in the future when future time is clearly indicated by an
adverb or an adverbial expression of time.
This convention occurs in English too but is less common in English than in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans. Study the following example:
Ger. Ich fahre morgen nach Paris. Ger. Nächstes Jahr heiraten sie.
Afr. Ek gaan môre Parys toe. Afr. Volgende jaar trou hulle.
The Future Tense Using the Verb Gaan in Dutch and Afrikaans
Just like English, Dutch and Africans, in addition to “will” and the present tense, often use the
verb gaan - “to go” to express the future. It is formed by the verb “to go” of the present tense which is
placed right before the infinitive.
534

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the future tense with the verb gaan is used to express an intention, a
prediction or if we want to talk about a plan for the future in a construction analogous to the English “to
be going to”.
The formula of the future tense with the verb gaan in Dutch and Afrikaans is the following:
NOTE:
Unlike Dutch and Afrikaans, German does not do this. In such cases you must
choose between the verb werden and the present tense:
The future perfect in in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is formed by using the verb Ger. werden;
Dut. zullen; Afr. sal - “will” in the present tense and the past participle plus the verb Ger. haben or
sein; Dut. hebben or zijn - “to have” or “to be”.
It should be said that unlike German and Dutch, Afrikaans uses the auxiliary verb Afr. hê - “to
have” with all the verbs (transitive and intransitive) to form the future perfect tense. The future perfect is
generally used to express an action that will have been completed at a certain moment in the future.
The formula of the future perfect tense in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is the following:
Afrikaans sal + hê
535
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Below is the table showing the example of conjugation of verbs in the future perfect tense:
Haben Hebben Hê
ich werde getanzt haben ik zal gedanst hebben ek sal gedans het
du wirst getanzt haben jij zal gedanst hebben jy sal gedans het
er, sie, es wird getanzt haben hij, zij, het, U zal gedanst hebben hy, sy, dit sal gedans het
wir werden getanzt haben wij zullen gedanst hebben ons sal gedans het
ihr werdet getanzt haben jullie zullen gedanst hebben julle sal gedans het
sie werden getanzt haben zij zullen gedanst hebben hulle sal gedans het
Sein Zijn Hê
ich werde gekommen sein ik zal gekomen zijn ek sal gekom het
du wirst gekommen sein jij zal gekomen zijn jy sal gekom het
er, sie, es wird gekommen sein hij, zij, het, U zal gekomen zijn hy, sy, dit sal gekom het
wir werden gekommen sein wij zullen gekomen zijn ons sal gekom het
ihr werdet gekommen sein jullie zullen gekomen zijn julle sal gekom het
sie werden gekommen sein zij zullen gekomen zijn hulle sal gekom het
• To express a future action that will have been completed before another action in the future:
536

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• Like the future tense, the future perfect is also used to express probability in the West Germanic
languages. However, it is used in this way with all verbs (See Use of the Future Tense p. 532).
NOTE:
In Dutch, this tense is quite uncommon. Instead of the future perfect, the Dutch
usually uses the present perfect (See also Present Perfect p. 467):
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans the conditional tense is generally used to
express what would happen in the future, which means that it refers to possible and hypothetical
situations.
The present conditional is formed in English by “would” + infinitive and thus in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans by using the subjunctive (in German) and the past tense (in Dutch and Afrikaans) of the
verb Ger. werden; Dut. zullen; Afr. sal - “would” + the infinitive.
537
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
würde
würdest
German werden würde
würden
würdet
würden
zou
zou + Infinitive
Dutch zullen zou
zouden
zouden
zouden
The following is the table showing the example of conjugation of the verb Ger. sprechen; Dut.
spreken; Afr. praat - “to speak” in the present conditional:
du würdest sprechen jij zou spreken jy sou praat you would speak
er, sie, es würde hij, zij, het, U zou hy, sy, dit sou praat he, she, it would speak
sprechen spreken
wir würden sprechen wij zouden spreken ons sou praat we would speak
ihr würdet sprechen jullie zouden spreken julle sou praat you would speak
sie würden sprechen zij zouden spreken hulle sou praat they would speak
• To express and describe an action that would happen if it were not for some other
circumstances:
538
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Note that it is used in combination with Ger. wenn, Dut. als, Afr. as - “if” clause, which states
the condition under which the action would be performed.
Ger. Wenn ich Zeit hätte, würde ich ins Café gehen.
NOTE:
In German, if the infinitive that follows würde is haben - “to have” or sein -
“to be”, it is advisable to use the form hätte and wäre instead of würde
haben and würde sein respectively, although the latter do exist. To compare:
In order to politely express a wish or desire, one uses the adverb Ger. gerne, Dut. graag, Afr.
graag which is the equivalent of English “would like”. To illustrate:
NOTE:
In German, the subjunctive form of the verb mögen (möchte) can also be used
to render “would like”, for example:
539
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
However, the form hätte gern is also commonly used when requesting
something in German, for example:
One can also use Ger. werden/wäre; Dut. zullen; Afr. sal - “would” to make a suggestion, for
example:
Ger. Es wäre besser (or es würde besser sein), wenn wir zu Hause blieben.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, if the infinitive that follows sou is wees - “to be”, the contracted
form was can also be used instead of sou wees. To compare:
NOTE:
In Dutch, however, when the action is urgent or presented as a clear command,
we often use moeten:
540
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It is used when the main verb is in the past tense. In this case, the present conditional can be
equivalent to a simple future in the past in English:
It should be remembered that if the verb in the main sentence is in the present tense, the future
tense is used. Observe the following:
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans the conditional tense expresses an action in the
past that would have happened but did not because of another event.
The conditional perfect in English is formed by “would have” + past participle to express “would
have done something”.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans it is formed by using the subjunctive (in German) and the past
tense (in Dutch and Afrikaans) of the verb Ger. werden; Dut. zullen; Afr. sal - “would” + the past
participle + the verb Ger. haben or sein; Dut. hebben or zijn - “to have” or “to be”.
541

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Remember that unlike German and Dutch, Afrikaans uses the auxiliary verb Afr. hê - “to have”
with all the verbs (transitive and intransitive) to form the future perfect tense.
The formula of the future perfect tense in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is the following:
Afrikaans sal + hê
Below is the table showing the example of conjugation of verbs in the future perfect tense:
Haben Hebben Hê
ich würde getanzt haben ik zou gedanst hebben ek sou gedans het
du würdest getanzt haben jij zou gedanst hebben jy sou gedans het
er, sie, es würde getanzt haben hij, zij, het, U zou gedanst hy, sy, dit sou gedans het
hebben
wir würden getanzt haben wij zouden gedanst hebben ons sou gedans het
ihr würdet getanzt haben jullie zouden gedanst hebben julle sou gedans het
sie würden getanzt haben zij zouden gedanst hebben hulle sou gedans het
Sein Zijn Hê
ich werde gekommen sein ik zou gekomen zijn ek sou gekom het
du wirst gekommen sein jij zou gekomen zijn jy sou gekom het
er, sie, es wird gekommen sein hij, zij, het, U zou gekomen zijn hy, sy, dit sou gekom het
wir werden gekommen sein wij zouden gekomen zijn ons sou gekom het
ihr werdet gekommen sein jullie zouden gekomen zijn julle sou gekom het
sie werden gekommen sein zij zouden gekomen zijn hulle sou gekom het
• To express what would have happened if something else had not prevented it (See
Conditional Clauses p. 544):
542

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Wenn ich Zeit gehabt hätte, würde ich nach Lissabon geflogen sein*.
Dut. Als ik tijd had gehad, zou ik naar Lissabon gevlogen zijn*.
Ger. Ich würde dieses Buch gekauft haben*, wenn ich das Geld gehabt hätte.
Dut. Ik zou dit boek gekocht hebben*, als ik het geld gehad had.
Afr. Ek sou hierdie boek gekoop het, as ek die geld gehad het.
NOTE:
German
It is preferable to use the contracted form hätte and wäre instead of würde
haben and würde sein respectively in German. To compare:
Ger. Wenn ich Zeit gehabt hätte, wäre ich nach Lissabon geflogen.
- If I had had time, I would have flown to Lisbon.
Ger. Ich hätte dieses Buch gekauft, wenn ich das Geld gehabt hätte.
- I would have bought this book if I had had the money.
Dutch
We often do not use the conditional perfect at all when referring to a past
hypothetical event. Instead, the pluperfect tense is used in Dutch.
Compare the following:
Dut. Ik had dit boek gekocht, als ik het geld had gehad.
- I would have bought this book if I had had the money.
Afrikaans
In colloquial Afrikaans, instead of the conditional perfect, the past tense can
also be used to refer to a hypothetical event where context makes the meaning
clear, for example:
543
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In order to express “should/could have + past participle”, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans the
following constructions are used:
For example:
Dut. Je had het moeten doen. Dut. Ze hadden het kunnen doen.
Afr. Jy moes dit gedoen het. Afr. Hulle kon dit gedoen het.
- You should have done it. - They could have done it.
Conditional Clauses
A conditional clause refers to an event (ofter hypothetical), which may or may not happen in
reality. Conditional sentences have two parts: the conditional or if clause, and the main clause, for
instance: “If you have time, we will go to the cinema”. In this sentence the conditional clause or if clause
“If you have time” refers to a hypothetical event, the main clause “we will go to the cinema” shows what
will happen if the condition of the if clause is met.
Normally, conditional clauses are introduced by if (Ger. wenn; Dut. als; Afr. as - “if") in the
West Germanic languages.
Conditional clauses have a particular sequence of tenses that needs to be followed in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans. There are three types of if clauses in the West Germanic languages.
1. Possible Condition
Below is the formation of the first type of if clause in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, which is
Possible Condition:
544

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The first type of the conditional clause is used to demonstrate that the condition is likely to be
implemented and, therefore, the consequence is regarded as possible. Observe the following:
Dut. Als hij genoeg tijd heeft, zal hij naar Zuid-Amerika vliegen.
NOTE:
It is worth saying that in German, the conjunction wenn can be translated as
“if” and “when”. In order to make it clear you mean if and not when, we can use
the conjunction falls, for example:
The following is the formation of the second type of if clause in German, Dutch and Afrikaans,
which is called impossible condition in the present:
Ger. wenn; Dut. als; Afr. as + Past Tense or Present Conditional or Subjunctive
Subjunctive
NOTE:
In German, for unreal conditionals in the present, we use the subjunctive in
both clauses.
In Dutch, however, unreal conditionals are often formed using the past tense
in the if-clause and the present conditional in the main clause.
545
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It should be said that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the sequence of tenses required with these
conditionals is generally identical to English.
The second type of conditional clause is contrary to the reality of the present and so the
consequence is considered to be highly unlikely or impossible to fulfil. For example:
Ger. Wenn ich genug Zeit hätte, würde ich nach Südamerika gehen.
The following is the formation of the third type of if-clause in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, which is
called impossible condition in the past:
Ger. wenn; Dut. als; Afr. as + Pluperfect or Conditional Perfect or Past Subjunctive
Past Subjunctive
NOTE:
In German, we use the past subjunctive in both clauses.
In Dutch, the pluperfect is used in the if-clause and the conditional perfect
tense is used in the main clause.
It should be remembered that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the sequence of tenses required with the
impossible conditionals in the past is mainly identical to English.
The third type of conditional clause is predominantly used for the situations that are contrary to
the reality of the past. Therefore, it describes an unrealized past possibility. For instance:
Ger. Wenn ich genug Zeit gehabt hätte, würde ich nach Südamerika geflogen sein.
Dut. Als ik genoeg tijd had gehad, zou ik naar Zuid-Amerika zijn gevlogen
NOTE:
In German, the pluperfect subjunctive form (wäre/-st/-t/-n + past perfect) can
546
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Wenn ich genug Zeit gehabt hätte, wäre ich nach Südamerika
geflogen.
Dut. Als ik genoeg tijd had gehad, was ik naar Zuid-Amerika gevlogen.
- If I had had enough time, I would have flown to South America.
The table below shows conjunctions you can use instead of Ger. wenn, Dut. als, Afr. as - “if”
(See also Conjunctions p. ):
Ger. Ich besuche dich, nur wenn ich genug Zeit habe.
The subjunctive is not often used in West Germanic languages (it is usually part of a fixed
expression), whereas it is widely used in Romance languages such as Spanish, Portuguese, Italian and
French.
At first let’s look at the difference between the indicative and subjunctive moods in the West
Germanic languages. The indicative mood is used to express a truth, fact, probability or action which is
547

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
not dependent on an opinion or condition, while the subjunctive mood conveys desires, doubts, emotions
or actions which are possible, uncertain, doubtful or unreal. Such ideas are dependent on an opinion or
condition.
• generally used to talk about events, states or actions that are considered to be facts or true;
• quite common in speech to make real, accurate and factual statements or for describing evident
qualities while referring to a situation or person.
• generally used to talk about desires, doubts, emotions, the abstract and other unreal situations;
• commonly used in speech for making recommendations and expressing how particular things make you
feel;
Ger. Der König lebt lange. Ger. Lang lebe der König.
Note that in English the lack of ‘-s’ on “live” (not lives) tells us this is a subjunctive form.
NOTE:
It should be mentioned that the number of tenses in the subjunctive mood differs
among West Germanic languages languages:
German
There are two subjunctive forms in German, which are present subjunctive
(Subjunctive I) and past subjunctive (Subjunctive II).
Dutch
Unlike in German, in Dutch we do not use the subjunctive very often. It is
normally part of fixed expressions. Even though the subjunctive can be
conjugated in all eight tenses, we only use it in the present tense.
Afrikaans
548
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Only the verb wees - “to be” has subjunctive forms in Afrikaans, but they are
seldom ever used in the present day.
In German, the verbs form the present subjunctive by dropping the final -n from the infinitive
and/or adding the appropriate personal ending to the root of a verb. Some plural forms have the same
form as the infinitive.
In Dutch, to form the singular form of the subjunctive, we also subtract the final -n from the
infinitive. The plural subjunctive, however, has the same form as the infinitive.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, as it was mentioned before, the verb wees - “to be” is the only
verb that has the present subjunctive form (See below).
Below is the table showing the example of conjugation of the verb Ger. arbeiten, Dut. werken
- “to work” in the present subjunctive in German and Dutch respectively:
German Dutch
German
In German, the most common use of subjunctive I relates to reporting quotation or indirect
speech.
Compare the following two examples, where the former quotes directly what was said (present
indicative is used) and the latter expresses it indirectly (subjunctive I is used):
549
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt: “Warum tanzt du nicht auch?” (present indicative)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie nicht auch tanze. (present subjunctive/subjunctive I)
Note that in German, when the verb in the subordinate clause is in the past, this is always
conveyed by the past participle plus the subjunctive I of the auxiliary verbs haben/sein - “to have/to be”.
For example:
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt: “Warum hast du mich nicht angerufen?” (present indicative)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie ihn nicht angerufen habe. (present subjunctive)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt: “Warum bist du nicht nach Südafrika geflogen?” (present indicative)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie nicht nach Südafrika geflogen sei. (present subjunctive)
- He asked her why she didn’t fly to South Africa.
Remember that the present subjunctive (subjunctive I) is found very commonly in journalese.
However, it is always interchangeable with the present indicative.
Because three of the six persons of the verb are identical to the present indicative, the past
subjunctive forms (See also the Past Subjunctive (Subjunctive II) p. 552) are more frequently used
instead of the present subjunctive forms, for all six persons, when reporting indirect speech.
Below are alternative versions of the previously mentioned examples that express indirect speech
in German:
550

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Example 1
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie nicht auch tanzt. (present indicative)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie nicht auch tanzte. (past subjunctive/subjunctive II)
Example 2
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie ihn nicht angerufen hat. (present indicative)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie ihn nicht angerufen hätte. (past subjunctive/subjunctive II)
Example 3
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie nicht nach Südafrika geflogen ist. (present indicative)
Ger. Er hat sie gefragt, warum sie nicht nach Südafrika geflogen wäre. (past subjunctive/subjunctive II)
Dutch
Unlike in German, in Dutch, the present subjunctive is usually used as part of fixed expressions.
For example:
Singular subjunctive:
Dut. Moge de beste speler winnen. - May the best player win.
Singular subjunctive:
Dut. Mogen de beste sporters winnen. - May the best sportsmen win.
NOTE:
Remember that in Dutch, even though the subjunctive can be conjugated in all
eight tenses, it is only used in the present tense.
Afrikaans
As it was said earlier, the Afrikaans verb wees - “to be” is the only verb that has subjunctive
forms. In particular, the third person singular form of the present subjunctive, sy, is still slightly
productive in Afrikaans. Study the following:
551
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Afr. Hoe dit (ook) sy,… - Whatever the case may be,...
Unlike in English, Dutch and Afrikaans, the past subjunctive is very common in daily German. It
is found in many common expressions and is used to express doubt or politeness.
For example, there is only one living example of the past subjunctive in English, i.e. “If I were
rich, I would buy an island.” “If I were rich” states a hypothesis, as opposed to “I was rich”, which states
a fact.
However, unlike Dutch and Afrikaans, German makes the same distinction, for example:
Hypothesis Fact
German Wenn ich reich wäre, würde ich eine Insel kaufen. Ich war reich.
Dutch Als ik rijk was, zou ik een eiland kopen. Ik was rijk.
As seen from the above table, German always makes the distinction between the past subjunctive
(i.e. subjunctive II) and the past indicative (i.e. the preterite or imperfect).
In English, for example, it is only obvious with certain persons of the verb “to be” where “was”
and “were” alternate, whereas in Dutch and Afrikaans it is not obvious at all.
Below we will discuss the past subjunctive in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Since the rules of the
past subjunctive formation and use are very divergent and particular for each language, it is necessary to
consider them separately in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
German
Note that the past subjunctive (or Subjunctive II) is used much more often than the present
subjunctive (Subjunctive I), as it is crucial in German. Below we will consider the formation of the past
subjunctive:
552

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Like in the preterite, it is important to note that the difference between a regular and an irregular
verb really comes to the fore in the past subjunctive in German (See also the Preterite p. 481).
For example, verb like Ger. trinken - “to drink” and many others, don’t differ from regular verbs
in the present subjunctive, but they certainly do in the past subjunctive.
Like in the preterite, the German verbs in the past subjunctive (subjunctive II) can be divided into
two major groups according to whether:
1. the preterite is formed by the addition of a suffix to the stem. This group of verbs is called “weak verbs”.
For example:
2. the past subjunctive is formed by a vowel change in the stem itself and by the addition of a suffix to the
changed stem. This category of verbs is called “strong verbs”. For instance:
The past subjunctive (subjunctive II) of regular verbs is formed by dropping the infinitive ending
-en and adding the appropriate personal ending to the present infinitive stem of a verb in German.
Below is the formula for the formation of the past subjunctive (subjunctive II) of the regular
verb Ger. tanzen - “to dance”:
Below is a table demonstrating the endings of regular verbs in the past subjunctive
(subjunctive II) in German:
553

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
What follows is the conjugation of a regular verb, Ger. tanzen - “to dance” in the past subjunctive
(subjunctive II).
1st per. sing. ich tanzte 1st per. pl. wir tanzten
3rd per. sing. er, sie, es tanzte 3rd per. pl. sie, Sie tanzten
German English
Remember that in German, the verbs marked with an asterisk require spelling changes in
addition to adding the appropriate personal endings (See below).
Just like in a verb conjugation of the preterite tense, in the past subjunctive, there are also some
verbs whose spelling changes in order to preserve the correct pronunciation (sound) presented in the
infinitive in German. Below are the rules of the spelling changes in a verb conjugation:
554

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• When the stem of a verb ends in -t or -d, an additional -e- is inserted between the stem and the -te,
-test, -te, -ten, -tet and -ten endings in the preterite, for example: arbeiten - to work and reden - to
talk:
Arbeiten: ich arbeitete - du arbeitetest - er/sie/es arbeitete - wir arbeiteten - ihr arbeitetet - sie
arbeiteten.
Reden: ich redete - du redetest - er/sie/es redete - wir redeten - ihr redetet - sie redeten.
Below are some common verbs that add an additional -e- before a -te, -test, -te, -ten, -tet
and -ten ending:
antworten to answer
arbeiten to work
bedeuten to mean
enden to end
falten to fold
kosten to cost
reden to talk
senden to send
warten to wait
• Verbs whose stem ends in a consonant + n or m also add an -e- before the endings -te, -test, -te, -ten,
-tet and -ten in the preterite in order to make them easier to pronounce, for instance: öffnen - to open
and widmen - to devote:
Öffnen: ich öffnete - du öffnetest - er/sie/es öffnete - wir öffneten - ihr öffnetet - sie öffneten.
Widmen: ich widmete - du widmetest - er/sie/es widmete - wir widmeten - ihr widmetet - sie widmeten.
atmen to breathe
öffnen to open
widmen to devote
zeichnen to draw
555

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Unlike the (weak) regular verbs which use the same infinitive stem, to form the past subjunctive
(subjunctive II), the strong verbs have stem changes to signify the past subjunctive in German.
Below is the formula for the formation of the past subjunctive (subjunctive II) of the irregular
verb Ger. singen - “to sing:
As you can see, the irregular verbs in the past subjunctive (subjunctive II) are formed by changing
of the vowel in the stem of the verb in German.
Compare how a typical strong verb is conjugated in the present subjunctive (subjunctive I) and in
the past subjunctive (subjunctive II):
Below we will conjugate the (strong) irregular verb, Ger. singen - “to sing”, in the subjunctive I
and in the subjunctive II:
German
Subjunctive I Subjunctive II
du singest du sängest
Furthermore, as it is seen from the table, in German, personal endings are also added to the past
subjunctive (subjunctive II) stem of irregular verbs to form the past subjunctive conjugations.
For example, the endings -est (in the 2nd person singular), -en (in the 1st and 3rd persons
plural), and -t (in the 2nd person plural) must be added to the preterite stem. The preterite stem is usually
considered to be the 3rd person singular in German, which must be memorized to conjugate strong verbs
correctly.
556

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Below is a table demonstrating the endings of irregular verbs in the subjunctive II in German:
Below is the full conjugation of an irregular (strong) verb Ger. werden - “to become” in the past
subjunctie (subjunctive II) in German:
1st per. sing. ich würde 1st per. pl. wir würden
3rd per. sing. er, sie, es würde 3rd per. pl. sie, Sie würden
It must be mentioned that in German a lot of strong verbs from the above table are practically
never used any more in the subjunctive II (See also The Subjunctive II Verb Forms that are still
Used in German p. 558).
Whenever an if-clause is used in combination with a would-clause, the verb in the if-clause uses a
subjunctive II form, thus we would express this phrase in the following way in German:
Ger. Es würde mich nicht überraschen, wenn sie ihn schon einmal träfe.
Although this is grammatically correct German, it sounds very unnatural and would rarely be
heard. The forms like träfe are normally replaced by treffen würde in natural sounding German, for
instance:
Ger. Es würde mich nicht überraschen, wenn sie ihn schon einmal treffen würde.
Compare the English: It wouldn't surprise me if she were to meet him before.
Note that with some of the more commonly used verbs, like kommen - “to come”, you can hear
either käme or kommen würde. Study the following:
557

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
However, with less common verbs only the latter will be usually heard (e.g.: not flöge but fliegen
würde). Observe the following:
Ger. Es würde mich nicht überraschen, wenn er nach Namibia fliegen würde.
German English
sein (wäre) to be
Below is the conjugation of the verbs Ger. sein and haben - “to be” and “to have” in the
subjunctive II in German:
German
to be to have
Ger. Wenn ich ein Auto hätte, würde ich nach Bern fahren.
558

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• Generally speaking, in addition to wäre and hätte, you will also need to use the subjunctive II of modal
verbs as well as that of werden and wissen, for example:
German English
Ger. Wenn sie Nüsse essen dürfte, würde sie den Kuchen probieren.
- If she was allowed to eat nuts, she would try the cake.
Ger. Wenn ich Sie noch einmal besuchen könnte, würde ich kommen.
Note that all of these verbs, with the exception of wissen, are normally used as auxiliary verbs.
We added the verb wissen only because of the frequency of the following expression:
- If only I knew.
559

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dutch
Just like in English, in Dutch, the past subjunctive form of the verb zijn - “to be”, which is ware -
“was/were”, is still used. However, its use limited to the following fixed expression:
Dut. Ik zou morgen naar Pretoria vliegen, ware het niet dat de vlucht morgen weer wordt geannuleerd.
- I would fly to Pretoria tomorrow were it not that the flight is cancelled again tomorrow.
Afrikaans
The past (imperfect) subjunctive form of the verb wees - “to be” , which is ware - “were", has
only survived in the following idiomatic expression:
The following examples show that the imperfect subjunctive has been replaced by the past
(imperfect) tense in modern Afrikaans, as in spoken English:
560

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Generally, passive constructions are formed when the objects of active constructions become the
subjects of the passive verbs. The following is the example of a passive construction in English:
The passive voice in the West Germanic languages is not very different from English and is
formed and used more or less exactly as it is in English. Below we will consider the formation of the
passive voice.
The passive voice is formed by using the conjugated forms of the verbs Ger. sein/werden, Dut.
zijn/worden and Afr. wees/word - “to be/to become” plus the past participle of the verb.
The person or the agent performing the action is normally introduced by the preposition von (in
German), door (in Dutch) and deur (in Afrikaans), which corresponds to the English “by”.
Below is the table that shows the formation of the passive voice in the West Germanic
languages:
English to be by
German Mein Vater kauft das Haus. Das Haus wird von meinem Vater gekauft.
Dutch Mijn vader koopt het huis. Het huis wordt door mijn vader gekocht.
561

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Like in English, in other West Germanic languages the passive voice can be used in all tenses,
which means that all tenses in the active voice can be replaced by an equivalent with the verb in the
passive voice.
For example, German, Dutch and/or Afrikaans, the passive voice can take the passive simple,
passive perfect, passive pluperfect, etc.
Below is the illustration of all forms of the passive voice in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. The 1st
person singular of the verb Ger. lesen; Dut. lezen; Afr. lees - "to read” was taken as an example.
Present tenses
Present Das Buch wird Het boek wordt Die boek word gelees The book is (being)
gelesen gelezen read
Present Das Buch ist gelesen Het boek is gelezen. Die boek is gelees The book has been
Perfect read
Past tenses
Preterite/ Das Buch wurde Het boek werd Die boek is gelees The book was
Imperfect gelesen gelezen (being) read
Pluperfect Das Buch war Het boek was gelezen Die boek was gelees The book had been
gelesen read
Future tenses
Future Das Buch wird Het boek zal gelezen Die boek sal gelees The book will be
gelesen werden worden word read
Future Das Buch wird Het boek zal gelezen Die boek sal gelees The book will have
Perfect gelesen worden sein zijn gewees het been read
Conditionals
Conditional Das Buch würde Het boek zou gelezen Die boek sou gelees The book would be
Present gelesen werden worden word read
Conditional Das Buch wäre Het boek zou gelezen Die boek sou gelees The book would have
Perfect gelesen worden zijn gewees het been read
562

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, on the other hand, we use two different verbs: Ger. sein and
werden, Dut. zijn and worden, Afr. wees and word - “to be” and “to become”.
• The verb Ger. werden, Dut. worden, Afr. word, the independent meaning of which is “to become”, is
used if the event is/was still going on at this particular moment (present/preterite/imperfect tense). In
English, we would use the simple tense of the verbs “to be”, “to become” or “to get”:
NOTE:
Unlike German and Duch, Afrikaans does not have the preterite (imperfect)
forms and, thus, wees - “to be” is used in the perfect form to express an action in
the past. Compare the following:
• The verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be” is used when we want to show that an event has
already happened or been done (perfect /pluperfect tense). In English, we would use the perfect tense of
the verb “to be".
563
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Present Simple:
Ger. Etwas muss getan werden. Ger. Er kann nicht gefeuert werden.
Dut. Iets moet gedaan worden. Dut. Hij kan niet ontslagen worden.
Afr. Iets moet gedoen word. Afr. Hy kan nie afgedank word nie.
Preterite (Imperfect):
Ger. Das Haus musste repariert werden. Ger. Er konnte nicht gefeuert werden.
Dut. Het huis moest gerepareerd worden. Dut. Hij kon niet ontslagen worden.
Afr. Die huis moes reggemaak word. Afr. Hy kon nie ontslaan word nie.
- The house had to be fixed. - He couldn't be fired.
Future:
Ger. Das wird gebaut werden müssen. Ger. Das wird gebaut werden können.
Dut. Daar zal gebouwd moeten worden. Dut. Dat zal gebouwd kunnen worden.
Afr. Dit sal gebou moet word. Afr. Dit sal gebou kan word.
Since the use of the modal verbs in the perfect tense may seem awkward (especially in the future
perfect), we will give the example only in the present perfect:
564

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Present Perfect:
Ger. Es hat getan werden können. Ger. Es hat getan werden sollen.
Dut. Dit had gedaan kunnen worden. Dut. Het had gedaan moeten worden.
Afr. Dit kon gedoen gewees het. Afr. Dit moes gedoen gewees het.
Use of the Introductory Ger. es, Dut. er, Afr. daar with Passives
German, Dutch and Afrikaans can sometimes use the passive voice in ways that are not easily
transferred to English.
For example, the introductory Ger. es, Dut. er and Afr. daar - “there/it” is often used to start a
passive main clause.
It should be noted that if some other element is put in the first position, the introductory Ger. es,
Dut. er and Afr. daar usually disappears. Compare two examples:
Example 1 Example 2
German Es wird nur Niederländisch gesprochen. Hier wird nur Niederländisch gesprochen.
Dutch Er wordt alleen Nederlands gesproken. Hier wordt alleen Nederlands gesproken.
Afrikaans Daar word net Nederlands gepraat. Hier word net Nederlands gepraat.
As we can see from the example 2, the introductory Ger. es and Dut. er - “there” is omitted in
German and Dutch, because we put the adverb hier in the first position.
Furthermore, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the passive voice introduced by Ger. es, Dut. er,
Afr. daar can also be used without any grammatical subject; such a construction must be expressed in
English by a paraphrase:
565

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It is worth mentioning that in German, the introductory Ger. es is especially common in the
passive with verbs that take the dative:
- I am being helped.
However, when another element is put in the first position, the German es normally disappears,
for example:
- I am often helped.
Unlike the passive voice, which is used with the verb Ger. werden, Dut. worden, Afr. word, the
statal passive must be used with the verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be” + the past participle,
which is used adjectivally. Compare the following:
However, note that German, Dutch and Afrikaans make no visual distinction between the perfect
tense of a passive action and the statal passive.
For example, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, “the street is blocked” (state of being) means the
same as saying “the street has been blocked”. These two phrases are expressed in the same way using the
verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be” in German, Dutch and Afrikaans respectively. Study the
following:
566

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Passive Active
German Dieses Lied wurde von einem bekannten Ein bekannter Sänger hat dieses Lied
Sänger geschrieben. geschrieben.
Dutch Dit nummer werd door een populaire Een populaire zanger heeft dit nummer
zanger geschreven. geschreven.
Afrikaans Hierdie liedjie is deur 'n gewilde sanger ’n Gewilde sanger het hierdie liedjie
geskryf. geskryf
English This song was written by a popular A popular singer wrote this song.
singer.
• Using an impersonal pronoun man (in German), men (in Dutch), mens (in Afrikaans):
When the agent is not given, it is possible to replace the passive voice by using an impersonal
pronoun Ger. man, Dut. men, Afr. mens meaning “one”, “they”, “people”. This construction uses the
active voice (See Impersonal Pronoun Ger. Man, Dut. Men, Afr. (’n) Mens - “One” p. 254).
NOTE:
When Ger. man, Dut. men, Afr, mens is used, the verb is conjugated in the 3rd
person singular.
567
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Remember that colloquially German, Dutch and Afrikaans can also use the generic Ger. du/Sie,
Dut. jij (je)/u, Afr. jy/u - “you” in the same way:
It is also possible to use the generic Ger. sie; Dut. ze, Afr. hulle - “they” in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans respectively. To demonstrate:
Constructions with the reflexive pronoun sich (in German), zichzelf (in Dutch), homself (in
Afrikaans) with the 3rd person singular or plural form of some verb are rather common in German,
Dutch and Afrikaans. There is an English equivalent, without the reflexive, but usually not.
Note that these constructions are predominantly used when the subject (the agent) by whom the
action is fulfilled is not a person or unimportant. In this case the verb agrees with the subject in number:
568

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• Using the construction Ger. sein + zu, Dut. zijn + te, Afr. wees + om te + infinitive:
The construction Ger. sein + zu, Dut. zijn + te, Afr. wees + om te + infinitive implies Ger.
können, Dut. kunnen, Afr. kan - “can” and is sometimes equivalent to the English “is/are to +
infinitive”. Study the following:
German sein + zu
Afrikaans wees + om te
It is worth noting that German, Dutch and Afrikaans use the passive voice somewhat a bit less
than English does. Overuse of the passive voice in German, Dutch an Afrikaans can make what is being
said impersonal and probably difficult to follow.
Below we will consider when the passive voice should be used in the West Germanic languages.
• When the action being done is more important rather than who actually does it:
569

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The Loch Logan Waterfront is the Ger. Hier wird eine neue Moschee gebaut.
largest shopping centre in central South
Africa. It spans around 80 000 m2 of space and Dut. Hier wordt een nieuwe moskee gebouwd.
offers a vast range of shopping, entertainment,
dining, sport and leisure options for locals and Afr. Hier word 'n nuwe moskee gebou.
visitors in Bloemfontein.
- Here a new mosque is being built.
• When the implied subject is not a person but an organization or a formal institution. In this case, the use
of the passive voice makes the text quite formal:
The continuous or progressive tenses show that the action of the verb is in the process of taking
place in the West Germanic languages.
570
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Unlike in English, in which the continuous tense is formed with the present participle (gerund) of
the verb with an appropriate form of the verb “to be” (e.g. I am reading a book.), in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, it is rendered simply by using the present simple tense, for example:
- I am reading a book.
Even though it is a usual way of expressing continuous structures in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, it is not the only way.
When a certain emphasis is put on the continuity of an action, the continuous structures can be
rendered in one of the following ways in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
German
• The following construction is commonly used in German if there is a need to emphasize that an action is
ongoing:
German English
For example:
• There is another common construction to render the continuous in German. Study the following:
German English
For instance:
Ger. - Was machen Sie? - Sie sind beim Studieren. (or Sie studieren.)
571

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
liggen lê to lie
Afr. Sy lê en slaap.
- She is sleeping.
- He is singing.
572

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
- We are cooking.
(lit.: “We are cooking and standing” or “We are cooking while standing)
It is worth saying that the verbs Dut. liggen, zitten, staan, lopen; Afr. lê, sit, staan, loop
should not be understood too literally in their dictionary meanings. These verbs do not necessarily have to
mean if the action being performed is being done in a standing or sitting position.
However, this is most usually the case and the verbs Dut. liggen, zitten, staan, lopen; Afr. lê,
sit, staan, loop can only be used with reference to actions that can be performed in those positions as
the following phrases show:
Afr. Sy lê en slaap.
Although the phrase Dut. Ze ligt te denken; Afr. Sy lê en dink. - “I am thinking” is possible, the
phrase Dut. Ze zit/staat te denken; Afr. Sy sit/staan en dink. - “I am thinking” would be a more
common option. Remember that this phrase can also be rendered by using the present simple tense, for
example:
Afr. Sy dink.
- She is thinking.
In Dutch, the perfect tense of this continuous construction is formed by omitting the preposition
te and using the conjugated verb hebben - “to have” + the infinitive form of verbs liggen, zitten, staan,
lopen + any other infinitive instead of a past participle to express the progressive.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, the present perfect tense is usually used in this case (See
Present Perfect p. 467).
573
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It should be mentioned that like in Afrikaans, in Dutch, the “normal” present perfect (non-
continuous) is used much more often than the continuous perfect. Study the same example:
• Like in English, in Dutch and Afrikaans the verb Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be" can also be used to
express the continuous.
It is formed by a conjugation of Dut. zijn, Afr. wees followed by the words Dut. aan het, Afr.
wees aan die + the infinitive of the verb that expresses the action.
The formula of this continuous construction in Dutch and Afrikaans is the following:
Note that the Dutch and Afrikaans word aan is a preposition meaning “at” and the word het in
Dutch and die in Afrikaans is a definite article “the”.
Remember that in order to form the continuous we need to conjugate the verbs Dut. zijn, Afr.
wees in the present tense (e.g. I am reading) or in the past tense (e.g. I was reading).
574

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Below is the table showing the example of conjugation of the verb Dut. zijn and Afr. wees in
the present tense:
Dutch zijn:
ik ben, jij bent, hij/zij/het is, wij zijn, + aan het
jullie zijn, zij zijn
+ infinitive
Afrikaans wees:
ek is, jy is, hy/sy/dit is, ons is, julle is, + aan die
hulle is
Below is the table showing the example of conjugation of the verb Dut. zijn and Afr. wees in
the past tense:
Dutch zijn:
ik was, jij was, hij/zij/het was, wij + aan het
waren, jullie waren, zij waren
+ infinitive
Afrikaans wees:
ek was, jy was, hy/sy/dit was, ons + aan die
was, julle was, hulle was
- I am reading a book.
Did you know? Dut. Hij is een brief aan het schrijven.
Düsseldorf is a city in western Germany Afr. Hy is 'n brief aan die skryf.
known for its world-class shopping,
fashion industry, and art scene. - He is writing a letter.
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, an older form of this structure is also used in the
written language, for example:
575
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• Another way to express an action in progress in Dutch and Afrikaans is with the following expresion:
The formula of this continuous construction in Dutch and Afrikaans is the following:
In English, this construction can be rendered as “to be busy/in the process of doing something”.
- I am writing a letter.
Note that very often the use of this structure corresponds to its literal equivalent in English, for
example:
This construction can also be used in the past in Dutch and Afrikaans, for instance:
576

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• There is another similar construction to render the continuous in Dutch and Afrikaans. Study the
following:
For instance:
- I am writing a letter.
Just like in English, in other West Germanic languages the continuous is normally used with
action verbs in order to express that an action is taking place.
• for an action that is taking place at the present moment. For example:
- I am eating.
577

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The Infinitive
Overview
The Infinitive is the basic form of the verb in any language. In English, the infinitive is preceded
by the preposition to (e.g. to go, to speak, to do etc.), while in the West Germanic languages, infinitives
are separated into three conjugations according to their endings.
In German and Dutch, infinitives nearly always end in -EN, whereas in Afrikaans infinitives do
not have endings. The infinitive forms show what an action is, but show nothing about who is doing the
action or at what time the action is performed.
In German and Dutch, in order to conjugate a verb, one needs to remove the infinitive ending and
add the appropriate tense's ending to the stem of the verb.
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans and English, there is almost no distinction between the
infinitive and the stem of the verb.
Below is a table helping to nd the stem from the in nitive of the regular verbs in West
Germanic languages:
Infinitive Stem
Remember that English always puts the particle “to” before the infinitive in isolation. In context,
however, there are occasions when this “to” may or may not be used.
Similarly in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, although the infinitive in isolation is never preceded
by Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. om te; in a sentence there are specific rules for when the particle Ger. zu, Dut.
te, Afr. om te is and is not used before an infinitive.
Rules for the use of Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. om te with Infinitives
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, as a general rule one can say that an infinitive which is
dependent on a preceding finite verb and is placed at the end of a clause is preceded by Ger. zu, Dut. te,
Afr. om te. To illustrate:
578

fi
fi
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
- It is difficult to understand.
• It is never used after modal verbs when a modal is the finite verb in the clause. German, Dutch and
Afrikaans shares this feature with English:
- I can do that.
Note that the English modal verb “to want to”, where the second “to” is part of the verb (compare
“to have to” above), unlike German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Study the following:
579

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• When “to” before an infinitive means “in order to”, we need to use Ger. um…zu, Dut. om…te, Afr.
om…te. This construction is called an infinitive clause.
This construction resembles the archaic English form “for to”. Study the following: “She went to
town for to buy a hat”. This form comes close to the literal meaning and feeling of Ger. um…zu, Dut.
om…te, Afr. om…te. Observe the following examples:
• When a sentence begins with an infinitive clause, where “to” also means “in order to”, Ger. um…zu,
Dut. om…te, Afr. om…te is also used:
Dut. Om een vreemde taal goed te leren, moet je in het land wonen.
Afr. Om 'n vreemde taal goed te leer, moet jy die land woon.
- (In order) To learn a foreign language well, you must live the country.
It should be said that in Dutch and Afrikaans, when a separable verb occurs in such an infinitive
clause, the Dut. om…te, Afr. om…te is placed between the prefix and the infinitive and the three are
written separately, for example:
580

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In German, however, the zu is used between the prefix and the infinitive and the
three must be written together, for instance:
• As a noun
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when a verb functions as a noun, the infinitive must be used,
whereas in English the gerund (the “-ing” form of a verb) is used in this case. Such nouns are always
neuter in German and Dutch, for example:
NOTE:
In German, verbs used as nouns are capitalized.
The infinitive can be used as the subject of a sentence or the object of another verb or preposition
in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Study the following:
581
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
If one verb follows another, the second verb takes the infinitive when the subject of the first verb
is the same as that of the second in the West Germanic languages.
It is common for the modal verbs (e.g. can, should, must), which are usually followed by an
infinitive with no in-between preposition and also for verbs expressing feelings, necessity, and
accomplishment in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. Observe the following:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, expressions with the link verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees -
“to be” + an adjective are usually followed by Ger. um…zu, Dut. om…te, Afr. om…te + an infinitive.
German sein + zu
Afrikaans wees + om te
For instance:
582

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
There are several Dutch, German and Afrikaans equivalents of the suffix “-able”, the most
common being Ger. -sam/-bar Dut. -zaam/-baar, Afr. -saam/-baar (See Adjective-forming
Suffixes in Germanic Languages p. 165).
When we want to say that something is “verb-able” (e.g. to understand -> understandable), we
can also use with the link verbs Ger. sein/bleiben, Dut. zijn/blijven, Afr. wees/bly - “to be/to stay” +
the particle Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. om te + an infinitive to express such constructions.
German sein/bleiben + zu
Afrikaans wees/bly + om te
Note that these constructions are considered to be adjectives. They do not have a present, past, or
perfect tense, nor does the infinitive function as an independent verb (See also Making Adjectives
from Verbs p. 167). Compare the word order of adjectives with the “verbable” constructions:
583

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the verb Ger. lassen, Dut. laten, Afr. laat
can also mean “to let” (See p. 585), for example:
It should be mentioned that if the object is a noun or a pronoun, they are placed before the
infinitive in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. For example:
Ger. Ich lasse die Kinder essen. - Ich lasse sie essen.
If either one or more of the objects is a pronoun, the object pronouns must follow the verb Ger.
lassen, Dut. laten, Afr. laat in German, Dutch and Afrikaans. If necessary, revise object pronouns (See
p. 263). Study the following:
Die Mutter lässt ihre De moeder laat haar Die ma laat haar dogter The mother has her
Tochter den Text lesen. dochter de tekst lezen. die teks lees. daughter read the text.
Die Mutter lässt ihre De moeder laat haar Die ma laat haar dogter The mother has her
Tochter es lesen. dochter het lezen. dit lees. daughter read it.
Die Mutter lässt sie den De moeder laat haar de Die ma laat haar die teks The mother has her read
Text lesen. tekst lezen. lees. the text.
Die Mutter lässt sie es De moeder laat haar het Die ma laat haar dit lees. The mother has her read
lesen. lezen. it.
584
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Note that the particle Ger. zu, Dut. te, Afr. om te is omitted before the infinitive in this case. A
few common verbs of perception are:
Unlike in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the infinitive follows the noun. The pronoun
is placed after the main verb. Study the following:
Ger. Ich lasse Paula die Lektion beenden -> Ich lasse sie die Arbeit beenden -> Ich lasse sie sie beenden.
Dut. Ik laat Paula de les beëindigen -> ik laat haar het werk beëindigen -> ik laat haar het beëindigen.
Afr. Ek laat Paula die les beëindig -> Ek laat haar die werk beëindig -> Ek laat haar dit beëindig.
- I let Paula finish the lesson -> I let her finish the work -> I let her finish it.
Ger. Ich sehe Ana lesen -> Ich sehe sie lesen.
Dut. Hij hoorde zijn vrouw zingen -> Hij hoorde haar zingen.
Afr. Hy het sy vrou hoor sing -> Hy het haar hoor sing.
- He heard his wife singing -> He heard her singing.
585

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The present participles (gerunds or -ing forms of the verb) also exist in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, but are only used as attributive adjectives.
Generally speaking the present participle (gerund) expresses the concept of “while doing”, “in
doing” or “by doing” in the West Germanic languages. Below we will consider the formation of the
present participle (gerund) in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
In English, participial adjectives from present participles are formed by adding to a verb the
ending -ing, e.g. working, speaking etc.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the present participle (gerund) is formed by adding Ger., Dut.-d
and Afr. -ende to the infinitive.
Below is a table showing how the present participle (gerund) of regular verbs is formed:
586
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
When used as an attributive adjective, the present participle follows the rules of adjectives (See
The Present Participle as an Adjective p. 167 and Declension of Adjectival Endings p. 142).
To illustrate:
- a sleeping cat.
The present participle is not as commonly used in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, as most English
“-ing” constructions are expressed in other ways. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the present participle
is used in the following instances:
• As an adjective
It is used as an attributive adjective that is formed from the present participle, in which case the
usual adjectival endings are added to the form in -d in German and Dutch if the adjective needs to be
inflected. An attributive adjective is put before a noun. Study the following example:
• As an adverb
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, it is frequently used as an adverb of manner, in which case it
often has a direct parallel in English (See also Adverbs of Manner p. 181):
587

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• As an adjectival noun
It may also be used to form adjectival nouns (See also Adjectival Nouns p. 100):
• As a verbal noun
The infinitive is used, rather than the gerund in order to form a verbal noun (See Use of the
Infinitive p. 581). Study the following:
- I like swimming.
The imperative mood is usually used to express orders or commands. The exclamation marks
must be used in the imperative (e.g. Stand up! Sit down!).
The West Germanic languages have several categories of commands that include both affirmative
and negative commands. They are: informal commands, formal commands, let’s commands and
indirect commands.
588

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
1. Informal Commands
Affirmative informal commands, are used to tell your friend, family member or child to do
something.
In German, the singular form of the affirmative informal command is like the du form of the verb
in the present tense, but without the -st or -t ending. For example, the imperative that corresponds to du
gibst - “you give” becomes gib - “give!” in the imperative.
The plural form of the affirmative informal command is identical with the 2nd person plural of
the present indicative.
Unlike in German, in Dutch, we do not have the plural form of the imperative. Instead, we use the
present tense of the 1st person singular to form the imperative construction. For regular verbs, this is the
verb stem.
NOTE:
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, however, the imperative is identical
to the stem of the verb regardless of whether one is addressing someone in the
polite or familiar form or whether it is singular or plural.
Observe the example of the singular and plural forms of the affirmative informal commands in
the West Germanic languages:
Sing. form of the Steh auf! Sta op! Staan op! Stand up!
informal command
Pl. form of the Steht auf! Sta op! Staan op! Stand up!
informal command
As you can see from the above example, some verbs are separable and the separable part of the
verb comes at the end (See also Verbal Prefixes p. 596):
NOTE:
In German, the du form of the imperative of all verbs, except those that change
e to i or ie, can add -e but this is usually dropped in spoken German, except
when the stem ends in -t, -d or -ig:
589
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
It is worth noting that just as in English, in Afrikaans, it is possible to insert a second person
pronoun Afr. jy - “you” when uttering an emphatic imperative. However, in such cases, inversion of the
pronoun and the verb takes place in Afrikaans, for example:
- You do it!
2. Formal Commands
In German, formal commands, or Ger. Sie commands are usually used while addressing people
you do not know very well, people older than you or people you show respect, such as teachers, bosses and
etc. With the Sie form, the imperative form is the same as the present tense form of the 3rd person plural.
Note that in this case we also add the personal pronoun Sie that is put after the verb.
In Dutch, if we want to be polite, we can use the present tense of the more formal 2nd person.
Note that if we use the polite imperative, we must add the personal pronoun u:
NOTE:
It should be remembered that in Afrikaans, the polite form of the imperative is
identical to the stem of the verb regardless of whether.
Study the example of the formal commands in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
3. “Let’s” Commands with the Verbs Ger. Lassen, Dut. Laten, Afr. Laat
There is another way to form the “let’s” commands in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, which is by
using the following construction:
590
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dutch laten + we
+ infinitive
Afrikans laat + ons
English let us
We must put the verb Ger. lassen (lass) in the 1st form singular of the present indicative (lass)
in German, and Dut. laten in the plural form (laten) in Dutch, for example:
4. Indirect Commands
Indirect commands are given to an unspecific recipient and are used in a general sense applying
to all listeners.
In order to form the indirect commands in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, we must use the
infinitive form of the verb. Such commands are generally used in public signs and instructions. Study the
following:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the negative of the imperative is expressed by the auxiliary monie
- “don’t” (See The Negative Imperative p. 592)
Irregular Imperative of Ger Sein, Dut. Zijn, Afr. Wees - “to Be”
The imperative of Ger sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be” is totally irregular and is particularly
common in German and Dutch. Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans the verb Afr. wees - “to be” is
regular in the imperative.
591
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Below is a table showing imperative forms of Ger sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be”:
For example:
- Do not be angry!
• In German, if irregular verbs change the e of their stem to i or ie in the present tense, they also apply
that change in the du form of the imperative (See List of Irregular Verbs in the Present Tense in
German p. 418), for example:
• If irregular verbs change the a of their stem to ä in the present tense, they do not apply that change in
the du form of the imperative, for instance:
Negative commands are formed differently in the West Germanic languages, except German and
Dutch which have similar ways of forming negative commands. Thus, German and Dutch negative
commands should be regarded simultaneously while Afrikaans - separately.
592

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
It should be mentioned that object pronouns are usually put after the verb in
negative commands in German and Dutch.
Dut. Ga niet!
- Do not go!
Afrikaans
In Afrikaans, the negative commands are formed by placing monie in front of the verb and nie
after it or at the end of the phrase. In Afrikaans object pronouns can be placed before or after the verb in
negative commands. Observe the following:
- Do not go!
593
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans there special formulas that can be used to soften the commands
to sound more polite.
tu mir einen Gefallen doe me een plezier doen my 'n guns do me a favor
For instance:
When adding Ger. bitte, Dut. alsjeblieft, Afr. asseblief - “please” to a command, it can go in
different places in German whereas in English it can only go at the beginning or the end; the third option
is the most common in German, e.g.
Ger. Bitte komm nicht zu spät nach Hause! (or Komm bitte nicht zu spät nach Hause!)
Dut. Alsjeblieft kom niet te laat thuis! (or Kom alsjeblieft niet te laat thuis!)
Afr. Asseblief, moenie kom nie te laat huis toe! (or Moenie kom alsjeblieft nie te laat huis toe!)
NOTE:
In Dutch, we can also add the words Dut. even or eventjes to make the
imperative or the order sound softer. These words literally mean “for a little
while” or “in a moment”:
- Stand up!
Alternatively softened commands can be expressed as questions in the West Germanic languages.
For example:
594
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
In Dutch, there special words that can be used to soften the commands to sound more polite or to
express frustration or impatience.
Dutch
even, eventjes
toch
nou eens
Even, Eventjes
• As it was mentioned previously, we can use the word even or its diminutive equivalent eventjes to
make the order sound less heavy in Dutch. These particles literally mean “for a little while” or “in a
moment”, for example:
Toch
• In order to express frustration, in Dutch, we can add the word toch to the imperative.
Nou eens
• To express impatience, the word nou eens is used. We can use this when someone is repeatedly (not)
doing something. This construction can also be used with the word toch.
595

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Reflexive Verbs
Reflexive verbs are dealt with under reflexive pronouns in German, Dutch and Afrikaans (See p.
276).
Verbal Prefixes
Overview
German, Dutch and Afrikaans have a complex system of verbal prefixes. These prefixes can be
separable or inseparable. We will explain this distinction below.
NOTE:
Compared to German, Dutch and Afrikaans, English has a similar, but less
frequently applied concept. In English we use various prepositions that are
added to a verb.
Just like in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, in English, the prepositions are used
to make a new verb with a distinct meaning.
Study, for example, what happens when different prepositions are added to a
verb like “to throw”: “to throw (something) away/out”, “to throw (money)
around”, “to throw up”.
To illustrate, let us take the verb Ger. stehen, Dut. staan, Afr. staan - “to stand”. Study the
following sentence:
If one adds a separable prefix, the meaning of the verb changes. For example:
596
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
As their name imply, separable prefixes can be detached, which means that one can sometimes
separate the prefix from a verb. If one conjugates the verbs with separable prefixes, the separable prefixes
must be separated and put at the end of the main clause or sentence in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans.
Study the following:
What follows is the full conjugation of a separable verb, Ger. aufstehen, Dut. opstaan, Afr.
opstaan - “to stand up”, in the present tense.
er, sie, es steht auf hij, zij, het, U staat op hy, sy, dit staan op he, she, it gets up
sie, Sie stehen auf zij staan op hulle staan op they stand up
• It is worth saying that in the future tense, which is formed with the auxiliary verb Ger. werden, Dut.
zullen, Afr. sal, the separable prefix remains attached to the main verb, and the main verb with the
separable prefix is put at the end of the main clause in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans (See The Future
Tense p. 531). Observe the following:
597

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
German and Dutch
The auxiliary verb Ger. werden, Dut. zullen must be conjugated to form the
future tense in German and Dutch (See p. 532).
Afrikaans
Remember that, unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, verbs don't inflect in
person or number.
• It would also be important to mention how the separable prefixes function when one uses the
conjunction Ger. dass, Dut. dat, Afr. dat - “that” in West Germanic languages (See Conjunctions p.
753). Compare the following sentences:
As seen from the second example, when the conjunction Ger. dass, Dut. dat, Afr. dat - “that” is
used in the sentence, the separable prefix is added again to the main verb in German, Dutch, and
Afrikaans.
NOTE:
German and Dutch
The main verb must be conjugated and is placed at the end of the subordinate
clause in German and Dutch.
Afrikaans
Unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, the main verb is not conjugated and
is placed before the second negative nie, which is always positioned at the end
of the sentence (See Negation p. 515).
• In the past participle, the separable verbal prefix is also attached. However, unlike the inseparable
prefixes, the separable prefixes do not replace the prefix ge- in West Germanic languages (See The
Past Participle p. 439, The Present Perfect p. 467, and Inseparable Verbal Prefixes p. 622):
598
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
• In German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, when the verb is in the form of an infinitive with Ger. zu, Dut. (om)
te, Afr. om te, the Ger. zu, Dut. te, and Afr. te must come between the prefix and the main verb (See
The Infinitive p. 578). For example:
NOTE:
Dutch and Afrikaans
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the infinitive is used with om te in
this case, where om is put after the first verb, and te is placed between the
verbal prefix and the main verb in the form of three separate words: “op te
staan”.
In Dutch, however, om can be omitted in this case), e.g.:
• In German, Dutch, and Afrikaans, many, not all, separable verbal prefixes are derived from prepositions
and retain much of the meaning that they had in that form (See Prepositions p. 676).
- up, on, on top of, upward (prep.) > to get up, to stand up (v.)
• Verbs with separable or inseparable prefixes can also become nouns or adjectives and adverbs, for
instance:
599
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
600

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. ab-, Dut. and Afr. af- usually, but not always, conveys the
meaning of “away from”.
601

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Es hängt von mir ab. Ger. Sie lenkt mich ab.
The separable verbal prefix Ger. auf-, Dut. op-/open-, Afr. op- /oop- usually adds the
meanings “on”, “open”, “out”, “up”, or “un-”:
602

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
603

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. an-, Dut. and Afr. aan- usually conveys the meanings “at”,
“begin”, “on”, “onward”, “to”, or “toward”:
604

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Sie kommt morgen am Flughafen an. Ger. Er schaltet das Radio an.
Dut. Ze komt morgen op het vliegveld aan. Dut. Hij zet de radio aan.
Afr. Sy kom môre by die lughawe aan. Afr. Hy skakel die radio aan.
605

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. aus-, Dut. and Afr. uit- means “out”, “outward”, “extended”,
“completely”, “missing”:
ausradieren, uitvegen, uitwissen uitvee, uitwis to erase, wipe out, rub out
auswischen
ausrotten uitroeien uitroei to eradicate, exterminate,
root out
ausrüsten uitrusten uitrus to equip
606

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
German
The verb “to invite” is used with the ein- prefix: einladen (See p. ).
The separable verbal prefix Ger. bei-, Dut. bij-, Afr. by- means “along”, “with”, or “additional”:
- I'm contributing.
607
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. durch-, Dut. door-, Afr. deur- has the meaning of entering a
process with purpose and coming out the other end:
Ger. Sie arbeitet den ganzen Tag durch. Ger. Er lässt sie durch.
608

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the verbs that are marked with an asterisk have
the inseparable prefix Ger. durch-, Dut. door-, Afr. deur- (See Inseparable
Verbal Prefixes p. 622). For example:
The separable verbal prefix Ger. ein-, Dut., Afr. in- designates “in”, “into”, “inward”.
609
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Er nimmt diese Pillen ein. Ger. Packst du ihren neuen Laptop ein?
Dut. Hij neemt deze pillen in. Dut. Pak jij haar nieuwe laptop in?
Afr. Hy neem hierdie pille in. Afr. Pak jy haar nuwe skootrekenaar in?
NOTE:
German
Note that one of the verbs that mean “to intervene” is not used with the ein- prefix:
intervenieren.
Dutch
The verb “to invite” is used with the uit- prefix: uitnodigen in Dutch.
610
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. fest-, Dut., Afr. vas(t)- indicates “firm” or “fixed”. It often
appears as an adverb or adjective, e.g. Ger. fest glauben, Dut. vast geloven - “to believe firmly”.
The separable verbal prefix Ger. herein-, Dut. binnen-, Afr. binne- indicates to “come in”, for
example into a real or metaphorical space that identifies the speaker's point of orientation:
611

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. los-, Dut., Afr. los- can designate the beginning of an action or
carry the sense of “away”, “off” or “un-”:
The separable verbal prefix Ger. mit-, Dut., Afr. mee- is attached to the verb to indicate joining
or participating in the activity. It is akin to the English “with” or “along”.
612

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Sie bringen selten Kinder mit. Ger. Sie singen immer mit.
Afr. Hulle bring selde kinders mee. Afr. Hulle sing altyd mee.
The separable verbal prefix Ger. nach-, Dut., Afr. na- has a variety of meanings. When attached
to a verb of motion, it can mean to “follow after”.
In some cases, the act of “following” can indicate a testing or other kind of follow-up of a previous
action. Ger. nach- and Dut. na- can also designate imitation or reduction.
613

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable prefix Ger. nieder-, Dut., Afr. neer- means “down” or “lower”.
614

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The verbal prefix Ger. um-, Dut., Afr. om- is often separable. It has a variety of meanings:
“around”, “down”, “about”, and “over”. It also can designate substantial types of change:
615

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Sie baut ihr Schlafzimmer um. Ger. Er rechnet Fuß immer in Meter um.
Dut. Ze bouwt haar slaapkamer om. Dut. Hij zet voeten altijd in meters om.
Afr. Sy bou haar slaapkamer om. Afr. Hy skakel voete altyd na meters om.
NOTE:
German
The verb “to jump around”, “to stand around”, and “fly around” are used with the
herum- prefix: herumspringen, herumstehen, herumfliegen respectively.
However, it should be noted that the verbal prefix Ger. um, Dut. om-, Afr. om- may also be
inseparable in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans.
The separable verbal prefix Ger. vor-, Dut. and Afr. voor- has the meanings “before”, “forward”,
“pre-”, and “pro-”:
616
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Er bereitet das Frühstück vor. Ger. Dieses Tier kommt in Afrika nicht vor.
Dut. Hij bereidt het ontbijt voor. Dut. Dit dier komt niet in Afrika voor.
Afr. Hy berei die ontbyt voor. Afr. Hierdie dier kom nie in Afrika voor nie.
NOTE:
Dutch and Afrikaans
The verbal prefix ver- in Dut. verkiezen, Afr. verkies - “prefer” is inseparable
(See Inseparable Verbal Prefixes p. 622). For example:
Dutch
The separable verbal prefix Dut. klaar- can also be used in the verb klaarmaken
to mean “get ready, prepare” in Dutch. For example:
617
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable verbal prefix Ger. voraus-, Dut., Afr. vooraf- means “in advance” or
“beforehand”:
The separable verbal prefix Ger. vorbei-, Dut. voorbij- and Afr. verby- means “past” or “just
beyond”:
Ger. Ein Jahr geht schnell vorbei. Ger. Das Auto fährt vorbei, ohne anzuhalten
Dut. Een jaar gaat snel voorbij. Dut. De auto rijdt voorbij zonder te stoppen
Afr. 'n Jaar gaan vinnig verby. Afr. Die kar ry verby sonder om te stop
- A year goes by quickly. - The car is going/driving by without stopping.
618

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Dutch
The separable verbal prefix Dut. langs- can also mean “past” in Dutch:
Dutch English
The separable verbal prefix Ger., Dut. and Afr. weg- usually means “away”.
619
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Ich gehe heute weg. Ger. Ich führte das Kind von dem Hund weg.
Dut. Ik ga vandaag weg. Dut. Ik leidde het kind van de hond weg.
Afr. Ek gaan vandag weg. Afr. Ek het die kind van die hond af weggelei.
- I am going away today. - I led the child away from the dog.
The separable prefix Ger. zu-, Dut. and Afr. toe- means “closed”, “to”, “towards”, “upon”:
Ger. Warum lässt du das zu? Ger. Ben gibt das zu.
Dut. Waarom laat je dat toe? Dut. Ben geeft dat toe.
Afr. Hoekom laat jy dit toe? Afr. Ben gee dit toe.
620

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable prefix Ger. zurück-, Dut. terug-/achter-, Afr. terug-/agter- means “back”,
“behind”, or “re-”:
Ger. Er brachte das Buch in die Bibliothek zurück. Ger. Sie kommt wieder zurück.
Dut. Hij bracht het boek naar de bibliotheek terug. Dut. Ze komt weer terug.
Afr. Hy het die boek teruggebring na die biblioteek. Afr. Sy kom weer terug.
- He brought (took) the book back to the library. - She is coming back again.
NOTE:
Dutch and Afrikaans
The verbs “to stay behind” and “to leave behind” are used with the prefix: Dut.
achter- , Afr. agter-, for example: Dut. achterblijven/achterlaten and Afr.
agterbly/agterlaat respectively in Dutch and Afrikaans.
621
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The separable prefix Ger. zusammen-, Dut. samen-, Afr. saam- means “together”.
622

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
- He is standing on an island.
Just like with the separable prefixes, when one adds a non-separable prefix, the meaning of the
verb changes. For example:
Unlike the separable prefixes, these prefixes are always attached to the verb and never get
separated from it in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans. Study the following:
NOTE:
It would not be correct to say:
Remember that the prefix be- is always attached to the verb and never gets
separated from the verb in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans.
What follows is the full conjugation of an inseparable verb, Ger. bestehen, Dut. bestaan, Afr.
bestaan - “to exist, to consist”, in the present tense.
623
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
er, sie, es besteht hij, zij, het, U bestaat hy, sy, dit bestaan he, she, it exists
• In the future tense, just like the separable verbal prefix, the inseparable verbal prefix stays attached to
the main verb, and the main verb is placed at the end of the main clause in German, Dutch, and
Afrikaans. For instance:
• It is also worth saying how the inseparable prefixes function when we use the conjunction Ger. dass,
Dut. dat, Afr. dat - “that” in West Germanic languages (See Conjunctions p. 753).
Ger. Ich weiß, dass das Land nicht aus vielen Inseln besteht.
Dut. Ik weet dat het land niet uit veel eilanden bestaat.
Afr. Ek weet dat die land nie uit baie eilande bestaan nie.
624

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
As seen from the second example, when the conjunction Ger. dass, Dut. dat, Afr. dat - “that” is
used in the sentence, the separable prefix remains attached to the stem of the main verb in German,
Dutch, and Afrikaans.
NOTE:
German and Dutch
The main verb must be conjugated and is placed at the end of the subordinate clause
in German and Dutch.
Afrikaans
It should noted that, unlike in German and Dutch, in Afrikaans, the main verb is not
conjugated and is placed before the second negative nie, which is always positioned
at the end of the sentence (See Negation p. 515).
• In the past participle, the inseparable verbal prefixes are also attached. However, unlike the separable
prefixes, the inseparable prefixes replace the prefix ge- in West Germanic languages (See The Past
Participle p. 439, The Present Perfect p. 467, and Separable Verbal Prefixes p. 596).
Compare the following:
Separable verbs in the past participle Inseparable verbs in the past participle
Ger. Ich bin sehr früh aufgestanden. Ger. Das Land hat aus vielen Inseln bestanden.
Dut. Ik ben heel vroeg opgestaan. Dut. Het land heeft uit vele eilanden bestaan.
Afr. Ek het baie vroeg opgestaan. Afr. Die land het uit baie eilande bestaan.
- I have gotten up very early. - The country has consisted of many islands
• When the verb is in the form of an infinitive with Ger. zu, Dut. (om) te, Afr. om te, the zu (in
German), te (in Dutch), and te (in Afrikaans) must come before the inseparable prefix and the main
verb in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans (See The Infinitive p. 578). For example:
625
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
Afrikaans
Remember that in Afrikaans, the infinitive is formed using om te, where om is put
after the first verb, and te is placed before the inseparable verbal prefix and the
main verb.
• Remember that when spoken, the inseparable verbal prefix is unstressed. The first syllable of the stem
normally receives the stress.
• Verbs with prefixes (separable or inseparable) can often become nouns or adjectives and adverbs, for
example:
626
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Just like in English (e.g. to belittle, to beknight, to bespeak, etc.), in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, the inseparable prefix Ger. be-, Dut., Afr, be- makes a verb transitive:
627

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Dut. Wat betekent het bericht? Dut. Hij begaat een fout.
Ger. Dieses Land entwickelt sich sehr schnell. Ger. Ich entwerfe Kleider.
Dut. Dit land ontwikkelt zich zeer snel. Dut. Ik ontwerp jurken.
628

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Er gehorcht ihnen nicht. Ger. An diesem Tag gedenken wir der Königin.
Afr. Hy gehoorsaam hulle nie. Afr. Op hierdie dag herdenk* ons die koningin.
- He does not obey them. - On this day we commemorate the queen.
629

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
NOTE:
German
The verb glauben does not have the prefix -ge.
Dutch
The verb herdenken is formed with the prefix -her, not -ge.
Afrikaans
The verbs floreer, herdenk, glo are not formed with the prefix -ge.
The verbal prefix Ger. über-, Dut. over-, Afr. oor- is often inseparable in German, Dutch, and
Afrikaans. It means “over”, “past”, "too much”, or “fail to”.
630
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Ich übernachte im Haus meines Freundes. Ger. Er übertrifft unsere Erwartungen.
Dut. Ik overnacht in het huis van mijn vriend. Dut. Hij overtreft onze verwachtingen.
Note that the following verbs have the inseparable prefix über- in German and the separable
prefix over- and oor- in Dutch and Afrikaans respectively.
631

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
Ger. Sie überweisen das Geld. Ger. Caroline überspringt die Klasse.
Dut. Zij maken het geld over. Dut. Caroline slaat de klas over.
Afr. Hulle dra die geld oor. Afr. Caroline slaan die klas oor.
It should be mentioned that the verbal prefix Ger. über, Dut. over- may also be separable in
German, Dutch, and Afrikaans. When an inseparable prefix, it means “over” or “across” (See Separable
Verbal Prefixes p. 596):
Ger. Lass auch ein Stück vom Kuchen für mich über! Ger. Kleine Töpfe laufen schnell über.
Dut. Laat ook een stukje van de taart voor mij over! Dut. Kleine potten lopen snel over.
Afr. Los vir my ook 'n stukkie van die koek oor! Afr. Klein potte loop vinnig oor.
- Leave a piece of the cake over for me as well! - Small pots overflow quickly.
632

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The verbal prefix Ger. unter-, Dut., Afr. onder- is almost always inseparable. It has a number of
meanings, including “below”, “beneath”, “down”, “under, “lower”, or “sub-”:
NOTE:
The prefix Ger. unter-, Dut. onter- in the following verbs is separable in German
and Dutch:
German Dutch English
For example:
633
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The inseparable prefix Ger. ver-, Dut. ver-, Afr. ver- conveys a variety of meanings. It generally
denotes a change. It can also have the connotation of “making things worse”. It can also denote a reversed
process or that the action of the verb miscarried. This prefix is sometimes equivalent to the English
prefixes “fore-“ or “fore-“:
Below are some common verbs with the pre x Ger. ver-, Dut. ver-, and Afr. ver-:
634

fi
CHAPTER 6: VERBS
sich verlieben, verlieven, verliefd verlief, verlief wees to fall in love, be in love
verliebt sein worden, verliefd zijn
verlieren verliezen verloor to lose
Ger. Ich verbessere mein Deutsch jeden Tag. Ger. Wir verkaufen Bücher.
635

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The verbal prefix Ger. voll-, Dut. vol-, Afr. vol- is often inseparable in German, Dutch, and
Afrikaans. It usually means “full”, “complete”, or “finished”.
It should be mentioned that the verbal prefix Ger. voll, Dut. vol-, Afr. vol- may also be separable
in German, Dutch, and Afrikaans.
636

CHAPTER 6: VERBS
The inseparable prefix Ger. wider-, Dut. weer-, Afr. weer- usually conveys the meaning of
“against”, or “back”:
In the case of separable verbs, when spoken, the separable verbal prefix is always emphasized in
German, Dutch, and Afrikaans. Observe the following:
In the case of non-separable verbs, the inseparable verbal prefix is unstressed. The word stem is
normally emphasized instead, for instance:
637

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
In West Germanic languages, numerals can be in four forms, i.e. cardinals (e.g. one, two, three,
four, etc.), ordinals (e.g. first, second, third, fourth, etc.), fractions (e.g. half, one third, etc.) and
collectives (e.g. a couple, a dozen).
Cardinal Numbers
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the cardinal numbers are as follows:
638

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
639

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
640

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Note that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, unlike in English, numbers between 21 and 99 that
are not multiples of ten (20, 30, 40, 50 etc.) are expressed in reverse: one-and-thirty, two-and-thirty,
three-and-thirty, and so on. This pattern also covers numbers in the hundreds place, thousands place,
millions place.
Unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German the raw numeral eins - “one” is predominantly used
while counting. When followed by a noun, it is identical in form to the indefinite article “a/an” and agrees
in case and gender with a noun (See Indefinite Articles p. 218).
German Ich habe nur einen Sohn. Ich habe nur eine Tochter. Ich habe nur ein Haus.
(masc. acc.) (fem. acc.) (neut. acc.)
Dutch Ik heb maar één zoon. Ik heb maar één dochter. Ik heb maar één huis.
Afrikaans Ek het net een seun. Ek het net een dogter. Ek het net een huis.
English I have only one son. I have only one daughter. I have only one house.
It should be mentioned that in German and Afrikaans, just like in English, Ger. ein and Afr. een/
‘n - “one/a” can be used before Ger. hundert and tausend and Afr. honderd and duisend.
641

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
NOTE:
In Dutch, however, één is not added to honderd and duizend.
German, Dutch and Afrikaans use dots to separate thousands while English uses a comma, and a
comma is used to mark the decimal in the West Germanic languages whereas English utilizes a point.
Observe the following:
1.250.300 1,250,300
2,50 2.50
Despite a certain number of common rules, each West Germanic language has its own set of
peculiar spelling rules of cardinal numbers, which ought to be regarded individually.
German
1. Note that in compound numerals like 21 - einundzwanzig etc. the -s is dropped in German:
21 einundzwanzig 61 einundsechzig
31 einunddreißig 71 einundsiebzig
41 einundvierzig 81 einundachtzig
51 einundfünfzig 91 einundneunzig
2. In colloquial German, zwei - “two” is frequently pronounced zwo, particularly when spelling out
numbers, for example:
642
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
16 sechzehn 60 sechzig
4. Furthermore, the -en of sieben - “seven” is dropped in numbers 17 and 70, for example::
17 siebzehn 70 siebzig
5. Remember that only number 30 (dreißig) ends in -ßig rather than -zig like numbers 20, 40, 50 etc.
Observe the following:
20 zwanzig 60 sechzig
30 dreißig 70 siebzig
40 vierzig 80 achtzig
50 fünfzig 90 neunzig
6. In German, hundert and tausend mean “a hundred” and “a thousand”. Einhundert and
eintausend render “one hundred” and “one thousand”. Note that “hundreds of/thousands of” is
translated as follows:
- hundreds/thousands of apples
7. With numerals after 101 German drops “and” between the hundreds and the tens, just like in American
English:
643

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
8. It is worth saying that all German numbers below a million are written out as a single word. Million,
Milliarde, and Billion, however, are written separately, for example:
85 200 790:
Dutch
1. Note that numerals 13, 14, 30, 40 and 80 have irregular spelling in Dutch:
2. In spoken Dutch, zeven, zeventien, zeventig are often pronounced zeuven, zeuventien,
zeuventig (the stressed e is pronounced as ø). Also, zeventig is pronounced as seventig (the initial
sound is s). Note that this pronunciation is only heard in the Netherlands.
3. Dutch doesn’t add één to honderd and duizend - “hundred” and “thousand”, neither does it add en
- “and” between hundreds and the rest of the number or thousands and the rest of the number:
4. It is worth saying that honderd and duizend - “hundred” and “thousand” are written separately in
Dutch, for example:
1.555:
644

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
15.325:
Afrikaans
1. Just like in Dutch, in Afrikaans numerals 13, 14, 17, 19, 30, 40, 70, 80 and 90 have irregular spelling for
historical reasons:
2. Furthermore, in spoken Afrikaans, nege, negentien, negentig are often pronounced with /x/ but /g/
is also heard.
Also, the variants neëntien/neëntig - “nineteen/ninety” are also very frequent, as is neën when
used as a cardinal numeral in combination with tens, for example:
29:
Afr. neën-en-twintig
3. Like in English and German, in Afrikaans ’n honderd and ’n duisend mean “a hundred” and “a
thousand”, whereas eenhonderd or eenduisend render “one hundred” and “one thousand”.
4. Furthermore, unlike Dutch, Afrikaans add en - “and” and a hyphen between 100 and 1-19, but not to
other numerals, for example:
However, between 100 and 21-99 the numerals are written without a hyphen. Study the following:
645

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
5. It is worth saying that like hundreds, all multiples of a thousand are written using en - “and” and a
hyphen between 1000 and 1-19 in Afrikaans, for example:
2.018:
Afr. tweeduisend-en-agttien
4.050:
Afr. vierduisend-en-vyftig
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, the following alternatives are possible:
2.200:
Following are phrases of approximation which are used with cardinal numbers in the West
Germanic languages:
646
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
• To count:
• For prices:
647
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ger. Wie viel kostet dieser Mantel? - Dieser Mantel kostet neunzig Euro.
Dut. Hoeveel kost deze jas? - Deze jas kost negentig euro.
Afr. Hoeveel kos hierdie jas? - Hierdie jas kos negentig euro.
- How much does this coat cost? - This coat costs ninety euros.
In the West Germanic languages, one must conjugate the verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees -
“to be” to the subject in order to indicate the age of a person. For example:
Ger. Wie alt bist du? - Ich bin 25 (fünfundzwanzig) Jahre alt.
The table below shows the idea of how to tell the time of day in the West Germanic
languages:
648

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ger. Wie spät ist es? - Es ist ein Uhr (es ist vier Uhr).
Dut. Hoe laat is het? - Het is één uur (Het is vier uur).
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the word uur and a cardinal number are written as one word.
However, if a cardinal number ends in a vowel, the word uur and this cardinal
number are hyphenated:
• To read years:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the years are generally read just like in English. So 1975 would be Dut.
negentienvijfenzeventig, Afr. negentien vyf-en-sewentig - “nineteen seventy-five.”
In German, however, when you name the century, you must add Ger. “hundert”, which means
“hundred”. Therefore, 1975 would be Ger. neunzehn-hundert-fünf-und-siebzig means seventeen-
hundred. Study more examples:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, all the years from 2000 upwards are
pronounced as follows:
649
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ordinal Numbers
Ordinal numbers are numbers that indicate the order of nouns and just like cardinal numbers,
ordinal numbers are also adjectives.
However, unlike cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers must agree both in number and in gender
with the noun they modify in German and Dutch, and in case in German.
Also, ordinal numbers usually precede nouns in the West Germanic languages.
NOTE:
In German, the ordinal numbers are given in the nominative masculine below.
The table below shows the German, Dutch and Afrikaans ordinal numbers:
650
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
651

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
652

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
For example:
The English abbreviations “1st’, 2nd, 3rd, 4th” used with ordinal numbers are all expressed in
German by placing a full-stop, in Dutch and Afrikaans by adding -ste, -d after the numeral.
NOTE:
However, in Dutch, the -e is added instead after all numerals nowadays.
1., 2., 3., 4. 1e, 2e, 3e, 4e 1ste, 2de, 3de, 4de 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th
West Germanic languages have their own set of exceptions and special spelling rules of ordinal
numbers, which we will consider below.
653
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
German
1. Note that all ordinals end in -er, -e, -es etc. in German. Ordinals are used as both adjectives and
adjectival nouns and thus must be inflected like all other adjectives.
Below is the table demonstrating the declension of the ordinal number erste(-r/-s). - “the
first”:
German
For example:
Ger. Ich feiere den ersten Arbeitstag. (Weak dec., acc., masc.)
654

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ger. Er hat einen ersten Kunden eingeladen. (Mixed dec., acc., masc.)
Dutch
2. The ordinal number tweede - “second” is spelled with double ee, even if the /e/ sound occurs in an
open syllable in Dutch.
Afrikaans
1. The n that is added in the cardinals 17, 19, 7o and 90 is also used in the ordinals 7 and 9, for example:
17 sewentiende
19 negentiende
2. In Afrikaans, inclusion or omission of en - “and” in the ordinals over 100th corresponds with where it
is used with cardinal numerals (See p. 645).
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, ordinal numbers can be used to indicate dates. For example:
Below is a table demonstrating the formation of a full date in the West Germanic languages:
the definite article (Ger. der, Dut. de, Afr. die) + ordinal number + month
655

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
NOTE:
In Dutch, a cardinal number is often used in dates. Remember that the -e is
added instead after all numerals nowadays. To illustrate:
Furthermore, if the month is not given, the ordinal numbers must be used in
Dutch:
The usual way of writing dates is to use the numeral, which then precedes the name of the month.
This order is kept when the date is written entirely in numbers.
Note that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the abbreviations -ste, -d - “1st’, 2nd, 3rd, 4th etc.” used with
ordinal numbers are omitted. In German, however, a full-stop must be placed in this case. Observe the
following:
Ger. 25. Juli 2023 Ger. Ich bin am 25. September geboren.
NOTE:
In Dutch, unlike in German and Afrikaans, the names of the months are not
capitalized (See Months p. 663)
656
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Most common adverbial forms and combinations of ordinals are as follows in the West Germanic
languages:
an erster Stelle in de eerste plaats in die eerste plek in the first place
an zweiter Stelle in de tweede plaats in die tweede plek in the second place
an dritter Stelle in de derde plaats in die derde plek in the third place
For instance:
Fractions
Generally, fractions are used to express a portion or part of a whole. To form fractions, the
cardinals and the ordinals are used together in the West Germanic languages. However, there are also
special forms, which must be remembered.
1/2 (a half) die Hälfte, ein halber* een half, de helft ’n half, die helfte
657

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
NOTE:
In German the noun and the adjective of the word “half" are different words,
i.e. die Hälfte (noun), halb (adj.). Study the following examples:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the adjective Dut. een half, Afr. 'n half - “half” is
usually inflected when used attributively, for example:
But: Dut. een half uur; Afr. 'n halfuur - half an hour.
It is worth mentioning that Ger. die Hälfte, ein halber; Dut. een half, de helft; Afr. ’n half,
die helfte are primarily used in non-arithmetical context. Look at the example:
Ger.Ich habe das halbe Buch (or die Hälfte des Buches) gelesen.
658
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ger. Sie haben die halbe Flasche (or die Hälfte der Flasche) ausgetrunken.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, even though the noun die helfte - “half” is usually used with the
definite article, the article can often be omitted in cases where it is not used in
English, for example:
In German, from 1/11 onwards fractions are formed by adding -(s)tel to cardinal numbers. Note
that from 2 to 19, the ending-tel is added (ex. viertel (1/4), drittel (1/3) etc.); from 20 and above -stel is
added (ex. zwanzigstel (1/20) etc.)
In Dutch and Afrikaans, ordinal numbers are used in this case. Observe the following:
Decimals
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, decimal fractions are expressed through the word Ger.
Komma, Dut. and Afr. komma - “comma”. Study the following examples:
0,1 null Komma eins nul komma één nil komma een
0,2 null Komma zwei nul komma twee nil komma twee
0,7 null Komma sieben nul komma zeven nil komma sewe
659
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
3,4 drei Komma vier drie komma vier drie komma vier
4,151 vier Komma eins fünf eins vier komma één vijf één vier komma een vyf een
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, however, one can regularly hear decimal fractions expressed by a
punt:
Afrikaans
Arithmetical Operations
It must be remembered that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the verb Ger. sein (ist), Dut. zijn
(is), Afr. wees (is) - “to be” is used meaning “is/equals”.
The following are the basic arithmetical calculations in the West Germanic languages:
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, to multiply one uses Ger. mal, Dut. maal or
keer, Afr. maal to mean “times” .
However, one can also hear Ger. multipliziert mit, Dut. vermenigvuldigd
met, Afr. vermenigvuldig met - “multiplied by”. For example:
660
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Multiplication
In German, the expression Ger. dividiert durch - “divided by” is also used:
German
Division
Collective Numbers
Collective numbers are considered to be nouns and are used to express an approximate quantity
of something or specify groups in the West Germanic languages.
Multiple Numerals
German uses the suffix -mal, Dutch and Afrikaans use the word keer, which is the English
equivalent of -fold/times (e.g. tenfold/ten times). Therefore, the combination of cardinal number + Ger.
-mal, Dut. and Afr. keer - “fold/times” is used:
661

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ger. Die Bevölkerung Spaniens ist viermal größer als die Portugals.
Dut. De bevolking van Spanje is vier keer groter dan die van Portugal.
Afr. Die bevolking van Spanje is vier keer groter as van Portugal.
Dates
Days
German Dutch Afrikaans English
NOTE:
In Dutch, unlike in German and Afrikaans, the days of the week are not
capitalized.
In German, Sonnabend - "Saturday" is typically North German. However,
Samstag, even though originally southern German, is widely used.
• In Dutch and Afrikaans, the days of the week can be used with the preposition op, while in German, the
preposition am is placed in front of the day of the week to express “on a certain day”:
662
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
NOTE:
However, when we refer to a specific date, we use the preposition am in
German, and the preposition op in Dutch and Afrikaans.:
• It is also possible to use the demonstrative pronoun Ger. diesen, Dut. deze, Afr. hierdie to mean
“this particular day”. For example:
• Below are some useful expressions related to the days of the week:
einmal/zweimal pro één/twee keer per een/twee keer per once/twice per week
Woche week week
Months
663
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
• In order to say “in a particular month”, the prepositions Ger. im, Dut. and Afr. in are used in the West
Germanic languages. Study the following example:
NOTE:
However, when we refer to a specific date, we use the preposition am in
German, and the preposition op in Dutch and Afrikaans.:
Remember that the days of the week and the months of the year are capitalized in German and
Afrikaans, but not capitalized in Dutch. In the West Germanic languages dates are usually written as
follows:
664
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
NOTE:
It must be remembered that a complete date in German, Dutch and Afrikaans is
formed by placing a day of the week + the definite article: Ger. der, Dut. de,
Afr. die + an ordinal number + month.
Below is a table showing the formation of complete dates in the West Germanic languages:
day + Ger. der, Dut. de, Afr. die + ordinal number + month.
Ger. Welcher Tag ist heute? - Heute ist Sonntag, der fünfte Mai.
Dut. Welke dag is het vandaag? Het is vandaag zondag, de vijfde mei.
Afr. Watter dag is dit vandag? Dit is vandag Sondag, die vyfde Mei.
NOTE:
In German, dates at the top of letters are must be expressed in the accusative
case, for example:
Furthermore, if the month is not given, the ordinal numbers must be used in
Dutch:
665
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
The usual way of writing dates is to use the numeral, which then precedes the name of the month.
This order is kept when the date is written entirely in numbers.
Note that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the abbreviations -ste, -d - “1st’, 2nd, 3rd, 4th etc.” used with
ordinal numbers are omitted when the date is written in numbers. In German, however, a full-stop must
be placed in this case. Observe the following:
- 25 July 2023
It is worth mentioning that in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, when abbreviated, the dates follow
the British, not the American, system of “day-month-year”. Remember that this order is kept when the
date is written purely in numbers, for example:
When reading out years in dates, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the years are generally read just like in
English. So 1978 would be Dut. negentienachtenzeventig, Afr. negentien agt-en-sewentig -
“nineteen seventy-eight.”
German, however, never omits the word hundert, which means “hundred”. Therefore, 1978
would be Ger. neunzehn-hundert-acht-und-siebzig means seventeen-hundred. Observe one more
example:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, all the years after 2000 are expressed in
thousands, for example:
666
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
In order to ask what day it is today one can use the following phrases in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans:
Der wievielte ist Welke datum is het Wat is die datum What is the date today?
heute? vandaag? vandag?
Welcher Tag ist Welke dag is het Watter dag is dit What day is it today?
heute? vandaag? vandag?
Seasons
German Dutch Afrikaans English
Observe the prepositions used with the seasons in the West Germanic languages:
For example:
667

e
d
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Time
The phrase for “What time is it?” is expressed as follows in the West Germanic languages:
Wie spät ist es?/ Hoe laat is het? Hoe laat is dit? What time is it?
Wie viel Uhr ist es?
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, hours are normally expressed by using the pronoun Ger. es,
Dut. het, Afr, dit - “it” + the verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be” + a cardinal number + the
word Ger. Uhr, Dut. uur, Afr. uur - “hour(-s)”.
The table below shows the idea of how to tell the time of day in the West Germanic
languages:
Ger. Wie spät ist es? - Es ist ein Uhr (es ist vier Uhr).
Dut. Hoe laat is het? - Het is één uur (Het is vier uur).
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the word uur and a cardinal number are written as one word.
668
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
However, if a cardinal number ends in a vowel, the word uur and this cardinal
number are hyphenated:
It is worth mentioning that in Germany, The Netherlands, Belgium, Austria, Switzerland and
South Africa, as well as other countries where German, Dutch and Afrikaans are spoken, the 24-hour time
is used widely.
It is always used in official contexts and is quite common in informal conversation as well. Study
the entire 24-hour system:
1 Es ist ein Uhr Het is een uur Dit is eenuur It’s 1 A.M.
2 Es ist zwei Uhr Het is twee uur Dit is twee-uur It’s 2 A.M.
3 Es ist drei Uhr Het is drie uur Dit is drie-uur It’s 3 A.M.
4 Es ist vier Uhr Het is vier uur Dit is vieruur It’s 4 A.M.
5 Es ist fünf Uhr Het is vijf uur Dit is vyfuur It’s 5 A.M.
6 Es ist sechs Uhr Het is zes uur Dit is sesuur It’s 6 A.M.
7 Es ist sieben Uhr Het is zeven uur Dit is sewe-uur It’s 7 A.M.
8 Es ist acht Uhr Het is acht uur Dit is agtuur It’s 8 A.M.
9 Es ist neun Uhr Het is negen uur Dit is nege-uur It’s 9 A.M.
10 Es ist zehn Uhr Het is tien uur Dit is tienuur It’s 10 A.M.
11 Es ist elf Uhr Het is elf uur Dit is elfuur It’s 11 A.M.
12 Es ist zwölf Uhr Het is twaalf uur Dit is twaalfuur It’s 12 A.M.
13 Es ist dreizehn Uhr Het is dertien uur Dit is dertienuur It’s 1 P.M.
14 Es ist vierzehn Uhr Het is veertien uur Dit is veertien uur It’s 2 P.M.
15 Es ist fünfzehn Uhr Het is vijftien uur Dit is vyftienuur It’s 3 P.M.
16 Es ist sechzehn Uhr Het is zestien uur Dit is sestienuur It’s 4 P.M.
17 Es ist siebzehn Uhr Het is zeventien uur Dit is sewentienuur It’s 5 P.M.
18 Es ist achtzehn Uhr Het is achttien uur Dit is agtienuur It’s 6 P.M.
19 Es ist neunzehn Uhr Het is negentien uur Dit is negentienuur It’s 7 P.M.
669

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
20 Es ist zwanzig Uhr Het is twintig uur Dit is twintig uur It’s 8 P.M.
21 Es ist einundzwanzig Uhr Het is eenentwintig uur Dit is een-en-twintig uur It’s 9 P.M.
22 Es ist zweiundzwanzig Uhr Het is tweeëntwintig uur Dit is twee-en-twintig uur It’s 10 P.M.
23 Es ist dreiundzwanzig Uhr Het is drieëntwintig uur Dit is drie-en-twintig uur It’s 11 P.M.
24 Es ist vierundzwanzig Uhr Het is vierentwintig uur Dit is vier-en-twintig uur It’s 12 P.M.
• In the West Germanic languages, minutes are usually added after the hour. Note that the word
“minute(-s)” is not normally used:
NOTE:
In Dutch, when the 24-hour timetable is used, the u is used instead of uur (i.e.
18.o5 u) for the English 6.05 P.M. However, the Dutch will say achttien uur ’s
middags (See Adverbs of Time p. 184).
• The half hour or quarter (15 minutes) can be expressed in two ways in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
Study the following:
Ger. Es ist Viertel nach drei. (Es ist Viertel vor vier.)
670
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
• Normally, after the half hour, the minutes must be subtracted from the next hour by utilizing the words
Ger. vor; Dut. and Afr. voor - “to”. Observe the following:
• Before the half hour, the words Ger. nach; Dut. over, and Afr. oor - “past” are used in German, Dutch
and Afrikaans respectively. For example:
• In order to ask the question: “At what time?” one can say the following:
While answering such question, it is necessary to utilize the preposition um (in German) and om
(in Dutch and Afrikaans) - at before the specified time (See also p. 712):
Ger. Um wie viel Uhr verlässt du? - Ich verlasse um zwei Uhr.
671
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Ger. Um wie viel Uhr kommt der Zug? - Der Zug kommt um fünf Uhr.
Afr. Hoe laat kom die trein? - Die trein kom om vyfuur.
- At what time does the train come? - The train comes at five o’clock.
• The word “sharp”, “exactly” would be as follows in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
Below we will consider some adverbs and prepositions of time that are frequently used in the
West Germanic languages.
Adverbs of Time
• If you use the 12-hour system, which is more common in spoken German, Dutch and Afrikaans, you can
use the following adverbs and adverbial expressions of time to express A.M. or P.M. and to clarify what
time of day you actually mean:
672

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
For instance:
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, if you want to say “this morning, this afternoon, this
evening or tonight”, you can use the following words:
Dutch Afrikaans English
673
CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Prepositions of Time
• In order to express the time when an event starts and ends, one must use the following structure in the
West Germanic languages:
von (Uhr) … bis (Uhr) van (uur) … tot (uur) from (hour) … to (hour)
Ger. Der Unterricht dauert von neun Uhr bis zwölf Uhr.
• To express “towards/by”, “around”, “before” and “after” what time an event starts and/or ends, one
can use the following prepositions in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
nach na na after
For example:
674

CHAPTER 7: NUMBERS, TIME AND DATE
Age
• To ask the question: “How old are you?” one can say the following:
Wie alt bist du? Hoe oud ben je? Hoe oud is jy? How old are you? (informal)
Wie alt sind Sie? Hoe oud bent u? Hoe oud is u? How old are you? (formal)
• In the West Germanic languages, one must conjugate the verb Ger. sein, Dut. zijn, Afr. wees - “to be”
to the subject in order to indicate the age of a person. For example:
Ger. Wie alt bist du? - Ich bin 25 (fünfundzwanzig) Jahre alt.
NOTE:
If you’re asked your age and you don’t want to give it, you can say the following
phrase in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
675
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Overview
Like the English prepositions “with”, “of”, “to”, “from”, German, Dutch and Afrikaans
prepositions are used to express many types of connections or relationships between two words or
different parts of the sentence by means of connecting them together. They normally demonstrate
direction, location, time, purpose, means, cause and so on.
Dutch Ze is in de kerk.
NOTE:
In German, unlike in English, Dutch and Afrikaans, the use of prepositions
determine the case used for nouns, articles, adjectives and pronouns (See Case
in German p. 112).
It is notable that German, Dutch and Afrikaans prepositions must be followed by a noun or noun
group or a pronoun. Study the following:
Ger. Ich spiele mit meinem Sohn. > Ich spiele mit ihm. (dative)
In the West Germanic languages, the prepositions, especially the most common ones, have
several meanings in English, and the right translation usually depends on the context in the phrase.
676
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Therefore, the correct uses of different prepositions must be memorized and learned through
practice since there are no strict rules. It is advised to learn each combination individually by means of
using a dictionary to find more examples of the uses of prepositions.
Below is a list of the most frequent prepositions in German, Dutch and Afrikaans:
in (acc./dat.) in in in
um (acc.) om om around
auf (acc./dat.) op op on
677

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
zu (dat.) te te to
anlässlich (gen.) ter gelegenheid van met die geleentheid on the occasion of
van
betreffend (acc), betreffende, met betreffende, met with regard to, with
hinsichtlich (gen.), betrekking tot betrekking tot respect to, concerning
bezüglich (gen.)
678

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Uses of Prepositions
The preposition Ger. an, Dut., and Afr. aan is very common and usually occurs in a wide
spectrum of contexts and is used:
- on the coast
- at the table
NOTE:
In German, am is the contraction of the preposition an and the masculine
article dem in the dative (See also Contraction of Articles p. 238):
an + dem = am - “at the”
679
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- a letter to Anna
- He died of cancer.
- on my birthday
- on Sunday
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition op is used in this case (See p. 705).
For instance:
Dut. op zondag
Afr. op Sondag
- on Sunday
680
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
am Anfang der aan het begin van het aan die begin van die at the beginning of the
Geschichte verhaal storie story
am Ende der Geschichte aan het eind van het aan die einde van die at the end of the story
verhaal storie
auf der einen Seite* aan de ene kant aan die een kant on the one hand
NOTE:
In German, the preposition auf is used in the phrase auf der einen Seite - “on
the one hand” (See p. 705).
- I am working on my project.
Below is the list of some frequently used verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. an,
Dut. and Afr. aan:
an etw. arbeiten aan iets werken aan iets werk to work on sth.
an jdm./etw. (dat) aan iets hangen aan iets hang to hang on sth.
hängen
an einer Krankheit (dat) aan een ziekte sterven aan 'n siekte sterf to die from (an illness)
sterben
an etw. (dat) aan iets deelnemen aan iets deelneem to participate in sth.
teilnehmen
The preposition Ger. hinter, Dut. achter, Afr. agter means “behind”. It corresponds almost
exactly to its English equivalent:
681
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. hinter, Dut. voorbij, Afr. verby means “past, beyond, further away
than”. Study the following examples:
The preposition Ger. außer, Dut. behalve and Afr. behalwe means “except, besides, apart
from”, for example:
682

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. bei, Dut. bij and Afr. by means “by, at, near, close to”. Generally, it is used:
- I work at Mercedes-Benz.
Afr. Sy is by Emma.
683

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- I am at the hairdresser’s/doctor’s/baker’s.
NOTE:
In German, beim is the contraction of the preposition bei and the masculine
article dem in the dative (See Contraction of Articles p. 238):
bei + dem = beim - “at the”
The German preposition bei is also used to mean “during”, in the sense of time:
- during work.
- during a film.
The preposition Ger. innerhalb, Dut. binnen and Afr. binne means “within, inside of”. It is
used:
This preposition usually means within or inside of something literally and figuratively, for
example:
684
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. innerhalb, Dut. binnen and Afr. binne is also used as a temporal
preposition. It corresponds to English “within, in the space of”. Observe the following:
- within a month
This preposition is rather frequent and has a lot of meanings. It can be used:
The preposition von (Ger.), van (Dut. Afr.) usually corresponds to the English apostrophe s (’s)
or the preposition of:
685

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- It is my father’s car.
NOTE:
In German, the preposition von is used colloquially and often replaces the
genitive case in order to avoid repetition (See Informal Possession with
Von in German p. 308). For example:
686
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, the preposition aus is used with words for settlements, territories
and countries to indicate where one is from (See also p. 702):
• to express the material from which something is made in Dutch and Afrikaans:
This preposition is also equivalent to the English of, out of, with:
687
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, the preposition aus is used in this case:
- a painting by Picasso
- It depends on you.
Below is the list of some frequently used verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. von,
Dut. and Afr. van:
von etw. (dat) abhängen van iets afhangen van iets afhang to depend on sth.
688
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
von etw. (dat) absehen van iets afzien, van iets afsien, van to refrain from, waive
van iets afstand doen iets afstand doen sth.
von etw. (dat) van iets afstammen van iets afstam to descend from sth.
abstammen
von etw. (dat) van iets de vruchten van iets die vrugte to benefit from sth.
profitieren plukken pluk
von etw. (dat) träumen van iets dromen van iets droom to dream of sth.
Like the preposition Ger. von, Dut., Afr. van, the preposition Ger. ab, Dut., Afr. vanaf can be
used:
689

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger., Dut. and Afr. in is used to indicate the time after which a thing is done or
completed. It corresponds to English “in”. Observe the following:
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Dut. over and Afr. oor can also be
used to mean “in” when referring to time (See also p. 709):
Ger., Dut. and Afr. in is also used to indicate when something is going to happen (See also
Months p. 663 and Seasons p. 667):
690
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, im is the contraction of the preposition in and the masculine article
dem in the dative (See also Contraction of Articles p. 238):
in + dem = im - “to the”
For example:
• in certain expressions:
691
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
in wenigen Worten in een paar woorden in 'n paar woorde in a few words
NOTE:
In German, ins is the contraction of the preposition in and the neuter article
das in the accusative (See Contraction of Articles p. 238):
in + das = ins - “(in)to the”
Below is the list of some frequently used verbs that are used with the preposition Ger., Dut.,
Afr. in:
in etw. (acc) einbauen iets in iets steken iets in iets steek to insert sth. into sth.
jdn./etw. (acc) in etw. iem./iets in iets iets in iets integreer to integrate sb./sth. in
(dat) integrieren integreren sth
sich (acc) in jdn. verliefd worden op verlief raak op iem. to fall in love with sb.
verlieben iem.
etw. (acc) in etw. (acc) iets in iets verdelen iets in iets verdeel to divide sth. into sth.
einteilen
692
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
etw. (acc) in etw. (acc) iets in iets breken iets in iets breek to break sth. into sth.
zerbrechen
etw. (acc) in etw. (acc) iets in iets veranderen iets in iets verander to transform sth. into
verwandeln sth.
etw. (acc) in etw. (acc) iets in iets omzetten iets in iets omskep to convert sth. into sth.
umsetzen
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition op is used instead in the following
phrase (See also p. 705):
NOTE:
In German, it is also common to use the preposition entlang in combination
with an (+ the dative case) with the same meaning. In this case, entlang is put
693
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Ger. ohne, Dur. zonder, Afr.
sonder is never followed by an indefinite article (See Articles p. 218):
Ger. ohne, Dut. zonder, Afr. sonder - “without” is also used as a conjunction and is followed by
an infinitive clause or by Ger. dass, Dut. dat, Afr. dat - “that” (See p. 761). Observe the following:
694
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The prepositions Ger. seit, Dut. sinds and Afr. sedert mean “since”. It is used the way one uses
its English equivalent:
Ger. Ich habe sie seit letzter Woche nicht gesehen. (dative)
• in certain expressions:
For example:
695

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- We ride on horseback.
The German preposition zu is used when we are heading “to” a specific place:
NOTE:
In German, zum is the contraction of the preposition zu and the masculine
article dem in the dative:
zu + dem = zum - “to the”
This also extends to places of work, business, as well as a person’s profession in German. Study
the following:
It is worth noting that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Dut. naar; Afr. (na)…toe is used
in all of these cases (See also p. 726). Compare the following:
696
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the combination na...toe that shows motion “to” a place is
normally replaced by a post-positioned toe. When toe is used in this way, the
definite article must be dropped, for example:
The German preposition zu is used as a temporal preposition and is translated as “at, on”. It is
used with reference to religious festivities, celebrations or events in German:
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, however, the preposition op is used in this case (See
also p. 705):
697
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The German preposition zu + the definite article is used with meals to express “for breakfast/
lunch/dinner” in German:
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Dut. voor; Afr. vir is used in this case
(See also p. 716):
It is worth noting that if the preposition zu is used without the definite article while referring to
meals, it doesn’t change its form in German. To compare:
The preposition Ger. gegen, Dut. tegen, Afr. teen literally and figuratively means “against” in
all contexts. It is used to express:
698
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
• opposition (against):
699

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Below is the list of some frequently used verbs that are used with the preposition Ger., Dut.,
Afr. in:
gegen etw. (acc) tegen iets protesteren teen iets protesteer to protest against sth.
protestieren
gegen etw. (acc) tegen iets teen iets beskerm to protect against sth.
schützen beschermen
gegen etw. (acc) tegen iets vechten teen iets veg to fight against sth.
kämpfen
700

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
Unlike in Dutch and Afrikaans, in German the preposition gegenüber must
always be used as a postposition with pronouns. To compare:
The preposition Ger. bis, Dut. and Afr. tot means “until, till, (up) to”. Study the following
examples:
Groningen is the largest city as well as Dut. Hij wacht tot maandag.
the economic, educational and cultural
hub in the northern part of the Netherlands. It is Afr. Hy wag tot Maandag.
often referred to as the “Metropolis of the
North" with over 200,000 residents. - He waits till Monday.
701
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The prepositions Ger. zwischen, Dut. and Afr. tussen generally mean between, among. It is
used the way one uses its English equivalent:
Ger. Ich muss mich zwischen diesen zwei Produkten entscheiden. (dative)
NOTE:
In German, the preposition zwischen takes either the accusative or the dative
case (See p. 748):
The preposition Ger. aus, Dut. and Afr. uit normally means from, out of. It can be used in a
number of ways depending on the context. This preposition is used:
702
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition van can also be used in this context
(See also p. 685):
Ger. aus; Dut. and Afr. uit is used in some expressions to mean that something is done because
of a feeling or inner quality.
Below are some common expression that are used with the preposition Ger., aus Dut., Afr.
uit:
703
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
aus dem Leben uit het leven uit die lewe out of life
For example:
- I know it by heart.
Below is the list of some common verbs that are used with the preposition Ger., aus Dut., Afr.
uit:
aus (dem Deutschen) uit (het Duits) iets uit (Duits) iets vertaal to translate sth. from
etw. (acc.) übersetzen vertalen (German)
aus (Belgien) kommen uit (België) komen uit (België) kom to come from (Belgium)
aus (der Tasse) uit (de beker) drinken uit (die beker) drink to drink from (the cup)
trinken
aus etw. (dat.) uit iets bestaan uit iets bestaan to consist of sth.
bestehen
704

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
For instance:
The preposition Ger. auf, Dut. and Afr. op normally means on, about or over. It can be used in a
number of ways depending on the context. Thus, preposition is used:
Ger. Ich habe ein Buch auf den Tisch gelegt. (accusative)
1. In Dutch and Afrikaans, the days can be used with the preposition op, while in German, the preposition
an is placed in front of the day of the week to express “on a certain day”:
705

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, am is the contraction of the preposition an and the masculine
article dem in the accusative (See Contraction of Articles p. 238):
an + dem = am - “on the”
- I travel on my birthday
2. When we refer to a specific date, we also use the preposition op in Dutch and Afrikaans and the
preposition an in German:
The preposition Ger. auf, Dut., Afr. op is also used with nouns that indicate open spaces, public
areas, events etc., for example:
706
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
auf der Post op het postkantoor op die poskantoor at the post office
For example:
- I am on the island
NOTE:
However, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition in is used with the
following nouns (See Preposition “in” p. 689):
German Dutch Afrikaans English
707
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
• in certain expressions:
Hoffnung auf eine hoop op een goede hoop op 'n goeie hope of a good future
gute Zukunft toekomst toekoms
im Hintergrund op de achtergrond op die agtergrond in the background
For example:
• with verbs:
The preposition Ger. auf, Dut., Afr. op is also used with various verbs, for example:
708

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- I concentrate on my work.
Below is the list of some important verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. auf, Dut., Afr.
op:
auf jdn. (acc) warten op iem. wachten op/vir iem. wag to wait for sb.
auf etw. (acc) achten aan iets aandacht op iets aandag staan to pay attention to sth.
besteden
auf etw. (acc) op iets antwoorden op iets antwoord to reply to sth.
antworten
auf etw. (acc) zich op iets op iets konsentreer to concentrate on sth.
konzentrieren concentreren
auf etw. (acc) op iets schieten op iets skiet to shoot at sth.
schießen
The prepositions Ger. über, Dut. over, Afr. oor mean “about, on, across, over, through, in,
past”. They are used:
The preposition Ger. über, Dut. over, Afr. oor is used to show formal treatment of a subject or
topic:
Ger. Dieser Autor hat ein Buch über die orientalische Küche geschrieben. (accusative)
Afr. Hierdie skrywer het 'n boek oor die Oosterse kookkuns geskryf.
709

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. über, Dut. over, Afr. oor can also be used to refer to a movement “across”
or “over” places:
Ger. Wir reisen mit dem Schiff über die Ostsee. (accusative)
The preposition Ger. über, Dut. over, Afr. oor also translates “via” or “through” with reference
to places, for example:
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition via is also used in this context. To
compare:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Dut. over, Afr. oor is used to mean “in” when referring
to time. To demonstrate:
710
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, the preposition in should be used in this case (See p. 689). Observe
the following:
Below is the list of some time expressions that are used with the preposition Ger. in/über,
Dut. over, and Afr. oor:
in zwei Stunden over twee uur oor twee uur in two hours
in drei Monaten over drie maanden oor drie maande in three months
in vier Jahren over vier jaar oor vier jaar in four years
über das Wochenende over het week-end oor die naweek over the weekend
über die Jahre over de jaren heen oor die jare heen over the years
über die Jahrhunderte over de eeuwen heen oor die eeue heen over the centuries
Furthermore, in Dutch and Afrikaans, before the half hour, the prepositions Dut. over, and Afr.
oor - “past” are used respectively. For instance:
711
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, however, the preposition nach is used in this context (See p. 724,
726), for example:
The preposition Ger. um, Dut., Afr. om means “at, around”. It is used:
The preposition Ger. um, Dut., Afr. om is used to refer to a location, for example:
Dut. Om de hoek
The preposition Ger. um, Dut., Afr. om is used to mean “at” when referring to time. To
illustrate:
Ger. Um wie viel Uhr kommt dein Zug? - Mein Zug kommt um sieben Uhr.
Dut. Hoe laat komt jouw trein? - Mijn trein komt om zeven uur.
At what time does thou train come? - My train comes at seven o’clock.
• with verbs:
Ger. um, Dut. and Afr. om are also used with verbs. Observe the following example:
712
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger., Dut., Afr. per means “by, per, by means of”. It is used:
The prepositions Ger., Dut., Afr. per can be used to express “by, by means of” various modes of
transport. For example:
Below is the list of some common modes of transport that are used with the preposition per:
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Ger. mit, Dut., Afr. met can
also be used with modes of transport (See p. 721):
German Dutch Afrikaans English
713
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- He travels by train.
For example:
- I did it by mistake.
714

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, the preposition pro must be used in this case. Compare one more
example:
The preposition Ger. rund um, Dut., Afr. rondom means “(all) around”. It is used:
The preposition Ger. unter, Dut., Afr. onder means “under, among”. It corresponds very closely
to its English equivalent:
715
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- among Germans.
The prepositions Ger. für, Dut. voor, Afr. vir mean “for, of, in favour of, by the standards of”.
Ger. Für eine Ausländerin spricht sie sehr gut Englisch. (accusative)
Dut. Voor een buitenlander spreekt ze heel goed Engels.
- For (By the standards of) a foreigner, she speaks English very well.
716

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Ger. für, Dut. voor, Afr. vir is used in the following expressions:
Wort für Wort woord voor woord woord vir woord word by (for) word
Tag für Tag dag voor dag dag vir dag day by (after) day
Stück für Stück stuk voor stuk stukkie vir stukkie piece by piece
Schritt für Schritt stap voor stap stap vir stap step by step
For instance:
Ger. Das ist Wort für Wort, was ich gesagt habe.
• with verbs:
The preposition Ger. für, Dut. voor, Afr. vir is also used with various verbs, for example:
Below is the list of some important verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. für, Dut.
voor, Afr. vir:
für jdn. (acc) sorgen voor iem. zorgen vir iem. sorg to take care of sb.
717

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
sich (acc.) für etw. zich voor iets vir iets verskoning to apologize for sth.
(acc.) entschuldigen verontschul-digen vra
auf etw. (acc) voor iets opkomen vir iets staan to be responsible for sth.
konzentrieren
Geld für etw. (acc) geld voor iets geld vir iets spandeer to spend money for sth.
ausgeben uitgeven
- He gives it to me.
In general, where the preposition “to” can be inserted in English, we should use vir in Afrikaans.
Remember that when the indirect object follows the direct object, the preposition must be
included. However, when the indirect object precedes the direct object, it can also be used in Afrikaans,
while in English, it is not possible. Compare the following:
Afrikaans
Gee (vir) my die pen. - Give me the pen. Gee die pen vir my. - Give the pen to me.
• Furthermore, the preposition vir used with the indirect object, can also be use with the verbs of
perception in Afrikaans, for example:
Below is the list of some verbs of persecution that are used with the preposition vir in
Afrikaans:
Afrikaans English
lyk to look/seem
klink to sound
718

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Afrikaans English
ruik to smell
smaak to taste
voel to feel
For example:
The preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr. voor means “in front of, before, ago”. They are used:
The preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr. voor is used to refer to physical location in space:
The preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr. voor is used to refer to location in time, in which case it
translates “before”:
719

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
• The preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr. voor is also used to translate “to” when telling the time (See also
Time p. 668). Observe the following:
The preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr. voor is used to translate “ago” when referring to the location
in the past relative to the present:
The preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr. voor is also used with various verbs and adjectives, for
example:
720
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
- He is afraid of dogs.
Below is the list of some common verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. vor, Dut., Afr.
voor:
vor etw. (dat) Angst voor iets bang zijn voor (or vir) iets bang to be afraid of sth.
haben wees
jdn. vor etw. (dat) iem. voor iets iem. voor (or van) iets to warn sb. of/against
warnen waarschuwen waarsku sth.
The prepositions Ger. mit, Dut., Afr. met generally correspond to “with”. They are used:
The prepositions Ger. mit, Dut. and Afr. met can also be used to express “by” various modes of
transport.
Below is the list of some common modes of transport that are used with the preposition Ger.
mit, Dut., Afr. met:
mit dem Flugzeug met het vliegtuig met die vliegtuig by plane
721

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
mit dem Schiff met het schip met die skip by ship
For example:
- He travels by car.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition per can also be used with
modes of transport to mean “by means of” (See p. 713). Study the following:
German Dutch Afrikaans English
For instance:
The Dutch and Afrikaans preposition met is also used as a temporal preposition and is translated
as “at, on”. It is used with reference to festivities, celebrations or events:
722
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, however, the preposition zu is used in this case (See also p. 695):
• with verbs:
Ger. mit, Dut. and Afr. met are also used with verbs. Study the following example:
Below is the list of some important verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. nach, Dut.,
Afr. na:
mit jdn. (dat) reden met iem. praten met iem. praat to talk to/with sb.
etw. (acc) mit jdn. (dat) iets met iem. delen iets met iem. deel to share sth. with sb.
teilen
sich mit jdn. (dat) met iem. ontmoeten met iem. ontmoet to meet with sb.
treffen
mit etw. (dat) met iets bezig zijn met iets besig wees to be busy with sth.
beschäftigt sein
mit etw. met iets vermenig- met iets vermenig- to multiply by sth.
multiplizieren vuldigen vuldig
723
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
jdn. (acc) mit etw. (dat) but: iem. van iets but: iem. van iets to supply sb. with sth.
versorgen voorzien voorsien
The prepositions Ger. nach, Dut. and Afr. na mean “after, past”. They are used:
The prepositions Ger. nach, Dut. and Afr. na are used to refer to location in time, in which case
it translates “after”:
Ger. Nach dem Abendessen spielen wir mit den Kindern. (dative)
• Remember that in German, before the half hour, the preposition Ger. nach is used to express “past”.
For example:
724
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the preposition Dut. over; Afr. oor is used in this case
(See also p. 709):
• in certain expressions:
Ger. nach, Dut. and Afr. na is used in the following expressions:
For example:
• with verbs:
Ger. nach, Dut. and Afr. na is also used with some verbs. Study the following example:
Below is the list of some important verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. nach, Dut.,
Afr. na:
sich nach etw. (dat) sehnen naar iets verlangen na iets verlang to long for sth.
725
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
nach etw. (dat) riechen naar iets ruiken na iets ruik to smell of/like sth.
nach etw. reisen naar iets reizen na iets reis to travel to sth.
The prepositions Ger. nach, Dut. naar, Afr. (na)…toe mean “toward, to”. They are used:
The prepositions Ger. nach, Dut. naar, Afr. (na)…toe are used when we are going “to, toward”
specific places (e.g. countries, cities, or continents) that do not have an article.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the combination na...to that indicates motion “to” a place is
normally replaced by a post-positioned toe, for instance:
726
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the prepositions Dut. naar, Afr. (na)…toe are also
used when we are going “to, toward” a specific place (e.g. a market, a school, a library, an airport etc.)
that have an article.
NOTE:
In German the preposition zu is used in this case (See also p. 695). Compare
the following:
The prepositions Ger. nach, Dut. naar, Afr. na are used with adverbs of direction, for example:
727
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
• with verbs:
Ger. nach, Dut. naar and Afr. (na)…toe is also used with some verbs. Study the following
example:
Below is the list of some important verbs that are used with the preposition Ger. nach, Dut.
naar, Afr. (na)…toe:
nach etw. fahren naar iets rijden (na) iets ry toe to drive to sth.
nach etw. gehen naar iets gaan (na) iets gaan toe to go to sth.
nach etw. fliegen naar iets vliegen (na) iets vlieg toe to fly to sth.
The prepositions Ger. nahe, Dut. nabij/vlakbij and Afr. naby/vlakby mean “near”. Observe
the following example:
728

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The prepositions Ger. neben, Dut. naast and Afr. langs/naas mean “next to, in addition to”.
They correspond to their English equivalents:
Ger. Der Stuhl steht neben dem (or den) Tisch. (acc. or dat.)
The prepositions Ger. statt/anstelle, Dut. in plaats van and Afr. in plaas van mean “instead
of”, “in place of”. Observe the following example:
Ger. Wir haben die Pizza statt (anstelle) der Suppe gegessen. (genitive)
The prepositions Ger. während, Dut. tijdens and Afr. tydens mean “during”. Study the
following example:
729

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The prepositions Ger. wegen/aufgrund, Dut. vanwege/door and Afr. as gevolg van/
weens/vanweë mean “because of”, “due to”. For example:
- Because of a mistake
- Because of my work.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, weens and vanweë are quite formal. In the spoken language,
the preposition “because of” is more likely to be expressed by as gevolg van.
The preposition Ger. dank, Dut. dankzij, Afr. danksy means “thanks to”. For example:
730
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. über, Dut. boven, Afr. bo means “above, beyond”. For example:
Ger. Das Foto hängt an der Wand über der Couch. (dative)
The preposition Ger. außerhalb, Dut. buiten and Afr. buite means “outside of, out of”. For
example:
• The preposition Ger. durch, Dut. door and Afr. deur means “through, by means of, by”. For instance:
731

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
• The preposition Ger. durch, Dut. door and Afr. deur - “by” is also used in the construction of the
passive voice:
• The preposition Ger. durch, Dut. door and Afr. deur - “by” can also be used in arithmetical
operations (See Arithmetical Operations p. 660)
The following is the arithmetical calculation that is used with the preposition Ger. dutch, Dut.
door, Afr. deur:
The preposition Ger. entsprechend/laut Dut., Afr. volgens means “according to”. For
example:
732
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. abgesehen von, Dut. afgezien van, Afr. afgesien van means “apart
from, other than”. For example:
The preposition Ger. namens/im Namen, Dut., Afr. namens means “on behalf of”. For
example:
The preposition Ger. trotz, Dut., Afr. ondanks means “in spite of, despite”. For example:
Ger. Trotz des Wetters gehen wir trotzdem an den Strand. (genitive)
733

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The preposition Ger. unabhängig von, Dut. ongeacht, Afr. ongeag expresses “regardless of”.
For example:
The preposition Ger. anlässlich, Dut. ter gelegenheid van, Afr. met die geleentheid van
conveys “on the occasion of”:
Dut. Zij heeft mij ter gelegenheid van mijn pensionering gefeliciteerd.
The prepositions Ger. bezüglich, hinsichtlich, betreffend Dut., Afr. betreffende, met
betrekking tot express “with regard to, with respect to, concerning”. For instance:
Ger. Ich habe die Neuigkeiten bezüglich der Feier gehört. (genitive)
734

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Below is a list of the most common prepositions that take accusative and/or dative and
genitive cases in German:
zu
The following nine prepositions require any noun or pronoun that follows them to be in the
accusative case:
Below is the table that shows prepositions that are used with the accusative case in German:
Geman English
bis until, by
durch through, by
735

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Geman English
für for
ohne without
um around
* Note that the preposition entlang is used as a postposition, which means it must follow the sentence’s
object. For example:
NOTE:
It is worth mentioning that in Dutch and Afrikaans, unlike in German, the
preposition langs is placed before the sentence’s object, e.g.:
Remember that in German, only the articles for masculine nouns der change when used with a
preposition in the accusative. The articles for female and neuter nouns remain the same (See also
Articles p. 218).
Below is the table that shows the declension of the definite article when used with
prepositions in the accusative case (direct object) in German:
736
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Ger. Ich habe Blumen für den Freund gekauft. (der Freund)
Unlike the first example, where the neuter article for “das Unternehmen” stays the same in the
accusative, the second example shows how the definite masculine article for “der Freund” changes to
“den Freund” when in the accusative.
NOTE:
It is worth reminding that Dutch and Afrikaans have no accusative.
It means that, unlike in German, all of the articles do not change after these
prepositions in the direct object in Dutch and Afrikaans:
Dutch Afrikaans English
om om around
737
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Note that in German, only the third person singular and plural feminine and neuter pronouns sie
and es stay the same when used with a preposition in the accusative. All of the other pronouns must
change their form when used in the accusative (direct object). (See Pronouns p. 241).
Below is the table that shows the declension of pronouns when used with prepositions in the
accusative case (direct object) in German:
As we can see from the first example, the third person singular feminine pronoun “sie” stays the
same when used with the preposition in the accusative.
The second example, however, shows how the second person singular pronoun “du” changes to
“dich” when in the accusative.
Below is the list of some frequently used verbs that are used with a speci c preposition and
the accusative pronouns or nouns after them in German:
German English
738

fi
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
German English
jdn./etw. (acc.) für jdn./etw. (acc.) halten to take sb./sth. for sb./sth.
für jdn./etw. (acc.) sorgen to take care of sb./sth./to care for sb./sth.
um etw. (acc.) bitten jdn. to ask for sth./to beg for sth.
Dative forms of the personal pronouns or nouns must be used after the following prepositions in
German:
Below is the table that shows prepositions that are used with the dative case in German:
Geman English
ab starting from
bei at
entsprechend according to
mit with
seit since
zu to
739

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
In German, the articles for masculine, feminine and neuter singular and plural nouns change
when used with a preposition in the dative (indirect object) (See also Articles p. 218).
Below is the table that shows the declension of definite articles when used with prepositions
in the dative case (indirect object) in German:
For instance:
Ger. Ich fahre mit dem Zug in die Stadt. (der Zug)
The examples shows how the masculine article for “der Zug” and the neuter article for “das
Konzert” change to “dem Zug” and “dem Konzert” respectively when used with the dative preposition
“mit”.
NOTE:
Since Dutch and Afrikaans have no dative, the articles do not change after these
prepositions in the indirect object:
Dutch Afrikaans English
na na after, past
740
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
te te to
Note that in German, pronouns must change their form when used in the accusative (indirect
object). (See Pronouns p. 241).
Below is the table that shows the declension of pronouns when used with prepositions in the
dative case (indirect object) in German:
741

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
Remember that Dutch, Afrikaans and English make no distinction between
direct and indirect object pronouns (accusative and dative). So, in this case, you
need to add object pronouns (direct/indirect) after above-mentioned
prepositions.
Below is the table that demonstrates the declension of Dutch and Afrikaans pronouns when
used with prepositions in the direct or indirect object (accusative/dative case):
Dutch Afrikaans
Dutch Ik heb een cadeau voor haar gekocht Ik reis met haar.
Afrikaans Ek het 'n geskenk vir haar gekoop. Ek reis saam met haar.
Note that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the examples shows how the third person singular pronoun
“haar” remain the same when used with the prepositions Dut. voor, Afr. vir and Dut., Afr. met in the
direct object (accusative) and in the indirect object (dative) respectively.
742
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Below is the list of verbs which are used with a speci c preposition and the dative case
pronouns or nouns in German.
German English
mit jdm. (dat) einen Streit anfangen to start an argument with sb.
743

fi
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
German English
For example:
NOTE:
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans, you add object pronouns or nouns
(direct/indirect) after above-mentioned verbs and prepositions:
744
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
The following prepositions require any noun or pronoun that follows them to be in the accusative
and in the dative:
Below is the table that shows prepositions that are used with the accusative and dative case
in German:
Geman English
auf on
in in
vor in front of
zwischen between
Note that these prepositions are used in the accusative if they indicate movement and dative if
they indicate a state (of rest).
Below are some verbs that always indicate movement and other that always indicate a state
of rest in German:
Verbs of movement (regular and transitive) Verbs of state (irregular and intransitive)
745

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Verbs of movement (regular and transitive) Verbs of state (irregular and intransitive)
Verbs of movement (used in the accusative) Verbs of state (used in the dative)
Example 1 Example 1
German Er stellt die Tasse auf den Tisch. Die Tasse steht auf dem Tisch.
English - He puts the cup on the table. - The cup is on the table.
Example 2 Example 2
German Sie legt das Buch auf den Tisch. Das Buch liegt auf dem Tisch.
English - She puts the book on the table. - The book is (lying) on the table.
As we can see from the examples 1 and 2, the movement is putting the cup and the book on the
table. It means that the masculine article for “der Tisch” changes to the accusative “den Tisch”.
In the examples 3 and 4, the movement has already taken place. The cup and the book are on the
table, which means that the masculine article for “der Tisch” changes to the dative “dem Tisch”.
NOTE:
Remember that since Dutch and Afrikaans do not distinguish between direct
and indirect objects (accusative and dative), there is no difference between
verbs movement and those of state, like in German.
In this case, the articles do not change when we add the object (direct/indirect)
after these prepositions and verbs:
Dutch Afrikaans English
op op on
achter agter behind
746
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Example 1 Example 1
Dutch Hij zet de beker op (de) tafel. De beker staat op (de) tafel.
Afrikaans Hy sit die beker op (die) tafel. Die beker staan op (die) tafel.
English - He puts the cup on the table. - The cup is on the table.
Example 2 Example 2
Dutch Ze legt het boek (op) de tafel. Het boek ligt op (de) tafel.
English - She puts the book on the table. - The book is (lying) on the table.
Below is the list of verbs which are used with a preposition in the accusative/dative case
pronouns or nouns in German.
German English
747

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
German English
auf jdn./etw. (acc) eingehen to mention sth./to discuss sth./to react to sth./sb.
über etw. (acc.) nachdenken to reflect upon sth./to think about sth.
über etw. (acc.) verfügen to have sth. at one's disposal/to have sth. available
vor jdm./etw. (dat) fliehen to escape from sb./sth.
It should be noted that German prepositions in the genitive as well as the genitive case itself is the
“dying case” because in colloquial German or in everyday conversations the dative is used instead.
748

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
In particular, when writing letters or when speaking in more formal contexts, the following
prepositions that take the genitive case must be used in German.
German English
laut according to
während during
* Note that if the preposition wegen is used in combination with a personal pronoun, the special forms
are used (See p. 751).
In German, the articles and nouns for masculine, feminine and neuter singular and plural nouns
change when used with a preposition in the genitive (See also Articles p. 218).
Below is the table that shows the declension of de nite articles when used with prepositions
in the genitive case in German:
For instance:
749

fi
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Since the prepositions are in the genitive, the articles and nouns das Dorf - “the village” and das
Wetter - “the weather” change to their genitive form which is des Dorfes and des Wetters.
• In spoken German, some of these prepositions (e.g. wegen, während, trotz, laut, statt) are often
used with the dative. Study the following example:
However, it should be noted that the correct form is with the genitive, which is “während des
Films”.
• Furthermore, remember that the genitive and dative forms of feminine nouns are identical (See the
Dative Case p. 121). For example:
NOTE:
Unlike in German, in Dutch and Afrikaans the articles and nouns do not change
their forms after these prepositions in the genitive:
Dutch Afrikaans English
750
CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
Note that in German, when the preposition wegen is used in combination with a personal
pronoun, rather than a noun, the following forms are used:
German English
751

CHAPTER 8: PREPOSITIONS
NOTE:
In German, colloquially, the following combinations of the preposition wegen
with personal pronouns in the dative can also be used:
German English
For example:
Below are some common verbs and expression that are used with the genitive case in
German:
German English
752
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Overview
Like the English conjunctions “and”, “or”, “if”, “as well as”, “but” German, Dutch and Afrikaans
conjunctions are the words which connect two parts of a sentence together. Observe the following:
In the West Germanic languages, conjunctions are divided into three major groups:
coordinating, subordinating and correlative:
Coordinating Conjunctions
Coordinating conjunctions join similar words or group of words, for example:
Note that the two parts of the clause bare independent of each other and could easily be separated
by punctuation, in the West Germanic languages. Study the following:
753

CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Below is a list of the most common coordinating conjunctions in the West Germanic
languages:
und en en and
oder of of or
NOTE:
In German, the conjunction sondern is used instead of aber to express “but” if
the main clause contains a negative and the but-clause contradicts the main
clause, for example:
754
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Conjunction because, as, for - denn (Ger.), want (Dut.), want (Afr.)
NOTE:
In German, the conjunction sondern is used instead of aber to express ‘but’
when the main clause contains a negative and the but-clause contradicts the
main clause, for example::
Ger. Ich gehe heute nicht in den Park, sondern (Ich gehe) morgen.
- I am not going to the park today but (I am going) tomorrow.
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the coordinating conjunctions Ger. und, aber/sondern,
oder, denn; Dut. and Afr. en, maar, of, want do not affect the word order of the following clause.
755
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Note that if the first clause and the new/second clause contain an adverb of time, the word order
of these clauses changes.
In particular, when adverbs of time are placed at the beginning of a clause in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans, we must inverse the subject and the verb in both clauses.
For example:
Ger. Gestern bin ich nach Pretoria gereist, aber morgen komme ich zurück.
Dut. Gisteren ben ik naar Pretoria gereisd, maar morgen kom ik terug.
Afr. Gister het ek Pretoria toe gereis, maar môre kom ek terug.
For word order with adverbs of time in German, Dutch and Afrikaans (See Word Order with
Adverbs of Time p. 194)
Subordinating Conjunctions
Subordinating conjunctions connect a dependent clause to a main clause. It is noticeable that
dependent clause cannot be used alone as its meaning is not complete without the main clause. Observe
the following:
Dut. Omdat hij geen tijd heeft, kan hij het niet doen.
Afr. Aangesien hy nie tyd het nie, kan hy dit nie doen nie.
The main clause is “he cannot do it”. The clause “Since he doesn't have time” is a dependent one
and is not complete without the main one. In fact the idea is not that he doesn’t want to do it, but he
cannot do it since he doesn’t have enough time.
756

CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
It is noticeable that a vast majority of subordinating conjunctions require the conjugated verb to
be put at the end of the clause they introduce.
NOTE:
In German, it is obligatory to place a comma before the conjunction to keep the
finite verbs of each clause apart.
In the above example, Ger. dass, Dut. dat and Afr. dat are subordinating conjunctions and Ger.
hat, Dut. heeft and Afr. het (the conjugated verb) must go to the end.
• It is worth saying that in Dutch and Afrikaans, the conjugated verb placed at the end of the clause must
be put before the infinitive, if one is included. In German, however, the conjugated verb is placed after
the infinitive in this case. Study the following:
757
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
• Furthermore, in Dutch and Afrikaans, the conjugated verb placed at the end of the clause usually comes
before or after the past participle, while in German, the conjugated verb is forced to the end of the
clause. Study the following:
Ger. Ich komme zu dir nach Hause, nachdem ich gegessen habe.
Dut. Ik kom naar je huis nadat ik gegeten heb (or heb gegeten).
Afr. Ek kom na jou huis nadat ek geëet het (or het geëet).
• If a sentence starts with a subordinating conjunction, the main clause begins with the conjugated verb.
Compare the following:
In the above example, Ger. während, Dut. terwijl and Afr. terwyl is a subordinating
conjunction that introduces the subordinate clause and the conjugated verb Ger. wird, Dut. zal and Afr.
sal occupies the first position of the main clause in German, Dutch and Afrikaans.
• If there is a separable prefix verb in a subordinate clause, the prefix remains attached to the verb, and
the entire verb goes to the end of the clause, whereas normally the prefix would go to the end in
German, Dutch and Afrikaans (See Separable Verbal Prefixes p. 596).
For example:
Did you know? Ger. Ich bin immer müde, wenn ich früh aufstehe.
Münster, Germany, is home to Dut. Ik ben altijd moe als ik vroeg opsta.
Münster Cathedral or St. Paulus
Dom. This cathedral church was built in the Afr. Ek is altyd moeg as ek vroeg opstaan.
13th century in a mixture of late Romanesque
and early Gothic styles. It is one of the - I am always tired when I get up early.
symbols of the city.
758
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Below is a list of some frequently used subordinating conjunctions in German, Dutch and
Afrikaans:
auch wenn, selbst zelfs als selfs as even if, even though
wenn
bis tot(dat) tot(dat) until, till
ob of of whether, if
759

CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. da, Dut. aangezien and Afr. aangesien expresses “since, as, seeing”,
which are completely synonymous with Ger. weil, Dut. omdat, Afr. omdat - “because” (See also
Conjunction “Because” p. 763)
Afr. Aangesien sy nie by die huis is nie, moet ons haar bel.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the phrase siende dat - “seeing, as” is a commonly used
synonym, for example:
Afr. Siende dat sy nie by die huis is nie, moet ons haar bel.
- Seeing/Since she is not at home, we have to phone her.
760
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Dut. Afhankelijk van de stemming waarin hij zich bevindt, kan hij erg spraakzaam zijn.
Afr. Afhangende van in watter bui hy is, kan hy baie spraaksaam wees.
The conjunctions Ger. als, Dut. dan and Afr. as - “than” are used after comparatives and are
often followed by a noun or pronoun rather than a whole clause (See Comparatives p. 198):
The conjunctions Ger. dass, Dut. dat and Afr. dat - “that” are used to introduce a clause that
reports something or gives further information, for example::
Ger. Gabriela sagt, dass sie heute Abend zur Party geht.
NOTE:
In English, the conjunction “that” is often omitted, but dass (in German) and
dat (in Dutch and Afrikaans) are never omitted, for example:
761
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. indem, Dut. doordat, and Afr. deurdat means “by” and shoes a clause
that expresses “by doing something”:
Dut. Andreas verdient geld doordat hij elk weekend zeep verkoopt.
The conjunctions Ger. obwohl, Dut. hoewel, ofschoon and Afr. (al)hoewel, ofskoon are
used to connect ideas that contrast:
Ger. Ich bin ziemlich klein, obwohl meine Schwester groß ist.
NOTE:
In Dutch, ofschoon is mainly used in the written language.
In Afrikaans, alhoewel, hoewel and ofskoon are synonymous and are used
in speech and writing. However, ofskoon is less common.
The conjunction Ger. wenn, Dut. als and Afr. as expresses “when” with reference to the present
or future, for example:
762
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Ger. Kannst du mir ein Souvenir kaufen, wenn du nach Berlin gehst?
Dut. Kun je een souvenir voor me kopen als je naar Berlijn gaat?
Remember that the conjunction Ger. wenn, Dut. wanneer and Afr. wanneer is more or less
synonymous with Ger. als, Dut. als and Afr. as in this sense but can have stronger connotations of
“whenever” (See also Conjunction When p. 763). Study the following example:
Ger. Kannst du mir ein Souvenir kaufen, wenn du nach Berlin gehst?
Dut. Kun je een souvenir voor me kopen wanneer je naar Berlijn gaat?
Afr. Kan jy vir my 'n aandenking koop wanneer jy Berlyn toe gaan?
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, when referring to an action that took place in the past,
Dut. toen and Afr. toe - “when” is used, whether the verb is in the past or not.
In German, als is used in this case (See below).
Conjunction when (in describing past events) - als (Ger.), toen (Dut.),
toe (Afr.)
The conjunction Ger. als, Dut. toen and Afr. toe expresses “when” when describing an action
that took place in the past:
Ger. Als ich nach Berlin reiste, kaufte ich ein Souvenir.
The conjunction Ger. weil, Dut. omdat and Afr. omdat - “because” is used to introduce a clause
that shows the cause of something, for example:
763
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Ger. Er ist mit dem Bus gekommen, weil ein Taxi teuer ist.
Dut. Hij is met de bus gekomen omdat een taxi duur is.
Afr. Hy het met die bus gekom omdat 'n taxi duur is.
NOTE:
In Dutch, the conjunction daar - “because/since” is mainly used in the written
language, for example:
Conjunction even if, even though - auch wenn, selbst wenn (Ger.),
zelfs als (Dut.), selfs as (Afr.)
Ger. auch wenn/selbst wenn, Dut. zelfs als and Afr. selfs as - “even if/even though” are
used as subordinating conjunctions in the same way as “although/though” (See p. 762). Study the
following:
NOTE:
In German, auch wenn and selbst wenn are both used for hypothetical
situations.
However, in the case of selbst wenn the condition is implied to be more
improbable than in the case of auch wenn.
764
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Ger. bis, Dut. tot(dat) and Afr. tot(dat) - “until/till” is used as a subordinating conjunction to
connect an action or an event to a point in time, for instance:
NOTE:
In Dutch, the conjunction tot - “until/till” is mainly used in the written
language, for example:
The conjunction Ger. ob, Dut. of and Afr. of - “if” introduces an indirect question or a a doubt.
Note that it can only be used when we can use “whether” in English as well:
Ger. Ich weiß nicht, ob sie noch bei der Arbeit ist.
NOTE:
Otherwise the conjunction “if” is expressed by Ger. wenn, Dut. als, Afr. as
respectively (See p. 762):
765
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. als ob/als wenn/als, Dut. alsof and Afr. (as)of - “as if” are used to make
comparisons, for example:
NOTE:
In German, als ob, als wenn and als are synonymous. However, als ob is
more common.
Remember that when als is used, the verb will come after the conjunction, while
in the case of als ob and als wenn the conjugated verb in the clause is located
at the end.
To compare:
In Afrikaans, the conjunction of can also be used to express “as if”, for instance:
766
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. seit(dem), Dut. sinds and Afr. sedert/van(dat) - “since” is used to refer
back to a previous point in time, for instance:
Ger. Seitdem ich in Amsterdam lebe, habe ich einen guten Job gefunden.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, conjunctions sedert and van(dat) - “since” are synonymous.
However, sedert can also be a preposition.
Furthermore, the conjunction sinds can also be used to mean “since”, but is not
common in either speech or writing in Afrikaans.
The conjunction Ger. damit, Dut. zodat/opdat and Afr. sodat/opdat is used to mean “so that”
or “with the intention that” (i.e. purpose), for instance:
It is worth saying that the above example can also be expressed by the infinitive without using the
conjunction (See The Infinitive p. 578). Compare the following:
767
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the conjunction opdat can also be used to mean “so
that” indicating goal or intent.
However, in Dutch, it is mainly used in the written language, while in
Afrikaans, opdat is considered very formal.
The conjunction Ger. sodass, Dut. zodat and Afr. sodat is used to express “with the result that”
(i.e. result), for example:
The conjunction Ger. sobald, Dut. zodra and Afr. sodra - “as soon as” can be used to connect
an action or an event to a point in time. Study the following:
Ger. Sobald ich nach Hause komme, werde ich zu Mittag essen.
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the construction so gou as (wat) is also used to express “as soon
as”, for instance:
768
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. solange, Dut. zolang and Afr. solank (as wat) - “as long as” is used to to
refer to the intended duration of a plan or idea. Observe the following:
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the colloquial construction solank as wat is also used to mean
“as long as”, for example:
The conjunction Ger. soweit, Dut. voor zover and Afr. sover - “as far as” is used to introduce
an opinion. To demonstrate:
Did you know? Ger. Soweit ich weiß, kommt sie nicht.
Stuttgart, capital of the German state of Dut. Voor zover ik weet komt ze niet.
Baden-Württemberg, is known as a
manufacturing hub and is often named as Afr. Sover ek weet kom sy nie.
Germany's "Autohauptstadt" ("car capital
city"). It is home to such well-known automobile - As far as I know, she is not coming.
museums as the Mercedes-Benz Museum and
Porsche Museum
769
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. während, Dut. terwijl and Afr. terwyl - “while/whilst” is used to describe
a clause that demonstrates something that is happening at the same time as something else. To illustrate:
The conjunction Ger. während, Dut. nadat and Afr. nadat - “after” is used to introduce a
clause that expresses something that happened after something else. Study the following:
Ger. Nachdem ich meine Arbeit erledigt hatte, ging ich in die Bar.
The conjunction Ger. bevor, Dut. voordat and Afr. voordat - “before” is used to present a
clause that illustrates something that happened before something else.
770

CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunction Ger. wie, Dut. zoals and Afr. soos means “as”, for example:
The conjunction Ger. wie, Dut. zoals and Afr. soos can also be used to mean “ just like, just as”,
for example:
The conjunction Ger. ohne, Dut. zonder and Afr. sonder - “without” must be followed by Ger.
dass, Dut. dat, Afr. dat - “that” when the subject of the dependent clause is different from that of the
main clause.
Ger. Er gibt ihr Geld, ohne dass sie ihn darum bittet.
Dut. Hij geeft haar geld zonder dat ze hem erom vraagt.
Afr. Hy gee vir haar geld sonder dat sy hom daarvoor vra.
NOTE:
It is worth noting that English uses a gerundial construction after “without”
while German, Dutch and Afrikaans uses a subordinate clause. Study the
formula below:
771
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Compare the following phrase where there is only one subject and thus an
infinitive clause must be used:
As with Ger. ohne, Dut. zonder and Afr. sonder - “without” , the conjunction Ger. anstatt,
Dut. in plaats van and Afr. in plaas (daar)van - “instead of” must also be followed by Ger. dass, Dut.
dat, Afr. dat - “that” when the subject of the second clause is different from that of the first.
Ger. Er gibt ihr Geld, anstatt dass sie ihn darum bittet.
Dut. Hij geeft haar geld in plaats van dat zij hem erom vraagt.
Afr. Hy gee vir haar geld in plaas daarvan dat sy hom daarvoor vra.
NOTE:
It is worth reminding that English uses a gerundial construction after “instead
of” while German, Dutch and Afrikaans uses a subordinate clause.
However, if the subject is the same, the following construction introduces the
second clause, which is an infinitive clause:
German Dutch Afrikaans
772
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Afr. Ons moet die venster toemaak, ingeval dit begin reën.
The conjunction Ger. es sei denn, Dut. tenzij and Afr. tensy - “unless” is used to express what
will or will not happen if something else does not happen or is not true, for example:
Dut. Hij verlaat het bedrijf, tenzij hij een salarisverhoging krijgt.
773

CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Correlative Conjunctions
Correlative conjunctions are pairs of conjunctions. In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, correlative
conjunctions connect two elements of the same kind.
Below is a list of some common correlative conjunctions in the West Germanic languages:
sowohl ... als auch zowel … als; sowel … as; (èn) … èn; both…and
en … en beide … en
nicht nur … sondern niet alleen … maar nie net … maar ook not only…but also
auch ook
NOTE:
In Afrikaans, the conjunction Afr. hetsy … hetsy/of can also be used, for
example:
774
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Ger. Sowohl der Lehrer als auch die Schüler lesen den Text.
- Both the teacher and the students are reading the text.
NOTE:
In Dutch and Afrikaans, the conjunctions Dut. en … en and Afr. èn … èn can
also be used to indicate that two things are happening at the same time:
Conjunction not only … but also - nicht nur … sondern auch (Ger.),
niet alleen … maar ook (Dut.), nie net … maar ook (Afr.)
775
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
Conjunctive Adverbs
Conjunctive adverbs in German, Dutch and Afrikaans are used to connect two independent
clauses. They demonstrate relationships such as time, reason, and result.
However, since they are considered to be conjunctive adverbs, and since they cause inversion of
the subject and finite verb that follow, like all adverbs in first position, they are treated as adverbs in this
book, not as conjunctions (See Adverbs p. 180).
Below is a list of some common conjunctive adverbs in the West Germanic languages:
The conjunctive adverb Ger. jedoch, Dut. echter and Afr. egter - “however” is used to show a
contrast or opposition.
Afr. Ons wil reis, egter het ons geen geld nie.
NOTE:
In German, Dutch and Afrikaans, the adverbs Ger. jedoch, Dut. echter and
Afr. egter have almost the same meaning as the conjunction Ger. aber, Dut.
maar and Afr. maar.
Remember that as it is an adverb it must follow the rules for an adverb. For
instance, as an adverb, it is put before the verb and the verb comes right after it.
776
CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
English - We want to travel, however we have no We want to travel, but we have no money.
money.
The conjunctive adverb Ger. andererseits, Dut. daarentegen and Afr. daarenteen - “on the
other hand” is used to show another point of view.
The conjunctive adverb Ger. deshalb, Dut. daarom and Afr. daarom - “therefore” is used to
show a consequence.
Ger. Er hat nicht studiert, deshalb hat er die Prüfung nicht bestanden.
Dut. Hij heeft niet gestudeerd, daarom is hij voor het examen niet geslaagd.
Afr. Hy het nie gestudeer nie, daarom het hy nie die eksamen geslaag nie.
777

CHAPTER 9: CONJUNCTIONS
The conjunctive adverb Ger. danach, Dut. daarna and Afr. daarna - “afterwards” is used to
express a sequence of events.
Ger. Zuerst hat sie ihre Hausaufgaben gemacht, danach ist sie spazieren gegangen.
Afr. Eers het sy haar huiswerk gedoen, daarna het sy gaan stap.
- First, she has done her homework, afterwards she has gone for a walk.
The conjunctive adverb Ger. außerdem, Dut. bovendien and Afr. buitendien - “besides” is
used to add something to what has already been said in German, Dutch and Afrikaans respectively.
The conjunctive adverb Ger. also, Dut. dus and Afr. dus - “thus, so” is used to used to indicate a
conclusion.
Ger. Ich habe keinen Hunger, also möchte ich nicht essen.
778

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
Like in English, in German, Dutch and Afrikaans, an interjection is a word that is used to express
emotion, feeling or spontaneous reaction in the spoken language and can indicate exclamations (wow!),
greetings (hey!), curses (bloody hell!) and etc. The use of these short words will make a speaker sound
more natural and authentic.
Types of Interjections
Below are the most common interjections that are used:
Wie geht es Ihnen?; Hoe gaat het met u? Hoe gaan dit met u? How are you? (formal)
Wie geht's Ihnen?
Wie geht es dir? Wie Hoe gaat het (me Hoe gaan dit met jou? How are you?
geht's dir? je?)? (informal)
Auf Wiedersehen! Tot ziens! Totsiens! Goodbye!
Bis später! Tot later! Sien jou later! See you later!
Bis bald! Tot snel! Sien jou binnekort! See you soon!
Bis zum nächsten Tot de volgende keer! Sien jou volgende See you next time!
Mal! keer!
Bis morgen! Tot morgen! Sien jou môre! See you tomorrow!
779

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
Es freut mich, Sie Aangenaam kennis te Dit is aangenaam om u Nice to meet you!;
kennenzulernen maken!; te ontmoet! (formal); It's a pleasure to meet
(formal); Leuk u te ontmoeten! Dit is lekker om jou te you!
Es freut mich, dich (formal); ontmoet! (informal)
kennenzulernen Leuk je te ontmoeten!
(informal) (informal)
Hallo!, Ja, bitte? Hallo!, Met (your Hallo!, Met (your Hello!
name)! name)! Speaking!
780

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
• To say or write to someone who is celebrating something (his or her birthday or some
other holiday) in order to express the good wishes:
Alles Gute zum Gefeliciteerd met je Veels geluk met jou Happy Birthday!
Geburtstag! verjaardag! (informal) verjaarsdag!
Gefeliciteerd met uw (informal)
verjaardag! (formal) Veels geluk met u
verjaarsdag!
(formal)
Frohe Weihnachten! Vrolijk Kerstfeest! Geseënde Kersfees! Merry Christmas!
Frohes neues Jahr! Gelukkig nieuwjaar! Gelukkige Nuwe Happy New Year!
Jaar!
Frohe Ostern! Vrolijk Pasen! Gelukkige Paasfees! Happy Easter!
781

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
• To wish something (e.g.: a nice day, safe trip, good night and etc.):
Einen schönen Tag! Een fijne dag! ’n Lekker dag! Have a nice day!
Einen schönen Abend! Een fijne avond! ’n Goeie aand! Have a good evening!
782

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
• To indicate that someone does not consider the matter important enough:
Es spielt keine Rolle!, Het maakt niet uit!, Dit maak nie saak nie!, It doesn’t matter!
Es macht nichts aus! Het is niet belangrijk! Dit is nie belangrik nie!
783

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
• To express encouragement:
Halt den Mund! Hou je mond! Hou jou mond! Keep your mouth shut!
784

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
785

CHAPTER 10: INTERJECTIONS
OK?, Oder? OK? Toch? OK? Is dit nie? OK?, isn’t it?\doesn’t it?
(used as filler at the end
of a sentence)
Richtig?, Oder? Toch?, Nietwaar? Nie waar?, Reg? Right?
786

INDEX
INDEX
ab (Ger.), 689, 739 (al)hoewel (Afr.), 762
aber (Ger.), 754, 755 almal (Afr.), 360, 386
abgesehen von (Ger.), 733, 739 als (Dut.), 544, 758, 762, 765
achter (Dut.), 681, 746 als (Ger.), 761, 763
adjectives: als ob/wenn (Ger.), 766
inflection of, 140 also (Ger.), 778
declension of, 142 alsof (Dut.), 766
rules for inflection in German, 143 am (Ger.), 679, 706
spelling rules for inflection in Dutch, 146 an (Ger.), aan (Dut., Afr.):
spelling rules for inflection in Afrikaans, to express that something is placed on a
149 vertical surface, 679
endings after indefinite pronouns, 153 to express on or at the edge of things, 679
indeclinable, 156 to mean to when indicating the recipient
prefixed, 164 of an action, 679
adjective-forming suffixes, 165 with verbs to express from, of, because of,
used with intensifiers, 166 as a result of, 680
making adjectives from verbs, 167-179 to mean on in expressions of time in
nationality adjectives, 179 German, 680
adverbs: in the following expressions, 680
formation of, 180-181 with verbs (on, to), 681
manner, 181 with predicate adjectives, 174
place, 182 aangesien (Afr.), 756, 760
time, 184 aangezien (Dut.), 760
interrogative, 186 ander(-e, -n) (Dut., Afr.), 370, 372
intensity, 190 andere(-r/-s) (Ger.), 370, 372
doubt, 192 andererseits (Ger.), 777
expressing affirmation, 192 anlässlich (Ger.), 734, 749
expressing exclusion, 193 anstatt dass (Ger.), 772
composed of several words, 193 anstelle (Ger.), 729, 749
adverbial phrases, 193 as (Afr.), 544, 758, 761, 762, 765
word order of, 194 as gevolg van (Afr.), 730, 751
comparison of, 198 (as)of (Afr.), 766
superlative of, 200 auch wenn (Ger.), 764
irregular comparatives and superlatives auf (Ger.), 174, 705, 745
of, 215-217 aufgrund (Ger.), 730, 749
afgesien van (Afr.), 733, 740 augmentatives, 89-91
afgezien van (Dut.), 733, 740 aus (Ger.), 687, 688, 702, 739
afhangende van (Afr.), 761 aus der/die/das (Ger.), 349
afhankelijk van (Dut.), 761 ausreichend (Ger.), 378
age, 675 außer (Ger.), 682, 739
agter (Afr.), 681, 746 außerdem (Ger.), 778
al (Dut., Afr.), 384 außerhalb (Ger.), 731, 749
al de (Dut.), 384 arithmetical operations, 660-661
al die (Afr.), 384 article, 218:
al wat ('n) (Afr.), 368 gender, 218-221
all(-e) (Ger., Dut.), 153, 384 indefinite:
albei (Afr.), 389, 393 use of, 221-222
allebei (de) (Dut.), 389, 393 omission of, 227-232
alles (Ger., Dut., Afr.), 355, 356, 387, 391 definite:
alleen (Dut., Afr.), 375, 377 use of, 222-227
alleen als (Dut.), 547 omission of, 232-234
allein(e) (Ger.), 375, 377 contraction of (in German), 238-240
787

INDEX
788

INDEX
789

INDEX
790

INDEX
791

INDEX
792

INDEX
793

INDEX
794

INDEX
795